Nanodac Recording Temperature Controller User Manual

Nanodac Recording Temperature Controller User Manual
nanodac™
User Guide
nanodac™ recorder/controller
Versions 2.0 and later
HA030554/1
July 2010
© 2010 Eurotherm Limited
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose
to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior, written
permission of Eurotherm Limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The
specification in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this
document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept
no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document.
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer’s name:
Eurotherm Limited
Manufacturer’s address:
Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex,
BN13 3PL, United Kingdom.
Product type:
Recorder / controller
Models:
nanodac
Safety specification:
EN61010-1: 2001
Status level A1 upwards
EMC emissions specification: EN61326-1: 2006 Class B
EMC immunity specification:
EN61326-1: 2006 Industrial locations
Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and
EMC specifications listed. Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products
comply with the EMC directive 2004/108/EC, and also with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC.
Signed:
IA249986U790 Issue 1 Jly10 (CN26217)
Dated:
Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited
Kevin Shaw
(R&D Director)
40
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
nanodac Recorder/Controller
User Guide
List of sections
Section
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Modbus TCP slave comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 iTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 User Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Technical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Control Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
3
3
6
26
72
107
126
131
137
163
i
Associated documents
HA028838 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printable version of iTools Help
HA025464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMC installation guidelines
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Page i
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
nanodac Recorder/Controller
User Guide
Contents List
Section
Page
List of sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Associated documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAFETY NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB MEMORY STICK PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-BIT RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 UNPACKING THE INSTRUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 Demounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Termination details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Navigation pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCROLL BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAISE/LOWER BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Alarm icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Status bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FTP ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECORD ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESSAGE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOTUNE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 TOP LEVEL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 Goto View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESSAGE SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPLAY MODE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5 Faceplate Cycling on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6 Operator Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUSTOM NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.7 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOGGED OUT ACCESS LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATOR ACCESS LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPERVISOR ACCESS LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINEER ACCESS LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOGIN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.8 Demand Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARCHIVE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FTP SERVER ARCHIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 DISPLAY MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Vertical trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Horizontal Trend mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page ii
i
i
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
19
19
20
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
List of Contents (Cont.)
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Section
Page
3.4.3 Vertical Bargraph mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Horizontal Bargraph mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Numeric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 Control Loop1/Loop2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDITING TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.7 Promote list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETER SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 TREND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 TEXT ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Numeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 INSTRUMENT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2 Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3 Display configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.4 Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.5 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.6 Security menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.7 Input adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVAL PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 NETWORK MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 Modbus TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 GROUP CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Group Trend configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Group Recording configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Channel Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Channel Trend configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPAN EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Alarm 1 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Alarm 2 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 Alarm types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABSOLUTE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEVIATION ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RATE-OF-CHANGE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 VIRTUAL CHANNEL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.1 Maths channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATHS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.2 Totaliser configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.3 Counter configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 LOOP CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.1 Main menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.2 Setup menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.3 Tune menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.4 PID menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.5 Setpoint menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.6 Output menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.7 Loop diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 DIGITAL I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.1 Digital input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.2 Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.3 Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 USER LIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.1 User linearisation table rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
26
27
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
33
34
35
35
36
38
39
40
40
41
42
43
46
46
46
47
48
49
49
49
50
51
51
52
53
55
56
57
57
58
59
60
61
63
64
64
64
65
66
66
Page iii
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
List of Contents (Cont.)
Section
Page
4.9 CUSTOM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.10 ZIRCONIA BLOCK (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.10.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Carbon Potential Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Sooting Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Automatic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Endothermic Gas Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Clean Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.10.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ZIRCONIA MAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
MAIN PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
GAS REFERENCES PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
CLEAN PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.10.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.11 ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.2.1 Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
DIAGNOSTIC CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
EXCEPTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.2.2 Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
DATA ENCODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.2.4 Master communications timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.2.4 Non-volatile parameters in EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.3 PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
DIGITAL I/O ASSIGNMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6 iTOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.1 iTools CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.1.1 Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.1.2 Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.2 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.3 GRAPHICAL WIRING EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.3.1 Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.3.2 Wiring editor operating details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
COMPONENT SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
FUNCTION BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
WIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
COMMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
COLOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
DIAGRAM CONTEXT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
COMPOUNDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
TOOL TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.4.1 Parameter explorer detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.4.2 Explorer tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.4.3 Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.5 WATCH/RECIPE EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.5.1 Creating a Watch List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ADDING PARAMETERS TO THE WATCH LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
DATA SET CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.5.2 Watch Recipe toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.5.3 Watch/Recipe Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7 USER WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.1 DRIVE RELAY EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.1.1 Wire removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Page iv
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
List of Contents (Cont.)
Section
Page
7.2 COUNTER EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Appendix A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
A1 INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Installation category II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Pollution degree 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
A2 RECORDER SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
A3 ANALOGUE INPUT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
A4 RELAY AND LOGIC I/O SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
A5 DIGITAL INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
A6 BLOCKS SUPPORTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
A6.1 FUNCTION BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
A6.2 APPLICATION BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Appendix B CONTROL LOOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
B.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
B1.1 EXAMPLE (HEAT ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
B2 CONTROL LOOP DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
B2.1 AUTO/MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
B2.2 TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
B2.2.1 On/Off control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
B2.2.2 PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
PROPORTIONAL BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
INTEGRAL TERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
DERIVATIVE TERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
B2.2.3 Motorised valve control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
MANUAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
MOTORISED VALVE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
B2.3 LOOP PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
B2.3.1 Relative cool gain (R2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
B2.3.2 High and Low cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
B2.3.3 Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
B2.3.4 Integral Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
B2.3.5 Integral De-bump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
B2.3.6 Loop Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
B2.3.7 Gain Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B2.4 TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B2.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B2.4.2 Loop Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
UNDER DAMPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
CRITICALLY DAMPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
OVER DAMPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
B2.4.3 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
SETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
OUTPUT HIGH, OUTPUT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
REM. OUTPUT LOW, REM. OUTPUT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Ch2 DeadBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MINIMUM ON TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
CH1 TRAVEL TIME, CH2 TRAVEL TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
B2.4.4 Other tuning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
B2.4.5 Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
AUTOTUNE AND SENSOR BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
AUTOTUNE AND INHIBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
AUTOTUNE AND GAIN SCHEDULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
INITIAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
INITIATING THE AUTOTUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
EXAMPLE 1: AUTOTUNE FROM BELOW SP (HEAT/COOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
EXAMPLE 2: AUTOTUNE FROM BELOW SP (HEAT ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
EXAMPLE 3: AUTOTUNE AT SP (HEAT /COOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
AT.R2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Page v
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
List of Contents (Cont.)
Section
Page
FAILURE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
B2.4.6 Manual tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
CUTBACK VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
B2.5 SETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
B2.5.1 Setpoint function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
B2.5.2 Setpoint Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
B2.5.3 Setpoint Rate Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
B2.5.4 Setpoint Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
B2.5.5 Manual Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
B2.6 OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
B2.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
B2.6.2 Output Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
B2.6.3 Output Rate Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
B2.6.4 Sensor Break Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
B2.6.5 Forced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
B2.6.6 Power Feed Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
B2.6.7 Cool Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
OIL COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
WATER COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
FAN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
B2.6.8 Feed forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
B2.6.9 Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CONTROL ACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
HYSTERESIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
DEADBAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
B2.6.10 Valve nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
B2.6.11 Time Proportioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
B2.7 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Appendix C: REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
C1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
C2 SETTING UP AN FTP SERVER USING FILEZILLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
C2.1 DOWNLOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
C2.2 SERVER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
C2.3 PC SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
C2.4 RECORDER/CONTROLLER SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
C2.5 ARCHIVE ACTIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
C3 FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
C3.1 EIGHT INPUT OR BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
C4 TCP PORT NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
C5 ISOLATION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Page vi
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
SAFETY NOTES
WARNINGS
1. Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus, or disconnection of
the protective earth terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault conditions. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
2. Live sensors: The unit is designed to operate if the temperature sensor is connected directly to
an electrical heating element. It must be ensured that service personnel do not touch connections to such inputs whilst the inputs are live. with live sensors, all cables, connections and switches for connecting the sensor must be mains rated for use in 240V Cat II.
3. Grounding the temperature sensor shield: Where it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor whilst the instrument is live, it is recommended that the shield of the temperature sensor be grounded to safety earth, as an additional protection against electric shock.
4. The instrument must not be wired to a three-phase supply with an unearthed star connection, because, under fault conditions, such a supply could rise above 240V RMS with respect to ground,
thus rendering the instrument unsafe.
Notes:
1. Safety requirements for permanently connected equipment state:
a. A switch or circuit breaker shall be included in the building installation.
b. It shall be in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator.
c. It shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment.
2. Recommended external fuse ratings are: 2A Type T 250V.
1.
This instrument is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications within the
requirements of the European directives on safety and EMC.
2. Installation may be carried out only by qualified personnel.
3. To prevent hands or metal tools coming into contact with parts that are electrically live the instrument
must be installed in an enclosure.
4. Where conductive pollution (e.g. condensation, carbon dust) is likely, adequate air conditioning/filtering/sealing etc. must be installed in the enclosure.
5. The mains supply fuse within the power supply is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse is
faulty, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.
6. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired, the unit shall be made inoperative, and
secured against accidental operation. The manufacturer’s nearest service centre should be contacted
for advice.
7. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment might be impaired.
8. The unit must be wired according to the instructions in this manual.
9. Before any other connection is made, the protective earth terminal shall be connected to a protective
conductor. The mains (supply voltage) wiring must be terminated in such a way that, should it slip, the
Earth wire would be the last wire to become disconnected. The protective earth terminal must remain
connected (even if the equipment is isolated from the mains supply), if any of the I/O circuits are connected to hazardous voltages*.
The protective earth connection must always be the first to be connected and the last to be disconnected.
Wiring must comply with all local wiring regulations, e.g. in the UK, the latest IEEE wiring regulations
(BS7671) and in the USA, NEC class 1 wiring methods.
10. Signal and supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another. Where this is impractical,
shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring.
* A full definition of ‘Hazardous’ voltages appears under ‘Hazardous live’ in BS EN61010. Briefly, under normal operating conditions, hazardous voltages are defined as being > 30V RMS (42.2V peak) or > 60V dc.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 1
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
SAFETY NOTES (Cont.)
11. The maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals must not exceed
240Vac.
1.
Relay output to logic, dc or sensor input connections
2.
Any connection to ground.
The ac supply must not be connected to sensor input or low-level inputs or outputs.
12. Over temperature protection: A separate over-temperature protection unit (with an independent temperature sensor) should be fitted to isolate the process heating circuit should a fault condition arise.
Alarm relays within the recorder/controller do not give protection under all fault conditions/
13. In order to allow the power supply capacitors to discharge to a safe voltage, the supply must be disconnected at least two minutes before the instrument is removed from its sleeve. The touching of the
exposed electronics of an instrument which has been removed from its sleeve should be avoided.
14. Instrument labels may be cleaned using iso-propyl alcohol, or water or water-based products. A mild
soap solution may be used to clean other exterior surfaces.
USB MEMORY STICK PRECAUTIONS
Note: the use of U3 USB Flash drives is not recommended.
1.
2.
3.
Precautions against electrostatic discharge should be taken when the instrument terminals are being
accessed. The USB and Ethernet connections are particularly vulnerable.
Ideally, the USB memory stick should be plugged directly into the instrument, as the use of extension
leads may compromise the instrument’s ESD compliance. Where the instrument is being used in an
electrically ‘noisy’ environment however, it is recommended that the user brings the USB socket to
front of panel using a short extension lead. This is because the USB may ‘lock up’ or reset in noisy environments and the only means of recovery is to remove the device, then re-insert it. EMC-related failure
during a write operation might cause corruption of the data held on a USB memory stick. For this reason, the data on the memory stick should be backed up before insertion and checked after removal.
When using a USB extension cable, a high quality screened cable must be used with a maximum
length of 3 metres (10 ft.)
32-BIT RESOLUTION
Floating point values are stored in IEEE 32-bit single precision format. Values which require greater resolution than is available in this format are rounded up or down.
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING
One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the recorder labelling.
Page 2
Refer to manual for instructions
Risk of electric shock
This unit is CE approved
Precautions against static electrical discharge must be taken when handling
this unit
C-Tick mark for Australia (ACA)
and New Zealand (RSM)
Ethernet connector
Underwriters laboratories listed
mark for Canada and the U.S.A.
USB connector
For environmental reasons, this unit
must be recycled before its age exceeds
the number of years shown in the circle.
Protective conductive terminal
(Safety Earth)
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the installation, operation and configuration of a paperless graphic recorder/controller. The instrument comes with four input channels and is equipped, as standard, for secure archiving
via FTP transfer and/or to USB memory stick.
1.1 UNPACKING THE INSTRUMENT
The instrument is despatched in a special pack, designed to give adequate protection during transit.
Should the outer box show signs of damage, it should be opened immediately, and the contents examined. If there is evidence of damage, the instrument should not be operated and the local representative
contacted for instructions. After the instrument has been removed from its packing, the packing should be
examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been removed. The packing should then
be stored against future transport requirements.
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2.1 gives installation details.
2.1.1 Installation procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
If it is not already in place, fit the IP65 sealing gasket behind the front bezel of the instrument.
Insert the instrument through the panel cutout, from the front of the panel.
Spring the retaining clips into place, and secure the instrument by holding it firmly in place whilst pushing both clips towards the rear face of the panel.
The protective membrane can now be removed from the display.
Retaining spring (two places)
For the sake of clarity, the panel
is shown as though transparent
Push springs towards panel
Figure 2.1.1 Securing the instrument
2.1.2 Demounting
WARNING
Before removing the supply voltage wiring, isolate the supply voltage and secure it against unintended operation.
1.
Isolate the mains supply and secure it against accidental operation. Remove all wiring and the USB
device and Ethernet cable (if any).
2. Remove the retaining springs by unhooking them from the sides using a small flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Pull the instrument forwards out of the panel.
Note: See section C1 (Battery replacement) for a more detailed description
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 3
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)
Side View
Panel cutout:
92mm x 92mm (both -0 + 0.8mm)
3.62in x 3.62in (both -0.00 + 0.03in)
Minimum inter-unit spacing:
Horizontal (‘x’) = 10mm (0.4in)
Vertical (‘y’) = 38mm (1.5in)
Top View
Figure 2.1 Mechanical installation details
Page 4
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2.2 shows the locations of the various user terminations along with signal and supply wiring pinouts.
Brown
Blue
Supply
Voltage
Supply voltage wiring
Safety Earth
I/O1
R>500R = inactive
R<150R = active
Contact closure
Logic output (active low)
O/P2
Relay switching details:
(per terminal)
2A max at 264Vac
100mA min. at 12Vdc
(Both resistive)
O/P3
Relay output
Relay output
Dig InA
Each wire connected
to LA, LB and LC must
be less than 30 metres
in length.
Dig InB
O/P4; O/P5
R>600R = inactive
R<300R = active
R>600R = inactive
R<300R = active
Internal Link (0V)
Contact closure
T/C
mV
0 to 1V
0 to 10V
Contact closure
An In1; An In2; An In3; An In4
Relay output
1R0≤R≤1k0
R<200R = active
R>350R = inactive
T/C, Volts, millivolts
Milliamps
RTD (three wire)
RTD (two wire)
Digital
Figure 2.2 Connector locations and pinouts (rear panel)
2.2.1 Termination details
The screw terminals accept single wires in the range 0.21 to 2.08 mm2 (24 to 14 AWG) inclusive, or two wires
each in the range 0.21 to 1.31 mm2 (24 to 16 AWG) inclusive.
Screw terminals should be tightened to a torque not exceeding 0.4Nm (3.54 lb in)
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 5
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3 OPERATION
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The operator interface consists of a display screen and four push buttons.
3.1.1 Display screen
The display screen is used both to display channel information (in one of a number of display modes), and
to display the various configuration screens which allow the user to setup the recorder to display the required channels, to set up alarms and so on. Display modes are described in section 3.4, below; configuration is described in section 4.
In display mode, the screen is split horizontally into three areas (figure 3.1.1)
1. a faceplate giving channel details.
2. the main display screen showing channel traces etc.
3. the status area, displaying instrument name, the current time and date and any system icons.
Faceplate
Channel 1
6.23V
Main display screen
Status area
Instrument name
Figure 3.1.1 Display mode screen (vertical trend)
In configuration mode, the entire display screen is devoted to the selected configuration menu.
Page 6
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.1.2 Navigation pushbuttons
There are four navigation buttons, called ‘Page’, ‘Scroll’, ‘Lower’ and ‘Raise’ located below the screen.
The general properties of these buttons are described in the remainder of this section, but some have additional, context sensitive functions, which, for the sake of clarity are not described here but in the relevant sections (e.g. ‘Message summary’) of the manual.
PAGE BUTTON
From any non-configuration page, pressing this push button causes the top level menu (figure 3.1.2) to appear. The figure shows the menu for a user logged in with ‘Engineer’ level access. Other access levels may
have fewer menu items.
Within configuration pages, the Scroll button can be used as an enter key to select lower menu levels. In such
cases the page button is used to reverse this action, moving the user up one menu level per operation.
Home
Configuration
Go to View
History
Faceplate cycling (On)
Operator Notes
Demand Archiving
Log out
Figure 3.1.2 Top level menu (Engineer level access)
SCROLL BUTTON
From trending pages, operation of the scroll pushbutton scrolls through the channels enabled in the group.
The Faceplate cycling ‘Off’ selection can be used to keep a particular channel permanently displayed, and
the scroll pushbuttons can then be used to select channels manually.
In configuration pages, the scroll key operates as an ‘enter’ key to enter the next menu level associated with
the highlighted item. Once the lowest menu level is reached, operation of the scroll key allows the value of
the selected item to be edited by the relevant means (for example, the raise/lower keys, or a keyboard entry).
The ‘Page’ key is used to move the user back up the menu structure, until the top level menu is reached,
when the scroll key can be used again to return to the Home page.
The scroll button is also used to initiate user wiring as described in section 7
RAISE/LOWER BUTTONS
Within trending displays, the Raise and Lower keys can be used to scroll through the enabled display modes
in the sequence: vertical trend, horizontal trend, vertical bargraph, horizontal bargraph, numeric, vertical
trend... and so on.
Within configuration pages, these pushbuttons act as cursor keys, allowing, for example, the user to highlight menu items for selection using the scroll button, and in many cases allowing the user to select one from
a number of alternative values within menu items. Theses keys are also used to navigate through the virtual
keyboards (section 3.6) and number pads used to enter text or numeric strings.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 7
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.2 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY
As discussed above, the operator interface consists of a display screen and associated push buttons. The
display screen shows process variables in one of a number of formats, or operational details (notes or alarm
history for example), or configuration details for use in setting up the recorder to produce the required displays and history formats. The remainder of section three discusses the process variable displays, alarm displays and so on; configuration details are to be found in section 4.
Note: Some of the items below can be selected for use only by users with a suitable permission level
as set up in the ‘Instrument’ ‘Security’ menu described in section 4.1.6
Figure 3.2 below, depicts a typical trend display and gives details of the various areas of the display page.
Current point name
Channel 1
6.23V
Current point value and units
Current point scale
Current point ‘pen’
Time/date stamps
Instrument name
Recording status
Inst name
Current time/date
Figure 3.2 Typical display screen (Vertical trend)
Figure 3.2 shows a vertical trend page. Operating the Raise/Lower push-buttons allows the user to scroll
through the other display modes: Horizontal trend, Vertical bargraph, horizontal bargraph, numeric, vertical
trend... and so on. All these display modes are described in section 3.4, below.
A display mode can also be selected from the Top level menu ‘Goto View’ item which appears when the
‘Page’ key
is operated.
The scroll button can be used to scroll through the points in the group, overriding the ‘Faceplate Cycling’
on or off selection
3.2.1 Alarm icons
Notes:
1. A full discussion of alarms is given in the Channel Configuration section of this manual (section
4.4.3)
2. Trigger alarms do not display threshold marks or bars, or faceplate symbols
The alarm icons shown below appear in some display modes. The icons on a channel faceplate show the
status of that channel’s alarm(s), as follows:
Icon is flashing
alarm is active but unacknowledged or it is an Auto alarm which is no longer active but which has not been acknowledged
Icon steadily illuminated the alarm is active and has been acknowledged.
Alarm thresholds and deviation alarm bars appear for horizontal and vertical trend modes. For deviation
bars, the bar stretches from (Reference - Deviation) to (Reference + Deviation). Vertical and Horizontal bargraph modes display only absolute alarm symbols.
Page 8
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.2.1 ALARM ICONS (Cont.)
Absolute High
Absolute Low
Deviation High
Deviation Low
Deviation Band
Rising Rate of change
Falling Rate of change
Digital High
Digital Low
Table 3.2.1 Alarm icons
3.2.2 Status bar Icons
The following items can appear in a dedicated window immediately to the left of the time and date, at the
bottom right-hand corner of the display. The width of this window expands as the number of icons increases, and the instrument name is truncated, as necessary, to make room.
SYSTEM ALARMS
This indicator appears, flashing, if any one or more of the alarms listed below is active. The System Alarms
summary page (accessed from ‘Go to View in the top level menu) allows the user to view such system alarms
as are active. It is not possible to ‘acknowledge’ system alarms
Archive Disabled
Archiving Failed
Archiving Timeout
Battery failure
Clock failure
Channel error
Database failure
DHCP Server failure
FTP Archiving file lost
FTP Archiving to slow
An unattended archiving strategy has temporarily been disabled.
An unattended archiving strategy has failed to complete.
A configured archiving strategy has timed out.
Indicates that the battery is approaching the end of its useful life, or
that it is missing or is completely exhausted.
The internal clock was found to be corrupt at power up, or that the
time has never been set. Time is forced to 00:00 1/1/1900. Can be
caused by battery failure, in which case the battery symbol is also visible and a battery failure message appears. The error is cleared by
setting the time and date.
Indicates a hardware failure in the channel circuit or in the internal
cold junction temperature measurement.
Corrupted EEPROM or flash memory.
For units with ‘IP Type’ set to ‘DHCP’ (Network.Interface configuration)
this alarm occurs if the instrument is unable to obtain an IP address
from the server.
A file has been deleted that had not yet been archived. Possible causes: Communications with the server could not be established,; archive is disabled; archive rate too slow.
The archive rate is too slow to prevent the internal memory from overflowing. The recorder effectively switches to ‘Automatic’ (Section
4.2.2) to ensure that data is not lost.
(Continued)
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 9
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.2.2 STATUS BAR ICONS (Cont.)
FTP Primary Server Failure
FTP Secondary Server Failure
Maths channel failure
Media archiving file lost
Media archiving to slow
Media full
Media missing
Non-volatile memory failure
Recording failure (message)
USB overcurrent
Wiring failure
Page 10
This error occurs if the recorder fails to establish connection with the
primary server, after two attempts. After the second attempt fails, the
recorder attempts to establish connection with the secondary server
instead. Primary and secondary server details are entered in the Network.Archiving area of configuration (Section 4.2.2).
This error occurs if the recorder fails to establish connection with the
secondary server, after two attempts. Primary and secondary server
details are entered in the Network.Archiving area of configuration
(section 4.2.2).
Appears if, for example, the divisor of a divide function is zero.
A file has been deleted that had not yet been archived. Possible causes: Memory stick missing, full or write protected; archiving has been
disabled; archiving rate too slow.
The archive rate is too slow to prevent the internal memory from overflowing. The recorder effectively switches to ‘Automatic’ (Section
4.2.2) to ensure that data is not lost.
Archive storage device is full. The alarm becomes active only when
an archive is in progress.
No archive storage device present when archive attempted.
RAM copy of non-volatile parameters is corrupted.
Message explains reason for failure.
USB power fault - too much current (i.e. >100mA) is being drawn by a
USB device.
The user wiring has failed to verify, i.e. one or more wires has been
detected that does not have both a source and a destination defined.
This may be the result, for example, of power loss during a download
from iTools.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.2.2 STATUS BAR ICONS (Cont.)
CHANNEL ALARM
This indicator appears if any channel (including channels not in the display group) is in an alarm state. The
symbol is illuminated continuously if all alarms are acknowledged or flashes if any one or more alarms is unacknowledged. Alarms are acknowledged from the Root menu ‘Alarm summary’ item as described in section 3.3.3 or in the Channel configuration area (Section 4.4.3) if the user’s access permission is appropriate.
CHANGE BATTERY
This indicator first appears when the battery voltage (checked every 15 minutes) indicates that the battery is
approaching the end of its useful life. The indicator remains on display until the battery is replaced (Appendix C; section C1). A System Alarm is also generated.
USB
This icon appears whenever a memory stick is plugged into the USB port at the rear of the
recorder. When transfer is in progress, the icon changes to a ‘busy’ version.
Memory
stick fitted
Archive in
progress
CAUTION
The Memory stick must not be removed while archiving (demand or automatic) is in progress, as to
do so may irreparably damage the file system of the memory stick, rendering it unusable. It is recommended that all archiving be suspended before the memory stick is removed.
FTP ICON
The FTP icon appears whenever transfer activity is taking place.
RECORD ICON
One of four icons appears at the bottom left corner of the display to indicate recording status.
Record
This indicates that the recorder is recording the items selected in the Group Recording area of configuration
(section 4.3).
Stopped
This means that ‘Enable’ has been set to ‘no’ in the Group Recording area of configuration (section 4.3).
Trending is not affected.
Paused (Suspended)
This means that recording has been paused by a wire to the Suspend parameter (Group Recording area of
configuration (section 4.3)) going true (high). Trending is not affected.
In Configuration
The recorder has been placed in configuration mode either at the user interface, or via iTools. Recording is
stopped until the recorder is no longer in configuration mode. For each non-recording state (Stopped,
Paused or In Configuration) A new history file is created when the unit comes out of configuration mode.
MESSAGE ICON
This ‘envelope’ icon appears when a message is generated and it remains on display until the Message Summary is accessed, when it is removed from the display until the next new message is generated.
AUTOTUNE ICON
For instruments fitted with the Loop option, this symbol appears during the Autotune process.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 11
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.3 TOP LEVEL MENU
This menu appears when the page key is operated from any non-configuration page. The menu items displayed depend on the access permission of the user. One of the menu items is highlighted, and if the scroll
key is operated, then it is the highlighted item that is ‘entered’.
Figure 3.3 shows the top level menu for Engineer level access.
Section 3.3.1
Section 3.3.2
Section 3.3.3
Section 3.3.4
Section 3.3.5
Section 3.3.6
Section 3.3.7
Section 3.3.8
Home
Configuration
Go to View
History
Faceplate cycling (On)
Operator Notes
Login
Demand Archive
Page key
Scroll key
Figure 3.3 Top level menu
3.3.1 Home
Operating the scroll key whilst ‘Home’ is highlighted causes a return to the ‘Home’ page. By default, this is
the vertical trend mode, but the mode can be changed in ‘Instrument.Display’ configuration (section 4.1.3)
3.3.2 Configuration
Operating the down arrow key highlights the ‘Configuration’ item. Operating the Scroll key enters the configuration submenu described in section 4 of this manual.
Note: ‘Configuration’ appears only if the user has an appropriate access level.
3.3.3 Goto View
Operating the scroll key whilst the ‘Goto view’ item is highlighted, calls the Goto view submenu (figure
3.3.3a). This allows the user to view channel alarms, system alarms, messages or to select a different display
mode.
Alarm Summary
System Alarms
Message Summary
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric
Control
Dual Loop
Promote List
Alarm Summary
System Alarms
Message Summary
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric
Control
Control (Dual Loop)
Promote List
Figure 3.3.3a Goto view submenu
Page 12
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.3.3 GOTO VIEW (Cont.)
ALARM SUMMARY
For each active alarm, this page displays the channel identifier with alarm number (e.g. C1(2) = channel 1;
alarm 2), the channel descriptor, the alarm threshold the current process value and an alarm type symbol.
To return to the top level menu, operate the Page key.
Notes:
1. The background colour to the channel ID is the same as that chosen for the channel.
2. A prefix ‘C’ in the channel ID means that this is a measuring channel; A prefix ‘V’ means that this
is a virtual channel (i.e. a totaliser, counter or maths channel)
Alarm Threshold
Channel descriptor
Channel ID
(Alarm number)
C1(2)
C2(1)
C3(1)
C4(1)
Channel current process value
Alarm Summary
Furnace 1 temp 1
750.00
Furnace 1 temp 3
750.00
Furnace 1 temp 2
590.00
Furnace 2 temp 1
645.00
Alarm Type indicator
798.39
763.89
603.39
630.71
Page key
Scroll key
Figure 3.3.3b Alarm summary page with acknowledge confirmation display
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
To acknowledge an alarm from this view:
1. Use the up and down arrows to highlight the required
alarm
2.
Alarm Summary
C1(2)
C2(1)
C3(1)
C4(1)
Operate the scroll button. The ‘Acknowledge alarm’
window appears.
Furnace 1 temp 1
Furnace 1 temp 3
Furnace 1 temp 2
Furnace 2 temp 1
Use the up arrow to highlight the relevant field (C2(1) in this
example), or ‘All’ if all alarms are to be acknowledged.
C2(1)
All
Acknowledge alarm?
No
4.
763.26
770.01
595.83
644.33
Acknowledge alarm?
No
3.
750.00
750.00
590.00
645.00
C2(1)
All
Operate the scroll key to confirm. If the alarm fails to respond,
this may be due to the fact that it has been configured as a ‘Manual’ alarm, and the trigger has not yet
returned to a ‘safe’ (non-alarm) state, or it could be that the instrument is in a logged out state.
SYSTEM ALARMS
Operating the scroll button whilst the ‘System Alarms’ field is highlighted displays a list of all currently active
system alarms. Section 3.2.2 contains a list of system alarms and their interpretations. To return to the top
level menu, operate the Page key.
A further operation of the scroll button displays a ‘Help Information’ page, giving the reason for the highlighted alarm.
Operate the scroll button again to return to the system alarm display.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 13
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.3.3 GOTO VIEW (Cont.)
MESSAGE SUMMARY
Operating the scroll key whilst the ‘Message summary’ field is highlighted displays the10 most recent messages. Operating the scroll key whilst a message is highlighted shows the selected message in more detail,
and using the up/down keys allows the other messages to be scrolled through.
By default, the interface is set up such that:
1. all message types are included
2. the up and down arrow keys cause the highlighted selection to move up or down by one message at a
time.
Message Summary (All Messages) 9/47
20/11/09 08:06:37 Inactive: Ch1(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:29 Active: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:22 Active: Ch1(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:19 Inactive: Ch2(Al2)
20/11/09 08:06:18 Inactive: Ch1(Al2)
20/11/09 08:06:09 Inactive: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:01 Active: Ch1(Al2)
20/11/09 08:05:59 Active: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:05:22 Battery flat less than 5% re
20/11/09 08:05:22 Power up
20/11/09 08:05:22
Battery flat less than 5% remaining
Use Up/down arrow
keys to scroll through
other messages
Use scroll button to scroll through ‘All Messages’,
‘System’, ‘Alarm’ and ‘Power Up’. Use page button
to confirm selection.
All Messages
Use scroll button to return to refreshed Message
Summary page.
Refresh
Exit Messages
Use the scroll or page button to return to the top
level menu.
Figure 3.3.3c Message summary features
MESSAGE FILTERS
All Messages
System
Alarm
Power up
Login/out
Page 14
Causes all messages to be displayed on the screen.
Shows only system alarms
Shows only channel alarms
Shows only power up messages
Limits the display to Log in and Log out events.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.3.3 GOTO VIEW (Cont.)
DISPLAY MODE SELECTION
Use the up/down arrow buttons to highlight the required display mode.
Once the required display mode is highlighted, operation of the scroll
button causes the recorder to leave the ‘Go to’ menu and to display channel values in the selected mode. See section 3.4 for a description of the
various display modes.
Alternatively the up and down arrow buttons can be used from any of the
display modes to cycle through the available modes in the order listed in
the figure.
3.3.4 History
This top level menu item allows the user to switch from real-time trending
to review mode, where channel values, messages, alarm triggers etc. can
be viewed back as far as the last significant configuration change. History
mode is fully discussed in section 3.5.
Alarm Summary
System Alarms
Message Summary
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric
Control
Control (Dual Loop)
Promote List
3.3.5 Faceplate Cycling on/off
For the purposes of this document the channel whose faceplate is currently displayed and whose ‘pen’ symbol is visible is called the ‘Active’ channel.
By default, the recorder scrolls through all the channels in the display group, with each channel becoming
the active channel in turn. This top level menu ‘Faceplate Cycling’ item allows the user to inhibit this scrolling
action such that the currently active channel remains active permanently, or until a manual scroll is performed using the scroll button (or until Faceplate Cycling is re-enabled).
‘Faceplate Cycling’ is highlighted by using the up/down arrow buttons. Once highlighted, the status can be
changed from ‘On’ to ‘Off’ or vice-versa using the scroll button. Operation of the ‘Page’ button returns the
user to the trend display.
3.3.6 Operator Notes
This area allows up to 10 notes to be created when logged in as Engineer, using either the text entry techniques described in section 3.6, or ‘iTools’ described in section 6. Once logged out, operating the scroll button whilst a note is highlighted calls a selection box allowing the user either to send that note to the chart,
or to write a Custom Note.
CUSTOM NOTE
The Custom Note is written using the text entry techniques described in section 3.6. Once the note is complete, operation of the page button calls a confirmation display. The down arrow is used to highlight ‘Yes’,
and when the scroll key is then operated, the message is sent to the chart. This custom message is not retained for further use, so if it is required on a regular basis, it is suggested that one of the Operator Notes 1
to 10 be configured (Engineer access level required) so that it may be used instead.
Note: Each note can contain up to 100 characters.
3.3.7 Login
Login allows the user to enter a password in order to gain access to areas of the unit’s configuration which
are not available when the user is logged out.
LOGGED OUT ACCESS LEVEL
Logged out mode allows the user to select viewing mode, to view history, to view alarms, to toggle faceplate
cycling on and off, to send notes, to suspend/resume USB archiving and to access the login process.
OPERATOR ACCESS LEVEL
In addition to the logged out features, Operator access level allows the user to acknowledge alarms, to edit
notes and to perform demand archive operations.
By default, no password is required in order to enter Operator level, but a password can be set either at Supervisor level or at Engineer level.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 15
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.3.7 LOGIN (Cont.)
SUPERVISOR ACCESS LEVEL
In addition to the logged out level function, this access level allows the user to view the recorder’s configuration, and to edit some values (such as alarm thresholds). By default, there is no password required to enter
Supervisor level, but a password can be set in the Instrument area of configuration, either at Supervisor level
or at Engineer level.
ENGINEER ACCESS LEVEL
This allows full access to all areas of the recorder configuration. The default password is 100, but this can be
edited in the Instrument area of configuration (section 4.1.5).
Note: recording is stopped for as long as the user is logged in at Engineer level,
even if the recorder is not being configured. This is indicated by the Record icon at
the bottom left corner of the process value display screen being replaced by the
Configuration (wrench) icon.
Record icon
Configuration
icon
LOGIN PROCEDURE
From the top level menu, use the up or down arrow keys as often as necessary in order to highlight ‘Login’,
and then operate the Scroll key to produce the ‘Access Logged out’ display.
Note: this procedure describes how to login to an access level with a password associated with it.
For non-password protected logins, the user needs only to select the required access level, and
press the scroll key.
To log in as Engineer
(password = 100):
Access Logged out
1.
Operate the up
arrow key three
times, to display
‘Engineer’.
Password
Access Operator
Access Supervisor
2.
Press the scroll key
to call the ‘alpha’
keyboard, with the
letter ‘q’ highlighted.
Access Engineer
Access Engineer
Password
3.
Use the down
arrow key three
times to highlight
‘Numeric’.
4.
Operate the scroll key to display the numeric keyboard
(numeral ‘1’ highlighted.)
Operate the scroll key to enter ‘1’, then use the up arrow
key nine times to highlight numeral ‘0’ and use the scroll
key twice to enter ‘0’ 0’, completing the password of 100.
Use the Page key to call the confirmation display.
5.
6.
7.
Page 16
Password
Accept changes
Cancel
No
Yes
If the password entry is as required, use the up arrow twice (or the down arrow once) to highlight the
word ‘Yes’ and operate the scroll key to confirm. The top level configuration menu appears. Otherwise, ‘Cancel’ can be used to clear the entry in order to start again, or ‘No’ can be used to quit login.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.3.8 Demand Archive
This allows a user, with a high enough access level, to archive a selected portion of the recorder history, either to a ‘memory stick’ plugged into the USB port at the rear of the recorder (Local Archiving), or to a pc, by
means of the FTP protocol (Remote Archiving). The archived data remains in the flash memory of the instrument. When the flash memory is full, new data causes the oldest file(s) to be discarded.
The up and down arrow keys are used to navigate to the required field.
ARCHIVE MENU
Demand Archiving
Archive To USB
Archive None
Suspend Schedule No
Cancel All No
Status Complete
Last Written On 02/02/2010 11:37:09
Demand Archiving
Archive To FTP Server
Archive None
Cancel All No
Pri Status Complete
Sec Status Connecting
Last Written On 02/02/2010 11:37:09
Figure 3.3.8 Demand Archive menu (Local Archiving on left; Remote Archiving on right)
Archive To
With this item highlighted, the scroll button and the up/down arrows can be used to select ‘USB’ or ‘FTP Server’.
For ‘USB’, the archive will be made to the rear USB memory stick. For ‘FTP Server’ the
archive will be made to the Primary or Secondary server (configured in the Network.Archive area of configuration described in section 4.2.2.) For more details about remote
archiving, see ‘Remote archiving’, below.
Archive
In a similar way, select the archive period:
None: No archiving to take place. (Not editable when logged out)
Last Hour: Archives all files created within the last 60 minutes.
Last Day: Archive all files created in the last 24 hours.
Last Week: Archives all files created in the past seven days.
Last Month: Archives all files created in the past 31 days.
Archive All: Archives all the files in the recorder’s history.
Bring To Date: Archives all files created or updated since the ‘Last Archive’ date and
time.
Suspend Schedule When set to ‘Yes’, automatic (scheduled) archiving is stopped, once the transfer of the
current file is complete. Suspend Schedule must be set to ‘No’ again, to restart the suspended archive. Suspend can be used to allow the memory stick to be removed and
re-fitted safely.
Cancel All
When set to ‘Yes’, this cancels USB archiving activity immediately, or cancels FTP archiving once transfer of the current file (if any) is complete.
Last Written on
Shows the date and time at which the last archive (demand or automatic) was performed. If a demand archive is requested, or is in operation when an automatic archive
is triggered, the automatic archive takes precedence.
Status
For Archive to USB only
‘Complete’ means that no archiving is currently taking place.
‘Transferring’ indicates that an archiving is in progress. Accompanied by an animated
circular display.
‘Suspended’ means that archiving has been suspended as requested.
PriStatus
For Archive to FTP Server only, this shows the transfer status between the instrument
and the primary host computer.
SecStatus
For Archive to FTP Server only, this shows the transfer status between the instrument
and the secondary host computer.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 17
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.3.8 DEMAND ARCHIVE (Cont.)
FTP SERVER ARCHIVING
This allows the archiving of recorder files to a remote computer via the RJ45 type connector at the rear of
the recorder, either directly or via a network.
In order to carry out a successful transfer:
1. Details of the remote host must be entered in the Network.Archive area of configuration (section
4.2.2).
2. The remote computer must be set up as an FTP server. Help from the user’s IT department may be
necessary in order to achieve this. Appendix C, Section C2 to this manual suggests one way, using
Filezilla.
When accessing files using Microsoft®Internet Explorer, the address (URL) field can be in one of two formats:
1. ftp://<instrument IP address>. This allows a user to log in as the anonymous user (if the recorder has
any account with the user name set to ‘anonymous’ with a blank password.
2. ftp://<user name>:<password>@<instrument IP address> to log in as a specific user.
For IE5 users, Microsoft® Internet Explorer displays, by default’ history files only. to quit the history folder,
either uncheck the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/’Enable folder view for FTP sites’ option, or
check the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/’Use Web based FTP’ option.
Page 18
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.4 DISPLAY MODES
The following subsections describe the various display modes available to the user. by default, the ‘Home’
display mode is ‘Vertical Trend’, but this can be edited as a part of ‘Instrument.Display’ configuration. This
configuration area also allows the user to disable one or more display modes should they not be required.
The current display mode can be chosen either by using the top level menu ‘Go to View’ item or, from any
display mode, by scrolling through the enabled modes using the up or down arrow button.
3.4.1 Vertical trend
In this mode, channel values are traced as though on a chart rolling downwards (i.e with the latest data at the
top). The chart speed, and the number of major divisions are configured in the ‘Group.Trend’ area of configuration (section 4.3.1). By default, the chart background is black, but this can be changed to white or grey
in the ‘Instrument’ ‘Display’ area of configuration (section 4.1.3).
Faceplate
Current point name
Current point scale
Channel 1
6.23V
Current point value
Current trace ‘pen’
Time/date stamp
Recording symbol
Inst name
Current time/date
Instrument name
Status icons
Figure 3.4 Vertical trend mode display elements
One of the channels is said to be the ‘current’ or ‘scale’ channel. This channel is identified by its pen icon
being displayed, and by the channel descriptor, dynamic value and its scale being displayed on a ‘faceplate’
across the width of the display, above the chart.
Each channel in the Group becomes the ‘current’ channel in turn, for approximately five seconds -i.e. the
channels are cycled through, starting with the lowest numbered channel. Once the final channel in the
Group has ben displayed for five seconds, the first channel is returned-to and the process repeats. This
scrolling behaviour can be enabled/disabled from the top level menu ‘Faceplate Cycling (Off)’ item described in section 3.3.5.
The scroll button can be used to cycle through the channels manually in both Faceplate cycle on and off
modes.
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered (default = horizontal trend).
Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 19
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.4.2 Horizontal Trend mode
This view is similar to the vertical trend mode described in section 3.4.1 above, except that the traces are
produced horizontally rather than vertically. Initially, as each channel appears, its scale appears at the left
edge of the display (as shown below), but in order to show the maximum amount of trend data, the scale is
overwritten after a few seconds.
Channel 1
6.23V
By default, after a few seconds, the
‘chart’ expands leftwards to hide
the scale. This feature can be disabled in the Instrument.Display area
of configuration (section 4.1.3,
H.Trend scaling) so that the scale is
permanently on display.
Inst name
Figure 3.4.2 Horizontal trend display mode
Note: Timestamps appear to the right of the gridline to which they relate
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered (default = vertical bargraph). Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
3.4.3 Vertical Bargraph mode
This display mode shows the channel values as a histogram. Absolute alarm threshold values appear as lines
across the bars, grey if the alarm is not triggered; red if the alarm is triggered. Alarm symbols appear for
active alarms.
Bargraph widths for four to six channels divide the width of the display screen equally between them. For
one and two channels, the width is fixed, and the bars are centred on the screen. Figure 3.4.3 shows some
examples (not to the same scale).
Channel 1
35.40V
Full scale value
Active alarm symbol
2 channels
Alarm threshold (active)
Alarm threshold (non-active)
1 channel
‘Zero’ value
Inst name
Figure 3.4.3 Vertical bargraph display mode
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered (default = horizontal bargraph). Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
Page 20
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.4.4 Horizontal Bargraph mode
Similar to the Vertical bargraph mode described in section 3.4.3, above, but includes channel descriptors.
Furnace 1 temp 12
Furnace 1 temp 12
2 channels
Channel 2
The scroll button toggles
the text between point
descriptor (as shown) and
point value.
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
VirtualChan 1
Furnace 1 temp 12
1 channel
VirtualChan 2
Inst name
Figure 3.4.4 Horizontal bargraph mode
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered (default = numeric).
Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
3.4.5 Numeric mode
Shows the enabled channels’ values along with their descriptors and with indications of the type(s) of alarm
configured for each channel.
Furnace 1 temp 12
Channel 4
Channel 2
VirtualChan 1
Channel 3
VirtualChan 2
Alarm type indication
(table 3.2.1)
Inst name
Figure 3.4.5a Numeric display mode (six enabled channels)
The figure above shows the case where there are six channels enabled in the group. The five channel layout
leaves the bottom right-hand sixth of the display blank. For one to four channels, the channels occupy the
width of the display, but divide the height of the screen equally amongst them as shown in the figure below.
6 channels
5 channels
4 channels
3 channels
2 channels
1 channel
Figure 3.4.5b Display layout for different numbers of channels
The up arrow button returns to the vertical trend display mode; the page key calls the top level menu.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 21
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.4.6 Control Loop1/Loop2
These displays appear only if the controller option is enabled (section 4.1.6).
Unlike other display modes, the loop display modes are interactive, in that the setpoint, the Auto/Manual
mode and the Manual Output value can be edited from the user interface. Full configuration is carried out
in the Loop setup menus (section 4.6) and a fuller description of control loops is to be found as Appendix B
to this manual.
Figure 3.4.6 depicts a single loop display and the dual loop display. The up and down arrow keys are used
as normal to scroll through Loop1, Loop2 and Dual loop pages.
Loop 1
Loop 1
°C
SP1
Mode Manual
Man Op
PV
WSP
SP1
SP1
Mode Manual
WSP
WSP
Loop 2
Working Output
SP
PV
PV
Mode Manual
Man Op
PV
WSP
Man Op
Figure 3.4.6 Loop displays
Note: The colours associated with the loops are those of the channels to which they are wired.
EDITING TECHNIQUES
1.
2.
With the loop page on display, operate the Scroll key. This highlights the first editable item (SP1). The scroll order includes both loop1 and loop 2 parameters in the
dual loop display.
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the required field for editing. When the
required field is highlighted, operate the scroll key again, to enter edit mode.
SP1
Mode Manual
Man Op
SP1
Mode Manual
Man Op
SP1
Mode Manual
Man Op
3.
Use the up/down arrows to edit the current setting.
SP1
Mode Auto
Man Op
4.
Operate the scroll key to confirm the edit.
SP1
Mode Auto
5.
Select a further parameter for editing, or operate the page key to return to normal
operation.
Man Op
Note: Edit permissions for Setpoint and Auto/Manual are set in the Loop Setup
configuration menu (section 4.6.2).
Page 22
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.4.7 Promote list
This display page allows the user to display up to 10 of the parameters that appear anywhere in the operator
interface. The parameters can be selected only by using iTools, as described below.
Notes:
1. ‘Promote List’ must be enabled (in ‘Instrument.Display’ configuration), before it appears in the ‘Go
to View’ list.
2. There are more parameters visible in iTools than appear at the operator interface. If non-operator
interface parameters are selected for inclusion in the promote list, they do not appear.
3. If parameters which appear only in certain circumstances are selected, then they appear in the
promote list only when they appear in the Operator interface. For example, a channel PV is not
visible unless that channel is enabled (i.e. it is not ‘Off’).
PARAMETER SELECTION
1. Open iTools and scan for the instrument, (see section 6).
2. Once the instrument has been found, stop the scan. When the instrument has synchronised, click on
the ‘Access’ button near the top of the display to set the unit into configuration mode (a password may
be required).
3. Click on the ‘+’ sign to the left of the Instrument folder in the tree list (left-most pane) to expand the
folder. Double-click on ‘Promote List’, to display the Promote list in the main pane. The list contains 20
entries, 1 to 10 being for parameters, 11 to 20 being available to the user to add descriptors for parameters 1 to 10 respectively.
4. Expand further folders, as necessary, to access the required parameters, and click-drag these parameters into the promote list. Enter a descriptor for the parameter if the default is not as required. As each
parameter is dragged into the list, it appears in the Promote list.
5. If the parameters are modified at the operator interface, the changes are reflected in iTools, and viceversa.
6. Once all the parameters have been added, it is recommended that the Access button be used to quit
configuration mode, as otherwise it will not subsequently be possible to quit from the operator interface.
Figure 3.4.7 shows typical displays.
Promote List
Chan 1 Tmp
T/C 157A
Channel.1.Main.Units
Group.Recording.Enable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Active
Promote list (iTools)
268.34°C
H2O Tmp 12
°C
Yes
Yes
Promote list
(Operator interface)
Figure 3.4.7 Promote list displays.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 23
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.5 TREND HISTORY
Entered from the top level menu (section 3.1), this allows vertical and horizontal traces to be reviewed, one
screen height/width* at a time. The amount of data displayed in one screen depends on the recording interval selected in Group Recording configuration (section 4.3.2).
The history display is identical in appearance with the trend display except:
1. History displays can include alarm and operator messages if so desired.
2. For horizontal trends, the scale is displayed permanently at the left edge of the display.
Home
Configuration
Go to view
History
Enter trend history mode
Faceplate cycling (Off)
Operator Notes
Demand Archiving
Log out
Figure 3.5a Top level menu
3.5.1 Navigation
The down arrow button moves the display backwards in time by one screen height* per operation (assuming
that the current display is not the earliest).
The up arrow button moves the display forwards in time by one screen height* per operation (assuming that
the current display is not the latest).
The scroll key scrolls through the group channels displaying each channel’s value at the time represented
by the top edge of the screen (right hand edge for horizontal trends).
The page key calls the history options menu, described below.
* The options menu, described below, offers a number of alternative choices for defining how much the history jumps for one button press.
3.5.2 Options menu
Operating the page key from any history display, causes the history options menu to appear. For this menu,
the scroll button is used to scroll to the required selection, and the page button to return to the history display.
Note: When quitting history mode, the scroll key causes a return to the level one menu, where a further selection must be made, and confirmed by scroll key action. Operation of the page key, before
this selection returns the user to the history display.
Use scroll key to select message display on or off.
Messages (Off)
Full page Scroll
Reset History
Exit History
Use the scroll key to select one of ‘Full Page Scroll’, ‘Half
Page Scroll’, ‘1 Hour Scroll’, ‘12 Hour Scroll’ or ‘24 Hour
Scroll’. Selecting ‘1 Hour Scroll’ for example means that
the displayed time period shifts by one hour for every operation of the up or down arrow buttons.
Returns the history to the time at which ‘History’ was entered.
Scroll key quits history mode
Figure 3.5.2 Options menu
Page 24
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
3.6 TEXT ENTRY
The user is often required to enter text characters or numbers (when editing operator notes, for example).
This is done using the pop-up keyboards which are displayed when required. When only numerals are required a special keyboard is presented which contains only numerals.
Figure 3.6 shows the three standard keyboards, along with a ‘scan’ direction for operations of both up arrow
and down arrow keys. To change keyboards, use the arrow pushbuttons to highlight the keyboard name
(‘Numeric’, ‘Symbols’ or ‘Alpha’), and then operate the scroll button.
Generally, to enter text, the required character is highlighted using the up and down arrows and the scroll
button is used as an ‘Enter’ key. Once text entry is complete, the Page button is used to confirm the edit (use
the down arrow to select ‘Yes’ then operate the scroll button).
Pressing and holding the scroll button and then immediately operating the up or down arrow, causes the
character insertion point to move to the left (down arrow) or to the right (up arrow).
The user can press and hold the scroll key to display variations on certain characters (the letter ‘e’ in the figure). Once displayed, the up and down arrows can again be used to scroll through auxiliary list, allowing capital letters, and characters with diacriticals (e.g. accents, umlauts, tildes, cedillas) to be selected and entered
using the scroll button.
The backarrow key is used as a back space key - i.e. it deletes the character to the left of the cursor position.
The ‘Del’ key deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
Note: Leading and trailing space characters are automatically removed from text strings.
Press and hold scroll
button for alternative
character set.
Ω Γ Ε
Θ Π Σ Τ
Figure 3.6 Standard Keyboards
3.6.1 Numeric keyboard
As mentioned previously, for functions which can take only numerals, a special numeric keyboard appears,
as depicted in figure 3.6.1.
Figure 3.6.1 Numeric keyboard
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 25
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4 CONFIGURATION
Entered from the top level menu (section 3.1) this allows the recorder configuration to be accessed and edited (‘Engineer’ access level required for full editing).
CAUTION
Recording is stopped for as long as the recorder login is at Engineer level. This means that Input/
output circuits are switched off during configuration.
As shown in figure 4, below, the recorder configuration is arranged in a number of ‘areas’, each of which is
allocated its own sub-section within section 4.
Instrument
Section 4.1
Home
Network
Section 4.2
Configuration
Group
Section 4.3
Go to View
Channel
Section 4.4
History
Virtual Channel
Section 4.5
Faceplate cycling (Off)
Loop
Section 4.6
Operator Notes
Digital I/O
Section 4.7
Demand archiving
User Lin
Section 4.8
Log out
Custom Message
Section 4.9
Zirconia
Section 4.10
Alarm Summary
Section 4.11
Figure 4 Top level configuration menu
The factory default configuration can be returned-to, if required, by entering a special Engineer password,
as described in section 4.1.6.
Page 26
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.1 INSTRUMENT MENU
Instrument
Clock
(section 4.1.1)
Date
Time
Input Adjust
Locale
Display
Info
Upgrade
Security
(section 4.1.2) (section 4.1.3) (section 4.1.4) (section 4.1.5) (section 4.1.6) (section 4.1.7)
Language
Date Format
Time zone
DST Enable
Brightness
Name
Save After
Type
Saver Brightness
Version
Home Page
Bootrom
HPage Timeout
Company ID
Vertical Trend
Conf Rev
Horizontal Trend
Security Rev
Vertical Bar
Nvol writes
Horizontal Bar
Line Voltage
Numeric
Loop Control
Dual Loop
Promote List
Trend Background
Type
Engineer Pass- Select channels
Start IP adjust
IP Address
word
Abort
Username
Supervisor PassPassword
word
Source Path Operator Password
Initiate
Feature Password
Comms Password
4.1.1 Clock
The up and down arrows are used to highlight ‘Date’ (default) or ‘Time’.
To set the date, the scroll button is used to display the numeric keyboard described in section 3.6.1. The up
and down arrows are used to highlight the relevant numeral or separator (‘/’ or ‘:’) and the scroll key used to
enter it into the display window.
To set the time, the scroll button is operated to enter edit mode, then the up and down buttons are used to
scroll to display a time, say 15 seconds later than the current time. Once the current time matches the display, the scroll button is pressed to confirm the time and to start the clock.
Instrument.Clock
Date
Time
DST
The ‘DST’ field appears only If ‘DST Enable’ is selected ‘Yes’, in ‘Locale’ (section 4.1.2). If the ‘box’ contains a
cross (as shown) then Daylight Saving Tme (DST) is not currently active. A ‘tick’ means that the time shown
has been advanced by an hour because DST is active.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 27
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.1.2 Locale
Instrument.Locale
Language English
Date Format DD/MM/YY
Time Zone GMT
DST Enable Yes
Start Time 01:00
Start On Last
Start Day
Sunday
Start Month March
End Time 02:00
End On Last
End day Sunday
End Month October
Figure 4.1.2 Typical Instrument configuration menu (expanded to show all fields)
Language
Date format
English is the only language available at this software release.
With the DD/MM/YY field highlighted (default), use the scroll button to open the selection for edit, then use the up and down arrows to scroll through the available date formats: MM/DD/YY, YY/MM/DD. When the required format is displayed, operate the
Scroll button to select it and at the same time to quit edit mode.
Time Zone
Select the required offset from GMT (UTC). This setting affects only the displayed time.
Archiving, recording etc. times remain in GMT.
DST Enable
Daylight Saving Time enable. Once the selection is enabled, the following (previously
hidden) fields appear, allowing the start and end dates for Daylight Saving Time (DST)
to be configured. DST affects only the displayed time. Archiving, recording etc. times
remain in GMT.
Start Time
Appears only when ‘DST Enable’ (above) is set to ‘Yes’
Start On
With this field highlighted, the scroll button is used to enter edit mode, which allows the
user to use the up and down arrows to scroll through the following: ‘Last’, ‘First’, ‘Second’, ‘Third’ or ‘Fourth’. Once the required week is displayed, operate the Scroll button
to select it and at the same time to quit edit mode. Used in conjunction with the ‘Start
Day’ and ‘Start Month’ entries following.
Start Day
Use the normal selection and scroll techniques to select the day of the week on which
DST is to commence.
Start Month
Use the normal selection and scroll techniques to select the month in which DST is to
commence.
End Time, End On, End Day, End Month
As for ‘Start Time’ etc. above, but specifies the end time and date for daylight savings.
Page 28
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.1.3 Display configuration
This allows the user to set display brightnesses and screen saver details, to select a display mode as the
‘Home’ page, and to enable/ disable the various display modes. The normal ‘Select, Scroll, Enter’ editing
technique is used as has been previously described.
Instrument.Display
Brightness 70%
Save After 7 min
Saver Brightness 50%
Home Page V.Trend
HPage Timeout Off
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Home page
(always enabled)
Mode disabled
Vertical Bar
Horizontal Bar
Mode enabled
Promote List
Trend Backgrnd Black
History Backgrnd DarkGrey
H.Trend Scaling Hide
Faceplate Cycling Off
Setpoint colour Red
Figure 4.1.3 Display menu (expanded to show all fields)
Brightness
Allows the user to select a normal operating brightness for the screen from 10% to
100%, in 10% steps.
Save After
The elapsed time (since last button press) before the screen switches from ‘Brightness’
to ‘Saver Brightness’. (Off = saver function disabled)
Saver Brightness
The screen saver brightness. Valid entries are 10% to 100% inclusive, in 10% steps. Using a lower power when not ‘in use’ not only saves power, but also increases display life.
Typical screen power consumption is 0.5W at 100%, falling in a linear fashion to 0.05W
at 10%.
Home page
Allows any display mode to be chosen as the ‘Home’ page. This is the page that the
recorder displays at power up, and also the page displayed when the ‘Home’ key is selected from the top level menu (section 3.3). The selected display mode (vertical trend
in figure 4.1.3) is always enabled in the following display mode enable fields (its ‘tick’
is greyed out and cannot be edited). See section 3.4 for a description of the available
modes.
HPage Timeout
The elapsed time (since last button press) before the display returns to the home
screen. (Off = disabled)
Vertical Trend
This is the default home page, and its tick is greyed. If this is not the home page, the
tick can be changed to a cross, by highlighting it and operating the scroll button.
Horizontal Trend, Vertical Bar, Horizontal bar, Numeric, Control Loop 1/2*, Promote List.
As for Vertical Trend, above, but by default all the enable ticks/crosses are white and
are thus editable. If any of these display modes has been selected as the home page
then the tick associated with that mode is non editable and is greyed.
*Note: Control loop pages appear only if the Loop option is fitted.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 29
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.1.3 DISPLAY CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Trend Background Allows the user to select black (default), white dark grey or light gray as the ‘chart’ colour.
History Background As above for ‘Trend background’, but for history displays.
H.Trend Scaling
As described in section 3.4.2, by default, the scale for horizontal trends appears at the
left edge of the chart for a few seconds before the chart expands leftwards to occupy
the scale area. Setting ‘H.Trend Scaling’ to ‘Permanent’, ensures that the scale remains
permanently on display.
Faceplate cycling Allows the default faceplate cycling state to be defined as ‘On’ or ‘Off’ (section 3.3.5)
Setpoint colour
The colour for the setpoint in Control Loop display pages (section 3.4.6).
4.1.4 Info menu
Gives information about the recorder hardware and software, and allows the user to enter a descriptor for
the instrument. The normal ‘Select, Scroll, Enter’ editing technique, previously described) is used to edit
those fields that are not read only.
Instrument.Info
Name nanodac
Type nanodac
Version 2.0
Bootrom 1.8
Company ID 1280
Config Rev 10
Security Rev 2
Nvol writes 339
Line Voltage 239.2 v
Figure 4.1.4 Info menu (expanded to show all fields)
Name
Type
Version
Bootrom
Company ID
Config Rev
Security Rev
Nvol writes
Line voltage
Allows the user to enter a descriptor of up to 20 characters, using the text entry techniques described in section 3.6. The number of characters visible in the display mode
pages varies according to the number of alarm symbols on display.
Nano. Read only display of the instrument model (used by ‘iTools’).
Read only. The software version of the instrument.
Read only. Instrument software Boot ROM version
Read only. For CNOMO* purposes over Modbus (1280 decimal; 0500 hex).
Read only. This value is updated, and a message including this value generated, every
time configuration is quit, if any one or more configuration parameter has been
changed.
Read only. This number is incremented every time configuration is quit, if any one or
more passwords has been changed, or if the FTP Server username has been changed,
or if the Comms Enable field has been edited.
Number of non volatile write operations for diagnostic purposes.
The instantaneous value of the supply voltage applied to the instrument. Used in some
control loop operations.
* CNOMO = Comité de normalisation des moyens de production.
Page 30
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.1.5 Upgrade
CAUTION
Power must not be removed from the unit whilst upgrade is in progress, as to do so will cause permanent damage the unit.
This item allows the user to update the instrument firmware, either from a memory stick in the USB socket at
the rear of the unit, or via FTP transfer from a host computer. The upgrade file is downloaded from the recorder manufacturer and is transferred to the instrument by memory stick or by FTP transfer.
The unit restarts automatically, after an upgrade.
Instrument.Upgrade
Upgrade Firmware (FTP)
Instrument.Upgrade
Server IP Address 123.123.123.123
Account Username anonymous
Account Password ****
Upgrade Firmware (USB)
Source Path release
Initiate No
Source Path release
Initiate No
Figure 4.1.5 Typical Upgrade menus
Upgrade
Select ‘Firmware (USB)’, ‘Firmware (FTP)’ or ‘Bootrom (USB)’ as the source of the upgrade.
CAUTION
‘Bootrom’ is for factory use only, and its unauthorized use can permanently damage the recorder.
Server IP Address
For ‘Upgrade’ = ‘Firmware (FTP)’ only, this field must contain the IP address of the pc
which is to supply the upgrade file.
Account Username For ‘Type’ = ‘Firmware (FTP)’ only, the username set up in the host ftp server
Account Password For ‘Type’ = ‘Firmware (FTP)’ only, the password set up in the host ftp server
Source Path
The name of the directory from which the upgrade file is to be read. This is only the
name of the directory without any path elements (e.g. ’/’) included unless the path is ‘release/upgrade/files’.
Initiate
Select ‘Yes’ to initiate the upgrade.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 31
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.1.6 Security menu
This allows the user to enter passwords for all security levels (except logged out), and to enable/disable serial communications security.
Instrument.Security
Engineer Pass **********
Supervisor Pass
Operator Pass
Feature Pass 61878
Comms Pass Enabled
Default Config. No
Appears only if Engineer
Password = reset
Figure 4.1.6 Security menu
Engineer Pass
Supervisor Pass
Operator Pass
Feature Pass
Comms Pass
Default Config
Gives access to configuration menus. Set to 100 when despatched, but can be edited
here, if required, by entering an alternative of up to 20 characters (note 1).
If ‘reset’ (case sensitive) is entered as the Engineer Password, the ‘Default Config.’ field
appears allowing the instrument default configuration to be restored (note 2).
A password (none by default) of up to 20 characters can be entered here to protect Supervisor level access.
A password (none by default) of up to 20 characters can be entered here to protect Operator level access.
This is a password supplied by the manufacturer to enable the software options (e.g.
Loop, Zirconia block etc.). When applying for this code, the manufacturer will require
the MAC address (Network.Interface menu section 4.2.1) and the instrument’s firmware
Version (Instrument.info menu - section 4.1.4). The password is MAC address and time
dependent so that it cannot be used on any other instrument.
Enables/disables password security for external communications. If set to ‘Enabled’,
the Engineer level password will be required if an attempt is made to enter the configuration menus from a remote pc. If set to ‘Disabled’, then access to configuration can
be gained over a communications link, without a password.
If enabled, then entry to configuration mode via the Instrument Mode (IM) parameter
must be completed within 5 seconds of entering the password, or the attempt will fail.
This field appears only if ‘reset’ has been entered as the Engineer Password. Selecting
‘Yes’ Causes the instrument to restart with default configuration (i.e. the instrument
‘cold starts’). See note 2.
Notes:
1. It is recommended that only such characters as appear on the user’s pc keyboard be used in the
Engineer password. The use of other characters makes it necessary to use ‘Escape’ codes (e.g.
Alt 0247 for the ‘÷’ sign) when trying to enter configuration mode from iTools, for example.
2. Restoring factory default configuration can also be carried out in iTools, using the Engineer password ‘reset’ and selecting Default Config to ‘Yes’.
Page 32
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.1.7 Input adjust
Notes
1. Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of ‘Digital’, ‘Test’ or ‘Off’.
2. Input adjustments can be carried out only by users logged in as ‘Engineer’ (see section 3.3.7).
3. The instrument must be powered for a sufficient time (e.g. 30 minutes) for it to reach thermal equilibrium before an input adjust is performed.
This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. The technique used is to select those
channels to which adjust is to be applied, then for each channel to:
a apply a known low level signal (at or close to the low input range value) to the relevant input. When the
recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
b. apply a known high level signal (at, or close to, the high input range value) to the relevant input. When
the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
Figure 4.1.7a shows a typical display when ‘Input adjust’ is selected from the Instrument menu, and Apply
adjust has been selected. As can be seen, channel 3 has previously been adjusted.
Instrument.Input Adjust
Channel 1 Unadjusted
Channel 2 Unadjusted
Channel 3 Adjusted
Channel 4 Unadjusted
Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Figure 4.1.7a Input adjust top level display
Channel 1 to 4
Apply Adjust
Remove Adjust
Abort
Shows the adjust status of each channel
Selecting ‘Yes’ initiates the adjustment procedure described below.
Selecting ‘Yes’ initiates the adjustment removal procedure described below.
Allows the user to abandon input adjustment at any point in the procedure.
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. As shown in figure 4.1.7b, highlight the ‘Apply Adjust’ field, and operate the scroll key to enter edit
mode. Use the up or down arrow key to select ‘Yes’. Use the scroll button to change Channel 1 ‘cross’
to a ‘tick’ (check mark). Similarly select any other channels which require adjustment.
Instrument.Input Adjust
Instrument.Input Adjust
Channel 1 Unadjusted
Channel 1
Channel 2 Unadjusted
Channel 2
Channel 3 Adjusted
Channel 3
Channel 4 Unadjusted
Channel 4
Apply Adjust Yes
Start IP Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Abort No
Figure 4.1.7b Channel adjustment procedure (1)
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 33
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.1.7 INPUT ADJUST (Cont.)
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (Cont.)
2.
3.
Highlight the ‘Start IP ‘Adjust’ field and use the scroll and up/down arrow to select ‘Yes’. Use the scroll
key again to enter the low value adjust page.
Apply the known low value and wait for the value to stabilise. Enter the ‘Low Target Value’ (the value
that the recorder is to read for the applied input). When all is steady, use the scroll and up/down arrow
to set the ‘Confirm Low’ field to ‘Yes’, then operate the scroll button again.
Instrument.Input Adjust
Channel 1
Instrument.Input Adjust
Low Target Value 0.00
Channel 2
Confirm Low Yes
Channel 3
Channel 1 Value 0.21
Channel 4
Abort No
Start IP Adjust Yes
Abort No
Figure 4.1.7c Channel adjustment procedure (2)
4.
5.
The display changes to the high value adjust page.
Apply the known high value and wait for the value to stabilise. Enter the High Target Value (the value
that the recorder is to read for the applied input). When all is steady, set ‘Confirm High’ to ‘Yes’.
Instrument.Input Adjust
High Target Value 10.00
Confirm High Yes
Channel 1 Value 9.79
Abort No
Instrument.Input Adjust
Channel 1 Adjusted
Channel 2 Unadjusted
Channel 3 Adjusted
Channel 4 Unadjusted
Apply Adjust Yes
Remove Adjust No
Figure 4.1.7d Channel adjustment procedure (3)
REMOVAL PROCEDURE
1. Set ‘Remove Adjust’ to ‘Yes’ and operate the scroll button.
2. Use the scroll and up/down arrow buttons to change the required channel icons from crosses to ticks.
3. Select Remove IP Adjust to ‘Yes’ and operate the scroll key. The adjustment is removed from all
selected channels without further confirmation.
Instrument.Input Adjust
Instrument.Input Adjust
Channel 1 Adjusted
Channel 1
Channel 2 Unadjusted
Channel 2
Channel 3 Unadjusted
Channel 3
Channel 4 Unadjusted
Channel 4
Apply Adjust Yes
Remove IP Adjust Yes
Remove Adjust No
Abort No
Figure 7.1.7e Channel adjustment removal
Page 34
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.2 NETWORK MENU
Network
Interface
(Section 4.2.1)
Archiving
(Section 4.2.2)
FTP Server
(Section 4.2.3)
Modbus
(Section 4.2.4)
MAC address
Client Identifier
IP type
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
Media size
Media free
Media duration
Rate
Destination
File format
On media full
Remote path
Primary server
Primary user
Primary password
Secondary server
Secondary user
Secondary password
Trigger
Period
User name
Password
Prefmaster IP
Address
Input timeout
Unit ID Enable
Serial Mode
Time Format
Pref Master Conn
Response time
Master Conn 2
Response time
Master Conn 3
Response time
Master Conn 4
Response time
4.2.1 Interface
This area of configuration allows the user to set up an IP address for the instrument, either by typing one in
(Fixed), or automatically (DHCP), assuming a DHCP server is running.
Network.Interface
MAC
00.0A.8D.01.90.00
Client identifier nano_01.90.00
IP Type DHCP
IP Address 123.123.123.123
Subnet Mask 255.255.248.0
Gateway 234.234.234.234
Figure 4.2.1 Network Interface menu
MAC
Client Identifier
IP Type
IP Address
Subnet Mask
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Read only. Media Access Control. A unique address for each instrument, entered at the
factory.
The client identifier is a unique id used by DHCP servers that implement option 61.
Each nano product will have a unique ID built up from their MAC address. If the DHCP
server is configured to use option 61, then it will use this id instead of the MAC address
to assign a dynamic IP address.
If ‘Fixed’, the user needs to enter an IP address and Subnet Mask in the following fields,
and a Gateway address if required.
If ‘DHCP’ the subsequent fields become read only, with the entries automatically generated by the DHCP server. When set to DHCP, it takes several seconds before the IP
address is obtained from the DHCP server.
Read only if ‘IP Type’ = ‘DHCP’.
If ‘IP Type’ = ‘Fixed’, the user may enter an IP address (IPV4 dot notation). This would
normally be supplied by the user’s IT department, or from the Network supervisor.
Read only if ‘IP Type’ = ‘DHCP’.
If ‘IP Type’ = ‘Fixed’, this sets a range of IP addresses that can be accessed. Normally
supplied by the user’s IT department, or from the Network supervisor.
Page 35
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.2.1 INTERFACE (Cont.)
Gateway
Read only if ‘IP Type’ = ‘DHCP’.
If ‘IP Type’ = ‘Fixed’ this allows the user to enter a gateway address for use when the unit
is to communicate outside the local network. Normally supplied by the user’s IT department, or from the Network supervisor.
4.2.2 Archiving
This area of configuration is used to set up the parameters for use during unattended archiving. Some of
the fields appear only if other fields are set to a particular value. For example, the CSV fields appear only if
‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or to ‘Both’.
The archived data is not removed from the flash memory of the instrument. When the flash memory is full,
new data causes the oldest file(s) to be discarded.
Network.Archiving
Media Size 1907.46 MB
Network.Archiving
Rate Monthly
Media Free 1902.90 MB
Destination USB
Media Duration 763.77 Days
File Format Both
Rate Automatic
CSV Values Yes
Destination FTP server
CSV Messages No
File Format Binary (UHH)
On Media Full Overwrite
Remote Path /archive
Primary Server 123.123.123.123
Primary User history
Primary Password ******
Sec. Server 234.234.234.234
Sec. User anonymous
Sec. Password ****
Trigger No
Period None
CSV Headers No
CSV Headings Yes
CSV Date Format Text
CSV Tab Del No
On Media Full Overwrite
Remote Path /archive
Primary Server 123.123.123.123
Primary User history
Primary Password ******
Sec. Server 234.234.234.234
Sec. User anonymous
Sec. Password ****
Remote with Binary file format
Trigger No
Period None
Local with CSV files included
Figure 4.2.2a Unattended Archive configuration (typical settings)
Media Size
Media Free
Media Duration
Page 36
Appears only for File Format = ‘Binary (UHH)’. A read only value showing the capacity
of the memory stick inserted in the USB port at the rear of the unit. Shows zero if no
memory stick is present.
Appears only for File Format = ‘Binary (UHH)’. A read only value showing the space remaining in the memory stick inserted in the USB port at the rear of the unit. Shows zero
if no memory stick is present.
Appears only for File Format = ‘Binary (UHH)’. A read only value showing the time it will
take to fill the Memory stick if the recorder configuration remains unchanged.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.2.2 ARCHIVING (Cont.)
Rate
Allows the user to specify the frequency at which the contents of the Flash memory are
archived to the USB port or, via FTP, to a pc. Scrollable settings are:
None
Automatic archiving is disabled. Any archiving must be initiated by the user
using Demand Archiving, as described in section 3.3.8.
Hourly
Archive occurs on the hour, every hour.
Daily
Archive initiated at 00:00* each day
Weekly
Archive is initiated at midnight* every Sunday
Monthly Archive is initiated at 00:00* on the 1st of every month.
Automatic The recorder selects the least frequent of the above archive periods which
is guaranteed not to lose data as a result of the internal flash memory’s running out of space.
*Note: Archive times are not adjusted for daylight saving time (DST). Thus, if the archive is set to
‘Daily’, ‘Weekly’ or ‘Monthly’, then during summer time, the archive will be triggered an hour late (i.e
at 01:00 hours instead of midnight).
Destination
File format
Select ‘FTP Server’ for archive to a remote pc, or ‘USB’ to archive to the USB port device.
Select ‘Binary (UHH)’ ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’.
Binary (UHH)
A proprietary format used by the instrument that needs other software (e.g.
Review’, to interpret the data before it can be presented in spreadsheets
etc. Binary files have the extension ‘.uhh’.
CSV
This format is a standard open-file format for numeric data. A simple ASCIIbased format, it is readable by a wide range of pc applications as well as being suitable for direct import into many commercial databases. CSV files
have the extension ‘.csv’.
Both
Archiving includes both .uhh and .csv files.
Note: CSV is ASCII based and cannot interpret Unicode characters. For this reason, some characters available to the user will not be displayed correctly in .csv files.
CSV Values
CSV Messages
CSV Headers
CSV Headings
CSV Date Format
CSV Tab Del
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. If ‘Yes’ is selected, then process
values are included in the file (see figure 4.2.2b for details).
Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. If ‘Yes’ is selected, then messages
are included in the file (see figure 4.2.2b for details).
Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. If ‘Yes’ is selected, then Header details are included in the file (see figure 4.2.2b for details).
Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. If ‘Yes’ is selected, then column
headers are included in the file (see figure 4.2.2b for details).
Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. Allows ‘Text’ or ‘Spreadsheet ’ to be
selected. Text causes a time/date to appear in the spreadsheet. ‘Spreadsheet Nu’ displays the number of days since December 30th 1899. The decimal part of the number
represents the latest six hours. For example: DDD--- --DD.25 represents 06:00 hours
and DDD--- --DD.5 represents 12:00 hours. Spreadsheet Numeric format is more easily
interpreted than ‘Text’ by some spreadsheet applications.
Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’.
CSV (Comma Separated Variables) does not always use commas as separators. For example, in some countries the decimal point is represented by a full stop (period), whilst
in others a comma is used. In order to avoid confusion between a comma as a decimal
point and a comma as a separator, a different separator can be used. This field allows
the ‘tab’ character (^t) to be used instead of a comma.
Page 37
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.2.2 ARCHIVING (Cont.)
On Media Full
For ‘Destination’ = ‘USB’ only, this allows the user to select ‘Overwrite’ or ‘Stop’ as the
action to be taken when the memory stick is full. ‘Overwrite’ causes the oldest data to
be discarded from the memory stick to make room for newer data. ‘Stop’ inhibits archiving activity.
Remote Path
Left blank if the archive destination is the home folder. If the destination is to a subfolder
within the home folder, then the name of the subfolder is entered here, preceded by a
‘/’ character (e.g. ‘/history’).
Primary Server
Allows the user to enter the IP address for the pc to be used as the primary FTP server.
Primary User/Password
These are the Login name and password of the remote host account, assigned either
by the Network administrator, or set up in the ‘Guest’ account of the remote host’s ‘FTP
server’ or ‘User Manager’ configuration.
Sec. Server/user/password
As Primary server details above, but for the secondary FTP server used when the primary is not available for any reason.
Trigger
This parameter can be ‘wired’ to, say, an alarm going active, or a digital input, to allow
an archive to be triggered remotely. Can also be set to ‘yes’ manually.
Period
Appears only if ‘Trigger’ is wired (section 7). Allows a period of history to be selected
for archiving when ‘Trigger’ goes ‘true. Selections are: None, Last Hour, Last Day, Last
Week, Last Month, All, Bring to Date. (‘Last Month’ archives the last 31 days of history.)
Click/drag separator
to edit field width
Include header
details
Include column
headings
Include values
Right click, then:
Format cells...
select ‘time’ as number category
Select time/date ‘type’ as required.
Include messages
Figure 4.2.2 CSV data example
4.2.3 FTP Server
This area of configuration allows the user to enter the Username and Password used to access the instrument
from a remote FTP client.
Page 38
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.2.4 Modbus TCP
This allows the user to configure the recorder so as to allow it to communicate using Modbus Transmission
Control Protocol.
Network.Modbus
PrefMaster IP 123.123.123.123
Address 1
Input Timeout 0 sec
Unit ID Enable Instrument
Serial Mode Modbus Slave
Time Format Seconds
PrefMaster Conn 123.123.123.123
Response Time 0
Master Conn 1 0.0.0.0
Response Time 0
Master Conn 2 0.0.0.0
Response Time 0
Master Conn 3 0.0.0.0
Response Time 0
Master Conn 4 0.0.0.0
Response Time 0
Figure 4.2.4 Modbus TCP configuration menu
PrefMaster IP
The IP address of the relevant Modbus master. The Preferred master is guaranteed to
be able to connect, even if all slave connections (max. = 4 for TCP) are in use.
Address
The Modbus address for this slave. This address must be unique for the network to
which it is attached. The recorder will respond to this address and to Address 255.
Input Timeout
Allows a value of between 0 and 3600 seconds to be entered to set the timeout period
for modbus input channels. If a modbus input is not written to within this period the value of the channel is set to -9999.0 with a 'No Data' status. A value of 0 disables the comms inactivity timeout feature.
Unit ID Enable
Enables/Disables the checking of the Modbus TCP unit identity field.
Strict
The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) does not have to match the instrument address. The instrument responds only to Hex value FF in the UIF.
iTools finds this instrument only at location 255, and then stops scanning.
Loose
The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) does not have to match the instrument address. The instrument responds to any value in the UIF
Instrument The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) must match the instrument address or no response will be made to messages.
Serial Mode
Slave communications via the side mounted configuration port interface (CPI) clip (for
iTools use.) Parameters: Baud rate 19,200; Parity = none; Number of data bits = 8;
Number of stop bits = 1; no flow control. Can be set to ‘Modbus Slave’ or ‘Off’. The unit
must be restarted before any change takes effect.
Time Format
Allows the user to choose milliseconds, seconds, minutes or hours as the time format.
Sets the resolution for the reading and writing of time format parameters.
PrefMaster Conn
Read only. Shows the IP address of the preferred master, when connected.
Response Time
Read only. Shows the response time for a single communications request to the relevant master.
Master Conn 1 to 4 Read only. Shows the IP addresses of any other masters connected to this recorder.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 39
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.3 GROUP CONFIGURATION
Group configuration is separated into two areas, one which defines trending characteristics (for display
channels) the other defining the recording characteristics for saving data to the Flash memory ready for archiving.
4.3.1 Group Trend configuration
This allows the user to define which points are to be traced on the display and at what interval, and also allows the number of chart divisions to be set up. Figure 4.3.1 shows a typical configuration page.
Note: The background chart colour is set up as a part of Instrument Display configuration (section
4.1.3)
Group.Trend
Descriptor Group 1
Interval 0.25 sec
Major Divisions 10
Point1 Channel1
Point2 Channel2
Point3 Channel3
Point4 Channel4
Point5 No Trend
Point6 VirtualChan1
Figure 4.3.1 Group Trend Configuration
Descriptor
Interval
Major Divisions
Point1 to Point6
Page 40
Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.) for the group.
The trending interval which defines how much data appears on one screen height or
width. A number of discrete intervals can be chosen between 0.125 seconds to 1 hour.
The selection should be made according to how much detail is required, and how
much data is to be visible on the screen.
Allows the user to select the number of divisions into which the scale is divided and how
many gridlines are displayed. Setting the value to 1 results in just the zero and full scale
values appearing. Setting the value to 10 (the maximum) results in a scale with zero, full
scale and nine intermediate values appearing, with associated grid lines.
Allows the user to select which channels and virtual channels are to be traced. The maximum number of traces is six.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.3.2 Group Recording configuration
Similar to Trend configuration, above, but for saving the data to Flash memory history files. Each point can
individually be enabled or disabled for recording, or recording can be disabled for the whole group.
Figure 4.3.2 shows a typical page.
Group.Recording
Flash Size 50.00 MB
Flash Duration 17.06 Days
Enable Yes
Interval 1 sec
UHH Compression Normal
Channel 1 Yes
Channel 2 Yes
Channel 3 Yes
Channel 4 Yes
VirtualChan 1 Yes
VirtualChan 2 No
VirtualChan 14 No
Suspend No
Figure 4.3.2 Group trend recording configuration
Flash Size
Flash Duration
Read only. Shows the size of the Flash memory fitted in MB.
Read only. Shows the time it will take to fill the Flash memory if the recorder configuration remains unchanged.
Enable
‘Yes’ enables group recording so that all points set to ‘Yes’ are stored in the recorder’s
flash memory. ‘No’ disables group recording.
Interval
Defines the rate at which data is saved to the recorder’s Flash memory. The value affects how much trace history appears on the screen in trend history mode.
UHH Compression Select ‘Normal’ or ‘High’. ‘Normal’ compresses the data, but still provides an exact
copy. ‘High’ compresses more, but values are saved only to 1 part in 108 resolution.
Note: Where very high values are involved, such as in some totaliser values, ‘High’ compression may
cause the value displayed at the recorder, and held in the history file, to be incorrect. The problem
may be resolved by changing to ‘Normal’ compression, or, in the case of a totaliser, by re-scaling it
(for example from MegaWatt hours to TeraWatt hours).
Channel 1 to VirtualChan14
Read only (greyed ‘yes’) for points being trended, (these are automatically recorded).
For non-trending points the user may enable or disable each point individually.
Suspend
Ignored unless the user has wired to this field. If wired then when set to 'No' recording
is active, when set to 'Yes' recording is paused.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 41
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4 INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Channel
N Select channel number
Main
(Section 4.4.1)
Trend
(Section 4.4.2)
Alarm 1/2
(Section 4.4.3)
Descriptor
Type
PV
Status
IP adjust state
Resolution
Units
Test signal
Input low/high
Shunt value
Linearisation type
Range low/high
Scale low/high
Offset
CJ type
Filter
Sensor break type
Break response
Sensor break value
Measured value
Internal CJ Temp
Colour
Span low
Span high
Type
Status
Threshold
Hysteresis
Latch
Block
Dwell
Acknowledge
Active
Inactive
Not acknowledged
Acknowledgement
Figure 4.4 Channel configuration menu
Page 42
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4.1 Channel Main
This section describes all possible menu items, but it should be noted that some items are context dependent (e.g. Cold Junction settings appear only for Type = ‘Thermocouple’).
Channels one to four in the configuration relate to An In 1 (terminals 1I, 1+ and 1-) to An In 4 (terminals 4I,
4+ and 4-) respectively - see figure 2.2.
Channel.1.Main
Descriptor Channel 1
Type Thermocouple
PV 197.35
Status Good
IP Adjust State Adjusted
Resolution 2
Units °C
Test Signal Triangle 5 Hr
Input Low 0
Input High 10
Shunt 100
Lin Type Type K
Range Low 0.00
Range High 100.00
Range Units °C
Scale Low 0.00
Scale High 100.00
Offset 0.000
CJ Type External
Ext CJ Temp 0.00
Filter 1.0 sec
Sensor Break Type Break High
Fault Response Drive Low
Sensor Break Val 1%
Measured Value 0.2
Internal CJ Temp 35.1
Figure 4.4.1a Channel main menu (expanded)
Note: For the sake of completeness, the figure above shows all possible fields, even though many
are mutually exclusive. For example, ‘Test signal’ appears only when ‘Test’ is selected as Type. It
would never appear when Type = thermocouple (as shown). Similarly, ‘Shunt’ would appear only for
Type = mA.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 43
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4.1 CHANNEL MAIN (Cont.)
Descriptor
PV
Status
IP Adjust State
Resolution
Units
Type
Test signal
Input Low*
Input High*
Shunt value
Lin type
Range Low*
Range High*
Range Units
Scale Low/High
Offset
Allows a (20 character max.) descriptor to be entered for the channel. Some thought
should be given to ensure that the descriptor is meaningful because in some display
screens it is truncated. For example, ‘Furnace 1 area 1’ and ‘Furnace 1 area 2’ might
both appear as ‘Furnace 1 a’ and thus be indistinguishable from one another, except in
background colour.
Read only. Displays the current value of the channel.
Read only. Shows the channel status as one of: ‘Good’, ‘Channel Off’, ‘Over range’, ‘Under range’, ‘HW error’, ‘Ranging’, ‘HW (capability) exceeded’.
Appears only for channels which have been included in the ‘Adjust Input’ procedure
described in section 4.1.7.
Allows the number of decimal places to be defined for the channel. Valid entries are
zero to nine.
Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered.
Allows the user to select an input type for the channel. Available selections are: ‘Off’,
‘Thermocouple’, ‘mV’, ‘V’, ‘mA’, ‘RTD’, ‘Digital’ or ‘Test’.
Appears only if ‘Test’ is selected as ‘Type’. Allows either a sinusoidal or a triangular
waveform to be selected at one of a number of cycle times between 40 seconds and
five hours.
For Type = mV, V or mA, the lowest value of the applied signal in electrical units.
For Type = mV, V or mA, the highest value of the applied signal in electrical units.
For input type = mA only, this allows the value of the shunt resistor (in Ohms) to be entered. The recorder does not validate this value - it is up to the user to ensure that the
value entered here matches that of the shunt resistor fitted.
Linear, Square root, x3/2, x5/2, User Lin.
Thermocouple types (alphabetical order): B, C, D, E, G2, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U, NiMo/
NiCo, Platinel, Ni/MiMo, Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh.
User 1 to User 4
Resistance thermometer types: Cu10, Pt100, Pt100A, JPT100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu53.
See Appendix A for input ranges, accuracies etc. associated with the above thermocouple and RTD types. See section 4.8 for details of user linearisations.
For thermocouples, RTDs, User linearisations and retransmitted signals only, the lowest
value of the required linearisation range.
For thermocouples, RTDs, User linearisations and retransmitted signals only, the highest
value of the required linearisation range.
For thermocouples only and RTDs, Select °C, °F or K.
Maps the process value to (Scale High - Scale Low). For example, an input of 4 to 20mA
may be scaled as 0 to 100% by setting Scale low to 0 and Scale High to 100.
Allows a fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the process variable.
*Note: See section 4.8 for details of the configuration of Range High/Low and Input High/Low when
‘Type’ = User 1 to User 4.
Page 44
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4.1 CHANNEL MAIN (Cont.)
Input filter
Damping can be used to filter out noise from slowly
changing signals so that the underlying trend can be
seen more clearly. Valid input values are between 0
and 60 seconds.
Input
Note: Applying a filter to an input channel can affect the operation
of any Rate-of-change alarms configured to act on that channel.
Instrument
Response
3x
Input filter
CJC Type
For thermocouple input types only, this allows the user to select ‘None’, ‘Internal’, ‘External’ or ‘Remote 1’ to ‘Remote 4’.
None: No Cold junction compensation applied.
‘Internal’ uses the recorder’s internal cold junction temperature measurement.
‘External’ means that the cold junction is to be maintained by the user, at a fixed, known
temperature. This temperature is entered in the ‘External CJ Temp’ field which appears
when ‘External’ is selected.
Remote 1 (2) (3) (4) means that the cold junction temperature is being measured by input channel 1 (2) (3) (4) respectively. (This must be a different channel from that currently being configured).
Ext. CJ Temp
Appears only if CJC type is set to ‘External’, and allows the user to enter the temperature at which the external cold junction is being maintained.
Sensor Break Type Defines whether the sensor break becomes active for circuit impedances greater than
expected.
‘Off’ disables Sensor Break detection.
Break Low: Sensor break active if measured impedance is greater than the ‘Break Low
impedance’ value given in table 4.4.1.
Break High: Sensor break active if measured impedance is greater than the ‘Break
High Impedance’ value given in table 4.4.1.
Fault Response
Specifies the behaviour of the recorder if a sensor break is detected or if the input is
over driven (saturated high or low).
‘None’ means that the input drifts, with the wiring acting as an aerial.
‘Drive High’ means that the trace moves to (Scale High +10%). ‘Drive Low’ means that
the trace moves to (Scale Low -10%), where the 10% values represent 10% of (Scale
High - Scale Low).
Sensor Break Val
A diagnostic representation of how close the sensor break detection circuitry is to tripping.
Measured Value
The (read only) input channel measured value before any scaling or linearisation is applied.
Internal CJ temp
The (read only) temperature of the internal cold junction associated with this channel.
Range
40mV
80mV
2V
10V
Break Low Break High
impedance Impedance
~5kΩ
~5kΩ
~12.5kΩ
~12.5kΩ
~20kΩ
~20kΩ
~70kΩ
~120kΩ
Table 4.4.1 Minimum impedances for sensor break detection
Note: Break High impedance values would be used typically for sensors which have a high nominal
impedance when working normally
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 45
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4.2 Channel Trend configuration
This area allows the configuration of channel colour and span.
Channel.1.Colour
Wheatgerm
Channel.1.Trend
Colour Wheatgerm
Span Low 0.00
Span High 200.00
Figure 4.4.2a Channel Trend menu
Colour
Span Low/High
Figure 4.4.2b Colour selection
Allows a colour to be specified for the channel. The Scroll key is used to enter the colour swatch page. The up and down arrows are used to scroll through the available colours, with each colour being enlarged for as long as it is ‘selected’. Once the required
colour, is reached, the scroll key is used again to return to the Trend Configuration.
Span low and high values.
SPAN EXAMPLE
In an input range of 0 to 600 degrees C, the temperature range between 500 and 600 degrees is of most
interest. In such a case, Span Low is set to 500 and Span High to 600 so that the recorder trends only the
required part of the temperature range, effectively magnifying the area of interest.
Note: Trending is restricted to the PV range (Span High - Span Low), but the instrument can display
values outside this range.
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
A type J thermocouple is used to measure a temperature range of 100 to 200 degrees Celsius. This thermocouple output is transmitted to the recorder by a 4 to 20mA transmitter, for display as a value between 0
and 100%.
In Channel.Main, set the following for the relevant channel:
Type
= mA
Units
=%
Input Low
= 4.00
Input high
= 20.00
Shunt
= 250 Ohms
Lin Type
= Type J
Range Low
= 100.00
Range High
= 200.00
Range Units
= °C
Scale Low
=0
Scale High
= 100
Other items may be left at their defaults.
Page 46
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4.3 Alarm 1 menu
Allows the alarm characteristics for Alarm 1 to be configured. The figure below shows a typical configuration
page (expanded for clarity). Actual configuration parameters are context sensitive.
Channel.1.Alarm1
Type Abs High
Status Active Not ackd
Threshold 35.00°C
Hysteresis 5.00°C
Latch Manual
Block Off
Dwell 00:00:00
Acknowledge No
Active Yes
Inactive No
N.acknowledged Yes
Acknowledgement No
Figure 4.4.3 Typical alarm 1 configuration menu
Type
Status
Threshold
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Select an alarm type from: ‘Off’, ‘Abs. High’ (absolute high). ‘Abs. Low’ (absolute low),
‘Dev. High’ (deviation high), ‘Dev. Low’ (deviation low), ‘Dev. Band’ (deviation band),
‘Rise ROC’ (rate-of-change: rising), ‘Fall ROC’ (rate-of-change: falling), ‘Digital High’,
‘Digital Low’. See ‘Alarm types’, below, for definitions.
Read only. This shows that the alarm is Off, Active, Safe Not Acked or Active Not Acked.
For ‘Auto’ and ‘Manual’ alarms only, ‘SafeNotAcked’ means that the alarm trigger
source has returned to a non-alarm state, but the alarm is still active because it has not
been acknowledged. Similarly, ‘ActiveNotAcked’ means that the source is still active
and the alarm has not been acknowledged.
For absolute alarms only, this is the trip point for the alarm. For absolute high alarms, if
the threshold value is exceeded by the process value (PV) of this channel, then the
alarm becomes active, and remains active until the PV falls below the value (threshold hysteresis). For absolute low alarms, if the PV of this channel falls below the threshold
value, then the alarm becomes active and remains active until the PV rises above
(Threshold + Hysteresis).
For deviation alarms only, this provides a ‘centre point’ for the deviation band.
For ‘deviation high’ alarms, the alarm becomes active if the process value (PV) rises
above the value (Reference + Deviation) and remains active until the PV falls below (Reference + Deviation - Hysteresis).
For ‘deviation low’ alarms, the alarm becomes active if the process value (PV) falls below
the value (Reference - Deviation) and remains active until the PV rises above (Reference
- Deviation + Hysteresis).
For ‘deviation band’ alarms, the alarm is active whenever the process value (PV) lies outside the value (Reference ± Deviation) and remains active until the PV returns to within
the band, minus or plus Hysteresis as appropriate.
For deviation alarms only, ’Deviation’ defines the width of the deviation band, each side
of the Reference value, as described immediately above.
For absolute and deviation alarms, this provides a means of preventing multiple alarm
triggering, if the process value is drifting close to the trigger value.
Page 47
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4.3 ALARM 1 MENU (Cont.)
Amount
For rate-of-change alarms only. The alarm becomes active if the process value rises
(Rise ROC) or falls (Fall ROC) by more than the specified ‘Amount’ within the time period defined in ‘Change Time’, below. The alarm remains active until the rate of change
falls below the value (Amount/Change Time) in the relevant sense.
Change Time
Settable to 1 second, 1 minute or 1 hour. See ‘Amount’ (above).
Average Time
For rate-of-change alarms only. This allows an averaging period (for the process value)
to be entered to reduce nuisance trips due to signal noise, or if the rate of change is
hovering around the trip value.
Latch
None: the alarm remains active until the monitored value has returned to a non alarm
state, when it becomes inactive.
Auto: The alarm remains active until the monitored value has returned to a non alarm
state and the alarm has been acknowledged. Acknowledgement can take place either
before or after the value has returned a non alarm state.
Manual: The alarm remains active until the monitored value has returned to a non alarm
state and the alarm has been acknowledged. Acknowledgement is permitted only after
the value has returned a non alarm state.
Trigger: Not enunciated, this mode is used only to initiate an action defined by user
wiring either using iTools or using the user interface.
Block
Alarms with ‘Block’ set to ‘On’ are inhibited until the monitored value has entered the
'safe' condition after a start-up. This prevents such alarms from becoming active whilst
the process is brought into control. If a latching alarm is not acknowledged then the
alarm is re-asserted (not blocked), unless the alarm’s threshold or reference value is
changed, in which case the alarm is blocked again.
Dwell
Initiates a delay between the trigger source becoming active, and the alarm becoming
active. If the trigger source returns to a non alarm state before the dwell time has
elapsed, then the alarm is not triggered and the dwell timer is reset.
Acknowledge
Select ‘yes’ to acknowledge the alarm. Display returns to ‘No’.
Active
Read only. Shows the status of the alarm as ‘Yes’ if it is active, or No, if inactive. The active/inactive state depends on the Latch type (above) and acknowledgment status of
the alarm.
Inactive
As for ‘Active’ above, but shows ‘Yes’ if the alarm in inactive and ‘No’ if the alarm is active.
N.acknowledged
As for ‘Active’ above but shows ‘Yes’ for as long as the alarm is unacknowledged, and
‘No’ as soon as it is acknowledged.
Acknowledgement Fleetingly goes ‘Yes’ on alarm acknowledgement, and then returns to ‘No’.
4.4.4 Alarm 2 menu
As above for Alarm 1 menu.
Note: The parameters ‘Acknowledge’, ‘Active’, ‘Inactive’, ‘N(ot) Acknowledged’ and, ‘Acknowledgement’ can all be ‘wired’ to other parameters, so, for example, a relay can be made to operate whilst
the alarm is inactive or whilst it is active or on acknowledgement etc. by wiring the relevant parameter to the relay’s ‘PV’ input. See section 7 for details of user wiring.
Page 48
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4.5 Alarm types
The following figures attempt to show graphically the meanings of the alarm parameters which can be set
for the various alarm types available.
ABSOLUTE ALARMS
Absolute high alarm definitions
Absolute low alarm definitions
Symbol
Symbol
Input signal
Threshold
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Threshold
Input signal
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell:D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell:D
= Alarm active
= Alarm active
Figure 4.4.5a absolute alarm parameters
DEVIATION ALARMS
Deviation low alarm definitions
Deviation high alarm definitions
Symbol
Symbol
Hysteresis
Deviation
Reference
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
Input signal
Input signal
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D
= Alarm active
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D
= Alarm active
Deviation band alarm definitions
Symbol
Hysteresis
Deviation
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
Input signal
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D
= Alarm active
Figure 4.4.5b Deviation alarm parameters
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 49
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.4.5 ALARM TYPES (Cont.)
RATE-OF-CHANGE ALARMS
Rate-of-change alarm definitions
Symbol
Symbol
Amount
Rate-of-change rise active
Rate-of-change fall active
‘Change Time’ units
(second, minute or hour)
Present
time
A rate-of-change alarm is active if the monitored value changes by more than one ‘Amount’ in
less than 1 ‘Change time’. Dwell delays the alarm on-time. Averaging removes the effects of
signal noise.
Figure 4.4.5c Rate-of-change alarm parameters
Note: Operation of rate-of-change alarms may be affected if an input filter (section 4.4.1) is applied
to the input signal.
Page 50
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.5 VIRTUAL CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
This allows the configuration of maths channels totalisers and counters. The configuration is divided into the
following areas: ‘Main’, ‘Trend’, ‘Alarm 1’ and ‘Alarm 2’. Items appearing in the ‘Trend’, Alarm 1’ and ‘Alarm
2’ areas are identical with the equivalent items described in section 4.4 (Input channels), above.
4.5.1 Maths channel configuration
The following maths functions are available (listed in up-arrow scroll order)
Off, Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide, Group Average, Group minimum, Group maximum, Modbus input,
Copy, Group minimum (latch), Group maximum (latch), Channel maximum, Channel minimum, Channel Average, Configuration revision, Off.
Figure 4.5.1 shows a typical maths channel configuration
Virtual Channel.1.Main
Descriptor VirtualChan1
Type Math
Operation Add
PV 180.36 Units
Status Good
Resolution 2
Units Units
Input1 93.49°C
Input 2 86.8°C
Figure 4.5.1 Maths channel configuration (typical) (expanded)
Descriptor
Type
Operation
PV
Status
Resolution
Units
Input1
Input 2
Reset
Time Remaining
Period
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.) for the maths channel
Math selected for this example. (See sections 4.5.2 and 4.5.3 for totalisers and counters
respectively.)
Allows the user to select the required maths function. See ‘Maths Functions’, below.
Read only. Shows the dynamic value of this channel in the units entered in ‘Units’ below.
Read only. Shows the status of this channel, reflecting the status of the input sources.
Enter the number of decimal places required
Allows a five character string to be entered to be used as the channel units.
The value of input 1. May be entered manually, or it may be wired from another parameter (section 7). Uses the resolution of the source.
As for ‘Input 1’, Appears only when the operation requires two inputs.
Allows the user to reset latching functions (e.g. Channel Max) or averaging functions
(e.g. Channel Avg). Reset is carried out by setting the field to ‘Yes’, then operating the
scroll key. The display returns to ‘No’. Alternatively the function can be reset by another
parameter wired to ‘Reset’.
The period of time remaining before the virtual channel performs its operation. For example, the time remaining for the maths channel average operation to sample the input
before performing the calculation.
For averaging functions, allows the period over which the value is to be averaged to be
entered. Selectable periods are: 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10,
20, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 6, 12, 24 hours.
Page 51
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.5.1 MATHS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
MATHS FUNCTIONS
Off
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Group Avg
Group Min
Group Max
Modbus Input
Copy
Grp Min Latch
Grp Max Latch
Channel Max
Channel Min
Channel Avg
Config Revision
Page 52
Out = -9999; status = Off
Out = Input1 + Input2
Out = Input1 - Input2
Out = Input1 x Input2
Out = Input1 Input2. If Input2 = 0, Out = -9999; Status = ‘Bad’.
Out = Instantaneous sum of all points in the group (except this one and any channel that
has been configured with operation = group average, group minimum, group maximum, group minimum (latched), group maximum (latched), channel maximum or channel minimum), divided by the number of points in the group (excluding this one).
Any point that has a status other than ‘Good’ is excluded from the calculation.
If the group contains no channels, Out = -9999; Status = ‘No data’.
Out = Instantaneous value of whichever point (except this one) in the group has the lowest value.
Any point that has a status other than ‘Good’ is excluded from the calculation.
If the group contains no channels, Out = -9999; Status = ‘No data’.
Out = Instantaneous value of whichever point (except this one) in the group has the
highest value.
Any point that has a status other than ‘Good’ is excluded from the calculation.
If the group contains no channels, Out = -9999; Status = ‘No data’.
Out = value written to this channel’s modbus input.
If the comms timeout expires, Out = -9999; status = ‘No data’.
Allows an input or other derived channel to be copied.
Out = Lowest value reached by any point in the group (except this one) since last reset.
Any point that has a status other than ‘Good’ is excluded from the calculation.
If the group contains no channels, Out = -9999; Status = ‘No data’.
Out = Highest value reached by any point in the group (except this one) since last reset.
Any point that has a status other than ‘Good’ is excluded from the calculation.
If the group contains no channels, Out = -9999; Status = ‘No data’.
Out = Highest value reached by Input1 since last reset.
If Input1 has a status other than ‘Good’, then Out = -9999 and ‘Status’ depends on the
status of Input1.
Out = Lowest value reached by Input1 since last reset.
If Input1 has a status other than ‘Good’, then Out = -9999 and ‘Status’ depends on the
status of Input1.
Out = the average value of Input1 over the time specified in ‘Period’.
If Input1 has a status other than ‘Good’, then Out = -9999 and ‘Status’ depends on the
status of Input1.
Out = current Configuration Revision value.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.5.2 Totaliser configuration
Totalisers allow the user to maintain a running total of any input channel, or of any maths channel. Using
maths channels, it is possible to totalise combinations of input channels so that, for example, the sum of two
channels or the difference between them could be totalised if required.
The maximum capacity for each totaliser is 1,000,000. This range can be expanded by wiring from the ‘Rollover’ output of the totaliser to the ‘trigger’ input of a counter. Wiring is carried out either at the operator interface (section 7) or in iTools (section 6).
The totaliser equation is:
ma t
tot t = tot t – 1 + ------------------------------PSF  USF
tott
tott-1
mat
PSF
USF
where,
= totaliser value this sample
= totaliser value last sample
= process value this sample
= Period Scaling Factor (Period)
= Units Scaling Factor (Units scaler)
Note: the time between samples is 125ms.
Figure 4.5.2 shows a typical configuration page.
Virtual Channel.1.Main
Descriptor VirtualChan1
Type Totaliser
Operation On
PV 180.3625 units
Status Good
Totaliser
Input 1
1 to
Resolution 4
Units units
Rollover
6
10
Counter 1
Input 1
Rollover
106
Units Scaler 1
to 1012
Low Cut Off 0
Counter 2
High Cut Off 100000
Input 1
Input1 327.1
1012
Period 1 sec
Preset No
Rollover
to 1018
Using cascaded counters to expand
the totalisation range.
Preset Value 0
Rollover No
Disable
Figure 4.5.2 Typical totaliser configuration menu
Descriptor
Type
Operation
PV
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.) for the totaliser.
Select: Math, Counter or Totaliser.
Allows the user to enable (‘On’) or disable (‘Off’) the totaliser.
Read only. Shows the dynamic value of the totaliser.
Page 53
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.5.2 TOTALISER CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Status
Read only. Shows the status of the totaliser.
Notes:
1. Because of the way in which the totaliser value is stored (IEEE 32-bit floating point), it is possible
that if the current totaliser value is very large, then very small input values can be smaller than the
minimum that can be resolved. In such a case the small value is not totalised, and the status ‘Overflow’ is set. This should not be confused with ‘Rollover’, described below.
2. The incremental value (ma/(PSF*USF)) at the rollover point (1,000,000) should be ≥ 1.
Resolution
Units
Units Scaler
Low Cut Off
High Cut Off
Input1
Period
Preset
Preset Value
Rollover
Disable
Page 54
Allows the number of decimal places (up to 6) to be selected for the totaliser.
Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered for the totalised value.
Allows a units scaler to be selected. If, for example, the input channel has units of litres
per hour, then, if the Units Scaler is set to one, the totalised value will be in litres. If the
Units Scaler is set to 1000, then the totalised value will be in thousands of litres.
Setting the Units Scaler to a negative value, causes the totaliser to decrement rather
than increment.
Used to restrict the input operating range of the totaliser. Minimum value = -100 000
Used to restrict the input operating range of the totaliser. Maximum value = 100 000
The value of the source. May be entered manually, or this parameter can be wired from
an external channel PV.
The totaliser equation works in seconds. If the totalised channel units are other than
‘per second’, a period scaler different from the default (1 sec) must be used. The ‘Period’ field presents a number of fixed periods from 0.125 seconds to 24 hours for selection.
Setting this to ‘Yes’ causes the totaliser to adopt the Preset Value. The field returns immediately to ‘No’. The totaliser can also be preset by an external source ‘wired’ to this
parameter.
Allows the entry of a value, from which the totaliser is to start incrementing or decrem
enting. The direction of the count is set by the sign of the units scaler: positive = increment; negative = decrement.
The maximum capacity of the totaliser is 1 000 000. If, for example, the current totaliser
value is 999 999 and ‘Input 1’ = 10, then the next sample will set the totaliser value to
(999,999 +10 - 1,000,000 = 9) and ‘Rollover’ is set to ‘Yes’ for one iteration period. This
can be used to increment a counter by wiring the totaliser ‘Rollover’ parameter to the
‘Trigger’ parameter of the counter. The maximum capacity of each counter is also 1 million and if necessary, counters can be cascaded in a similar way, the first counter counting in millions, the second in units of 1012, the third in units of 1018, and so on.
Allows the user temporarily to suspend totalising action. The output retains the pre-disabled value until the totaliser is re-enabled, when it resumes from that value. The totaliser is toggled between being enabled (cross symbol) and disabled (tick symbol) by
means of the scroll key.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.5.3 Counter configuration
This allows the user to set up a counter to count trigger inputs (or it may be incremented from the Configuration page. Maximum count is 1 000 000. Counters can be cascaded by wiring from ‘Rollover’ of one counter to ‘trigger’ of the next. Wiring is carried out from the operator interface (section 7) or in iTools (section 6).
For ‘Trend’, ‘Alarm 1’ and ‘Alarm 2’ configurations please see the relevant parts of section 4.4.
Virtual Channel.1.Main
Descriptor VirtualChan1
Type Counter
Operation On
Counter 1
Input 1
PV 123436 units
Rollover
6
1 to 10
Status Good
Resolution 0
Units units
Low Cut Off 0
High Cut Off 999999
Input1 015.3241
Preset 0
Preset Value 0
Counter 2
Input 1
Rollover
106
to 1012
Counter 3
Input 1
Rollover
etc.
1012 to 1018
Cascading counters
Trigger No
Rollover No
Disable
Figure 4.5.3 Typical Counter configuration
Descriptor
Type
Operation
PV
Status
Resolution
Units
Low Cut Off
High Cut Off
Input1
Preset
Preset Val
Trigger
Rollover
Disable
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.) for the counter.
Select: Math, Counter or Totaliser.
Allows the user to enable (‘On’) or disable (‘Off’) the counter.
Read only. Shows the dynamic value of the counter.
Read only. Reflects the status of the input channel.
Allows the number of decimal places (up to six) to be defined for the channel.
Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered for the counter value
Specifies a value below which the counter will not decrement.
Specifies a value above which the counter will not increment.
The amount by which the counter is incremented each time ‘Trigger’ goes high. The value may be entered manually, or wired from another parameter. Negative values cause
the counter to decrement.
Setting this to ‘Yes’ causes the counter to adopt its Preset Value. The field returns immediately to ‘No’. The counter can also be preset by wiring from another parameter.
Allows the entry of a value, from which the counter is to start incrementing or decrementing.
Setting this to 1, causes the current value of the input source to be added to the Counter value. This function can be carried out manually, or the input can be wired from another parameter (section 7.2).
The maximum capacity of the counter is 1 000 000. If, for example, the current value is
999 999 and Input 1 = 15, then the next sample will set the totaliser value to 14
(999,999 +15 - 1,000,000) and ‘Rollover’ is set to ‘Yes’ for one iteration period. This can
be used to increment a further counter by wiring ‘Rollover’ to ‘Trigger’.
Allows the user temporarily to suspend counting. The output retains the pre-disabled
value until the counter is re-enabled, when it resumes counting from that value. The
counter is toggled between being enabled (cross symbol) and disabled (tick symbol)
by means of the scroll key.
Page 55
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.6 LOOP CONFIGURATION
This configuration area allows the user to set up two control loops. This description refers to temperature
control loops, but the configuration parameters apply equally to other types of control. For each loop, channel 1 is assumed to be a heating channel; channel 2 a cooling channel.
The configuration is divided into a number of areas, as shown in the overview below.
Loop
N
N = 1 or 2
Main
Setup
Tune
PID
Setpoint
Output
(Section 4.6.1) (Section 4.6.2) (Section 4.6.3) (Section 4.6.4) (Section 4.6.5) (Section 4.6.6)
Auto/Manual
Loop name
PV
Ch1 Control
Inhibit
Ch2 Control
Target Setpoint Control action
Working SetPB Units
point
Deriv Type
Working Output Setpoint Access
Integral Hold Auto/Man Access
Tune Enable
Low Output
High Output
State
Stage Time
Sched Type
No. of sets
Remote i/p
Active set
Boundary 1-2
Boundary 2-3
PB
Ti
Td
CBH
CBL
MR
LBT
Output Low
Output High
Diagnostics
(Section 4.6.7)
Range Low
Output Low
Error
Range High
Output High
Target Output
SP Select
Ch1/2 Output
Working Out Low
SP1
Ch2 Deadband Working Out High
SP2
Ch1/2 OnOff Hyst
Loop Break
SP Low Limit Ch1/2 Travel time
Prop Output
SP High Limit
Nudge raise
Integral Output
Alt SP Enable
Nudge lower
Deriv Output
Alt SP
Ch1/2 pot pos
Sensor Break
Rate
Ch1/2 pot brk
Sched PB
Rate Done
Pot Brk mode
Sched Ti
SP rate disable
Rate
Sched Td
Servo to PV
SbrkMode
Sched CBH
SP Trim
Sbrk OP
Sched CBL
SP Trim Low
Safe OP
Sched MR
SP Trim High
Manual Mode
Sched Loop Break
Manual Track
Manual Output
Sched Out Low
Setpoint Track
Forced Output
Sched Out High
Track PV
Manual Startup
Track Value
Pff En
SP Int Balance
Power In
Cool type
FF type/gain
FF offset/trim lin
FF OP
Track Output
Track Enable
Rem. Output Low
Rem. Output High
Figure 4.6 Loop configuration overview
For a general discussion of control loops, please see Appendix B to this manual.
Page 56
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.6.1 Main menu parameters
Auto/Manual
PV
Inhibit
Target Setpoint
Working Setpoint
Working Output
Integral Hold
Selects Auto(matic) or Manual operation. ‘Auto’ automatically controls output power in
a closed loop configuration. In manual mode, the operator controls the output power.
The Process Variable input value. The value can be entered by the user, but is most often ‘wired’ from an analogue input.
Select ‘No’ or ‘Yes’. ‘Yes’ stops the loop and sets the output to a ‘safe’ value, this value
being entered as a part of the Output configuration (section 4.6.6). If an output rate limit is set, then the output ramps to the safe level at that rate, otherwise it performs a step
change. If setpoint or manual tracking is enabled (in setpoint configuration section
4.6.5), Inhibit overrides tracking.
If ‘No’ is selected, the loop operates normally.
Inhibit can be enabled/disabled from an external source.
The value at which the control loop is aiming. SP may be derived from a number of
sources, as described in Appendix B, section B2.5. The value range limited by the setpoint limits (SP High Limit and SP Low Limit) described in section 4.6.5.
A read-only value displaying the current value of setpoint being used by the loop. This
might or might not be the Target setpoint. The value may come from a number of
sources, but is limited by the setpoint limits (SP High Lim and SP Low Lim) described in
section 4.6.5.
The actual working output value before being split into channel 1 and 2 outputs.
Select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. ‘Yes’ freezes the integral term at its current value. IntHold ensures
that the power is reapplied smoothly after the loop has been broken for service reasons, for example.
4.6.2 Setup menu parameters
Loop Name
Ch1 Control
Ch2 Control
Control Action
PB Units *
Deriv Type *
Setpoint Access
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Allows entry of an 11 character name for the loop.
Selects the type of control for channel one from:
Off: Channel is turned off
OnOff: Channel uses on/off control
PID: Proportional + integral + derivative (three-term) control.
VPU: Valve positioning unbounded
VPB: Valve positioning bounded.
Appendix B, Section B2.2 provides more details.
As above, but for loop channel two.
Select ‘Reverse’ or ‘Direct’.
‘Reverse’ means that the output is ‘on’ when the process value (PV) is below the target
setpoint (SP). This is normal for heating control.
‘Direct’ means that the output is on when PV is above SP. This is normal for cooling control.
Select ‘Engineering’ or ‘Percent’.
‘Engineering’ displays values in (for example) temperature units (e.g. °C or °F).
‘Percent’ displays values as a percentage of loop span (Range Hi - Range Lo).
‘Error’ means that changes to PV or SP cause changes to the derivative output. Derivative on error should be used with a programmer since it tends to reduce ramp overshoot. ‘Error’ provides rapid response to small setpoint changes which makes it ideal
for temperature control systems.
‘PV’ means that changes in PV alone cause changes to the derivative output. Typically
used for process systems using valve control, as it reduces wear on the valve mechanics.
Allows setpoint editing permission in the loop display pages (section 3.4.6).
‘Read/Write’ allows free access to all users
‘Read Only’ allows editing only in Configuration or Supervisor modes.
‘Operator R/W’ allows editing in all modes except ‘Logged out’.
Page 57
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.6.2 SETUP MENU PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Auto/Man Access
As ‘Setpoint Access’ above, but for Auto/manual parameter.
*Note: ’PB Units’ and ‘Deriv Type’ appear only if at least one of Ch1 Control and Ch2 Control is set to
‘PID’, ‘VPU’ or’ VPB’.
4.6.3 Tune menu parameters
Tune Enable
Low Output
High Output
State
Stage
Stage Time
AT.R2G
Page 58
‘On’ initiates autotune. Legend changes to ‘Off’ when autotune is complete. Can be
set to ‘Off’ manually, to stop the tuning process.
Sets a low limit to be imposed whilst autotune is running. The value must be greater
than or equal to the ‘Output Low’ value, specified in the Output menu (section 4.6.6).
Sets a high limit to be imposed whilst autotune is running. The value must be less than
or equal to the ‘Output High’ value, specified in the Output menu (section 4.6.6).
Read only display of autotune progress:
Off. Autotune not running
Ready. Fleeting display. Changes immediately to ‘Running’.
Running. Autotune is in progress.
Complete. Autotune completed successfully. This is a fleeting display which changes
immediately to ‘Off’.
Timeout, TI Limit and R2G Limit are error conditions described in Appendix B section
B2.4.5. If any of these occurs, tuning is aborted and the PID settings remain unchanged.
A read only display showing the progress of the autotune:
Settling. Displayed during the first minute whilst loop stability is checked (Appendix B,
section B2.4.5)
To SP. Heating or cooling switched on.
Wait min. Power output off.
Wait max. Power output on.
Timeout, TI Limit and R2G Limit are error conditions described in Appendix B section
B2.4.5.
Time into the current stage of the autotune process. 0 to 99999 seconds.
Autotune at R2G. ‘Yes’ means that the control loop uses the R2G value calculated by
autotune. ‘No’ causes the loop to use the R2G value entered by the user (PID menu)
calculated as described in Appendix B section B2.4.5.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.6.4 PID menu parameters
Note: If control type is set to ‘Off’, or ‘OnOff’ in the Setup menu, the PID menu contains only the
Loop Break time parameter ‘LBT’.
Sched Type
Number of Sets
Remote input
Active Set
Boundary 1-2
Boundary 2-3
PB/PB2/PB3
Ti/Ti2/Ti3
Td/Td2/Td3
R2G/R2G2/R2G3
CBH/CBH2/CBH3
CBL/CBL2/CBL3
MR/MR2/MR3
LBT/LBT2/LBT3
Output Low/2/3
Output High/2/3
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Selects the type of gain scheduling (section B2.3.7) to be applied.
Off. Gain scheduling not active
Set. The user selects the PID parameter set to be used.
Setpoint. Transfer from one set to the next depends on the setpoint value
PV. The transfer from one set to another depends on the PV value
Error. The transfer between sets depends on the value of the error signal
OP. Transfer depends on the value of the output.
Rem. Transfer is controlled by a remote input.
Allows the number of sets of PID parameters for use in Gain scheduling to be selected.
For ‘Sched Type’ = ‘Rem’ only, this shows the current value of the remote input channel
being used to select which set is active. If the remote input value ≤ the Boundary 1-2
value (see below) then set 1 is selected. If it is > Boundary 1-2 value but ≤ Boundary 23 value then set 2 is used. If the remote value is > Boundary 2-3 value, then set three is
used. If the Remote input is not ‘wired’, the value is user editable from the front panel.
The set number currently in use.
For all Sched Types except ‘Set’, this allows the user to enter a ‘boundary’ value, which
means that if the relevant value (SP, PV, Error etc.) rises above this boundary, the loop
switches from PID set 1 to PID set 2. If it falls below the boundary value, the loop switches from set 2 to set 1.
As above but for switching between sets 2 and 3.
Proportional band for set one/two/three. The proportional term in the units (Engineering units or %) set in ‘PBUnits’ in the Setup menu. See Appendix B section B2.2.2 for
more details.
Integral time constant for set one/two/three. Valid entries are1 to 9999.9 seconds, or
‘Off’. If set Off, then integral action is disabled. Removes steady state control offsets by
moving the output up or down at a rate proportional to the error signal.
Derivative time constant for set one/two/three. Valid entries are 1 to 9999.9 seconds,
or ‘Off’. If set Off, then derivative action is disabled. Determines how strongly the controller reacts to a change in the PV. Used to control overshoot and undershoot and to
restore the PV rapidly if there is a sudden change in demand.
Relative cool gain for set one/two/three. Appears only if cooling has been configured
(Ch2 Control not ‘Off’ or ‘OnOff’ in Setup menu). Valid entries are 0.1 to 10. Sets the
cooling proportional band which compensates for differences between heating and
cooling power gains.
Cutback high for set one/two/three. Valid entries ‘Auto’ (3PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The
number of display units above setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 0% or
-100% (OP min), in order to modify undershoot on cool down. See section B2.3.2 for
more details.
Cutback low for set one/two/three. Valid entries ‘Auto’ (3PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The
number of display units below setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 100%
(OP max), in order to modify overshoot on heat up. See section B2.3.2 for more details.
Manual reset for set one/two/three. Valid entries 0 to 100%. Introduces a fixed additional power level to the output in order to eliminate steady state error from proportional only control. Applied instead of the integral component when Ti is set to ‘Off’.
Loop break time for set one/two/three. valid entries are 1 to 99999 seconds, or ‘Off’.
See section B2.3.6 for more details.
Output low limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in the range Output High/2/3
to -100.
Output high limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in the range Output Low/2/3
to +100
Page 59
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.6.5 Setpoint menu parameters
Range High/Low
SP select
SP1, SP2
SP Low Limit
SP High Limit
Alt SP Enable
Alt SP
Rate
RateDone
SP Rate Disable
Servo To PV
SPTrim
SP Trim High/Low
Manual Track
Setpoint Track
Track PV
Track Value
SP Int Balance
Page 60
Range limits. Valid entries from 99999 to -99999. Range limits set absolute maxima and
minima for control loop setpoints. If the proportional band is configured as a % span,
the span is derived from the range limits.
Select SP1 or SP2. SP1 is considered to be the primary setpoint for the controller, and
SP2 a secondary (standby) setpoint.
Allows values for Setpoints 1 and 2 to be entered. Valid entries are any within the range
‘SPHigh Limit’ to ‘SPLowLim’.
Minimum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are in the range ‘Range Lo’ and
‘SP High Limit’
Maximum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are in the range ‘Range Hi’ and
‘SP LowLim’
‘Yes’ enables the alternative setpoint; ‘No’ disables it. May be wired to an external or
internal source.
When wired this is a read only display of the alternative setpoint value. Otherwise, the
user may insert a value. Valid values are limited by ‘Range Hi’ and ‘Range Lo’.
Sets the maximum rate at which the working setpoint may change. Often used to protect the load from thermal shock cause by large step changes in setpoint. Valid entries
are 0.1 to 9999.9 engineering units per second, or ‘Off’.
Read only display. ‘Yes’ indicates that the working setpoint has completed its change.
‘No’ indicates that the setpoint is still ramping.
Appears only if Rate is not ‘Off’. ‘Yes’ disables rate limiting; ‘No’ enables rate limiting.
If ‘Rate’ is set to any value other than ‘Off’, and if ‘Servo to PV’ is set to ‘Yes’ then any
change in the current setpoint value causes the working setpoint to servo to the current
PV before ramping to the new setpoint value.
A positive or negative value added to the setpoint, for local fine tuning. Valid entries
are any value between ‘SP Trim High’ and ‘SPTrim Low’.
Setpoint trim high and low limits
‘On’ enables manual tracking to allow the local SP to follow the value of the current PV.
See section B2.5.5 for more details. ‘Off’ disables manual tracking.
‘On’ enables setpoint tracking to allow the local SP to follow the value of the alternative
SP. See section B2.5.4 for more details. ‘Off’ disables setpoint tracking.
The unit tracks the PV when it is servoing or tracking.
The SP to track in manual tracking
Allows the user to enable (tick) or disable (cross) debump on PV change.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.6.6 Output menu items
Appendix B section B2.6 contains details of the output functions.
Output Low
Output High
Ch1 Output
Ch2 Output
Ch2 Deadband
Rate
Ch1 OnOff Hyst
Ch2 OnOff Hyst
Ch1 Travel Time
Ch2 Travel Time
Nudge Raise
Nudge Lower
Ch1 Pot Pos*
Ch1 Pot Brk*
Ch2 Pot Pos*
Ch2 Pot Brk*
Pot Brk Mode*
The minimum power, or the maximum ‘negative’ (i.e. cooling) power to be delivered by
the system. The valid input range is -100% and Output High.
The maximum output power to be delivered by channels 1 and 2, where 100% is full
power. The valid input range is Output Low to 100.0%. Reducing this value reduces
the rate of change of the process, but it also reduces the controller’s ability to react to
perturbations.
Displays the positive power values used by the heat output. Values range from Output
low to Output high
Displays the cooling power values for channel two. Appears as a value between Output
high and -100%, where -100% represents full cooling power.
A gap (in %) between output 1 switching off, and output 2 switching on, and vice-versa.
Valid inputs are 0 (off) to 100%.
Limit on the rate at which the output from the PID can change. Can be useful in preventing rapid changes in output that could damage the process, heater elements etc.
Appears only if ‘Ch1 Control’ has been set to ‘OnOff’ in the Setup menu. Allows the user
to enter a hysteresis value for channel one. Valid entries are 0.0 to 200.0.
Appears only if ‘Ch2 Control’ has been set to ‘OnOff’ in the Setup menu. Allows the user
to enter a hysteresis value for channel two. Valid entries are 0.0 to 200.0.
Appears only if Setup menu parameter ‘Ch1 Control’ is set to ‘VPB’ or ‘VPU’. This is the
valve travel time from closed (0%) to open (100%). In a valve positioning application,
channel 1 output is connected by a single software ‘wire’ to a Valve Raise/Valve Lower
relay pair. For heat/cool applications, channel 1 is associated with the heating valve.
Valid entries: 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
Appears only if Setup menu parameter ‘Ch2 Control’ is set to ‘VPB’ or ‘VPU’. This is the
valve travel time from closed (0%) to open (100%). For heat/cool applications, channel
2 is associated with the cooling valve. Valid entries: 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
Appears only if Setup menu parameter ‘Ch1 Control’ or Ch2 Control is set to ‘VPU’.
If set to ‘Yes’, the valve can be moved towards the open position by, for example, a contact closure, an up arrow button operation or a serial communications command. The
default minimum nudge time is 125 ms, but this can be edited in the relevant relay configuration - see section 4.7.2. See also Section B2.6.10 for more ‘Nudge’ details.
As for ‘Nudge Raise’, above but moves the valve towards the closed position.
The position of the channel one actuator as measured by the feedback potentiometer.
‘On’ indicates that the input to the relevant channel is open circuit.
The position of the channel two actuator as measured by the feedback potentiometer.
‘On’ indicates that the input to the relevant channel is open circuit.
Defines the action to be taken if a potentiometer break is detected:
Raise: opens the valve
Lower: closes the valve
Rest: the valve remains in its current state.
Model: the controller tracks the position of the valve and sets up a model of the system
so that it continues to function if the potentiometer becomes faulty.
* Note: These parameters appear only if the ‘Setup’ menu parameter ‘Ch1 Control’ or ‘Ch2 control’
(as appropriate) is set to ‘VBP’. The Setup menu is described in section 4.6.2.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 61
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.6.6 OUTPUT MENU PARAMETERS (Cont.)
SBrk Mode
Sbrk OP
Safe OP
Manual Mode
Manual Output
Defines the action to be taken in the event of a sensor break.
Safe: The output adopts the value configured in ‘Sbrk OP’, below.
Hold: The output remains at its current level.
The value to be output if a sensor break occurs, and SBrk Mode (above) is set to ‘Safe’.
The output level adopted when the loop is inhibited (Main menu section 4.6.1).
Selects the type of transition to occur when changing to manual mode (section 4.6.1):
Track: Whilst in Auto mode, the manual output tracks the control output so that there
is no change of output when manual mode is switched to.
Step: On transition to manual mode, the output is set to the value entered for ‘ForcedOP’ (below).
Last Man. Out: On transition to manual mode, the output adopts the manual output value as last set by the operator.
The output when the loop is in manual mode. In manual mode the controller limits the
maximum power, but it is not recommended that it be left unattended at high power
settings. It is important that over range alarms are fitted to protect the process.
Note: It is recommended that all processes are fitted with an independent over range detection system.
Forced Output
Manual Startup
Pff En
Power In
Cool Type
FF Type
FF Gain
FF Offset
FF Trim lim
FF OP
Track Output
Track Enable
Reluctantly)
Page 62
Forced Manual output value. When ‘Manual Mode’ = ‘Step’, this is the output value
adopted when changing from Auto to Manual mode.
When set to off (cross symbol), the controller powers up in the same (auto or manual)
mode that obtained when it was switched off. When set to on (tick symbol) the controller always powers up in manual mode.
Power feed forward enable. ‘Yes’ enables power feed forward (adjusts the output signal to compensate for variations is supply voltage. ‘No’ disables Pff. See section B2.6.6
for further details.
Read only display of the current supply voltage.
Appears only if ‘Ch2 Control’ = ‘PID’ in the setup menu (section 4.6.2) and allows the
user to enter the appropriate type of cooling (section B2.6.7):
Linear: For use when controller output changes linearly with PID demand.
Oil: For oil cooled applications
Water: For water cooled applications
Fan: For forced air cooling.
Feed forward type (section B2.6.8):
None: No signal fed forward.
Remote: A remote signal fed forward.
SP: Setpoint is fed forward.
PV: PV is fed forward.
For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this scales the feed forward signal.
For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this defines the offset of the scaled feed forward signal.
For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, defines symmetrical limits about the PID output which are applied to the scaled feed forward signal.
For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this is the calculated (scaled, offset and trimmed) feed forward signal. FF OP = FF gain (input + FF Offset)
If ‘Track Enable’ (below) is set to ‘Yes’, this is the value for the control output. PID remains in Auto mode and tracks the output. The Track OP value can be wired to an external source, or can be entered via the front panel. Similar to entering manual mode.
When set to ‘Yes’, the output follows the Track OP value (above). When subsequently
set to ‘Off’ the loop makes a bump less return to control.
Used to limit the output using a remote source. These limits cannot exceed the ‘Output
Low’ and ‘Output High’ values described earlier in this section.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.6.7 Loop diagnostics
These ‘parameters’ are read only unless otherwise stated.
Error
Target Output
Working Out Low
Working Out High
Loop Break
Prop. Output
Integral Output
Deriv. Output
Sensor Break
Sched PB
Sched Ti
Sched Td
Sched R2G
Sched CBH
Sched CBL
Sched MR
Sched Loop Break
Sched Out Low
Sched Out High
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
The difference in value between the setpoint and the PV.
The requested control output. The target of the active output if rate limiting is active.
The low limit for the working output. This is the value used to limit the output power of
the loop and is derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and the safety
limit.
The high limit for the working output. This is the value used to limit the output power
of the loop and is derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and the safety
limit.
Loop Break Alarm. Becomes active ‘Yes’ if the loop break time (LBT), set in the PID
menu (section 4.6.4) is exceeded, otherwise ‘No’ is displayed.
Shows the proportional term contribution to the control output
Shows the integral term contribution to the control output
Shows the derivative term contribution to the control output
Indicates sensor break status. On (tick symbol) indicates a sensor break has occurred;
Off (cross symbol) shows that no sensor breaks have been detected.
The scheduled proportional band for the current PID set.
The scheduled integral time for the current PID set.
The scheduled derivative time for the current PID set.
The scheduled relative cool gain value for the current PID set.
The scheduled cutback high value for the current PID set.
The scheduled cutback low value for the current PID set.
The scheduled manual reset value for the current PID set.
The scheduled loop break time for the current PID set.
The scheduled output low limit for the current PID set.
The scheduled output high limit for the current PID set.
Page 63
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.7 DIGITAL I/O
This area of configuration allows the digital I/O types to be selected.
Select configuration menu
Instrument
Network
Group
Channel
Virtual Channel
Loop
Digital I/O
1A1B (Dig.IO)
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B (Relay)
LBLC (Dig.In)
4AC (Relay)
5AC (Relay)
Figure 4.7 Digital I/O top level menu
4.7.1 Digital input/output
This applies to signals at terminals 1A/1B (figure 2.2)
Type
‘On Off O/P’, ‘Time Prop O/P’ or ‘Contact I/P’ (default)
PV
For inputs, 0 = contact is open; 1 = contact is closed. For On Off O/P, a value ≥ 0.5
drives the output high, otherwise, the output is driven low. For Time Prop O/P, the value is the demanded output %.
Min On Time
For Type = Time Prop O/P only, this allows a minimum on time to be specified. Configurable range = 0.1 to 150 seconds
Invert
Inverts the output sense for digital outputs; or the input signal for digital inputs.
Output
Off = output being driven low; On = output being driven high. Does not appear for
Type = Contact I/P
4.7.2 Relay outputs
This applies to terminal pairs 2A2B, 3A3B, 4AC, 5AC (figure 2.2).
Type (2A2B, 4AC) ‘On Off O/P’ (default), ‘Time Prop O/P’, Valve Raise.
Type (3A3B, 5AC) ‘On Off O/P’ (default), ‘Time Prop O/P’.
PV
For On Off O/P, a value ≥ 0.5 closes the relay contacts, otherwise, the contacts are
open. For Time Prop O/P, the value is the demanded output %.
Min On Time
For Type = Time Prop O/P only, this allows a minimum on time to be specified to reduce
relay wear. Configurable range = 0.1 to 150 seconds
Invert
Inverts the output sense for the relays (not applicable if Type = Valve Raise).
Inertia
For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be entered (in seconds) to take into
account valve run-on.
Backlash
For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be entered (in seconds) in order to
compensate for backlash in the valve linkage.
Standby action
For Type = Valve Raise only, this specifies the valve action when the instrument is in
standby mode.
Continue: Output continues at the demanded level
Freeze: The valve stops being driven.
Output
Off = relay contacts open; On = relay contacts closed.
Note: If 2A2B relay is set to ‘Valve Raise’, then 3A3B is set to ‘Valve Lower’. Similarly, if relay 4AC is
set to ‘Valve Raise’, then relay 5AC is set to ‘Valve Lower’.
When the loop channel output is wired to the PV input of a Valve Raise relay, then the PV input of the
associated Valve Lower relay becomes unavailable for wiring, and both relays are controlled by the
loop as a pair, using only the single wire.
Page 64
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.7.3 Digital inputs
This applies to terminals pairs LALC, LBLC (figure 2.2).
Type
’Contact I/P’
PV
0 = contact is open; 1 = contact is closed.
Invert
Inverts the sense of the input.
Note... See section B2.6.11 for a description of time proportioning.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 65
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.8 USER LIN
Allows the entry of up to four user linearisation tables, any one of which can be selected as ‘Lin Type’ in Channel configuration (section 4.4.1). Configuration consists of defining the number of points to be included (2
to 32) and then entering an X and a Y value for each point, where X values are the inputs and the Y values
are the resulting outputs.
4.8.1 User linearisation table rules
1.
Tables must be monotonic - i.e. there may not be more than one X value with the same Y value
assigned to it.
2 Each X value must be greater than the preceding one.
3. Each Y value must be greater than the preceding one.
4. If units other than temperature units are to be displayed, the channel scale high and scale low values
should be set to the same as the range high and low values, and the required scale units entered.
Figure 4.8.1 shows the first part of the configuration table for an imaginary cylinder example.
Point
pair
User Lin.1
X1 0.00
Y1 0.00
X2 0.50
Y2 0.07
X3 1.00
Volume (cubic metres)
Num. of Points 12
Y3 0.58
Depth (metres)
Figure 4.8.1 User Linearisation table example
When configuring a channel (section 4.4.1) to use a User linearisation table:
If Type = Thermocouple or RTD, then Range High/Low must be set to the highest and lowest ‘Y’ values to be
used, respectively. The instrument automatically looks up the associated ‘X’ mV or Ohms values.
If Type = mV, V or mA, then Range High/Low must be set to the highest and lowest ‘Y’ values to be used,
respectively. Input High/Low should be set to the highest and lowest ‘X’ values in the table, respectively.
4.9 CUSTOM MESSAGES
This feature allows the entry of up to 10 messages for sending to the history file, when triggered by a wired
source (e.g. an alarm going active).
The messages of up to 100 characters each are entered using either the virtual keyboard, described in section 3.6, or by means of iTools configuration software.
Up to three parameter values may be embedded in messages in the format [Address], where ‘Address’ is the
decimal Modbus address of the parameter (section5.3). E.G. [256] embeds Channel 1 PV.
Page 66
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.10 ZIRCONIA BLOCK (OPTION)
This option allows the calculation of Carbon Potential, Dew point or Oxygen concentration. A zirconia (oxygen) probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia. At elevated temperatures, such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to the probe absolute temperature
and to the log of the difference in oxygen partial pressure between its two ends.
The temperature of the probe is normally measured using a type K or type R thermocouple. The temperature effect on the thermocouple is such, that for successful operation, the probe temperature must be greater than 973K (700˚C).
4.10.1 Definitions
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The sensor input of the temperature loop may come from the zirconia probe but it is common for a separate
thermocouple to be used. The controller provides a heating output which may be used to control gas burners. In some applications a cooling output may also be connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper.
CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL
The zirconia probe generates a millivolt signal based on the ratio of oxygen concentrations on the reference
side of the probe (outside the furnace) to the amount of oxygen in the furnace.
The controller uses the temperature and carbon potential signals to calculate the actual percentage of carbon in the furnace. This second loop generally has two outputs. One output is connected to a valve which
controls the amount of an enrichment gas supplied to the furnace. The second output controls the level of
dilution air.
SOOTING ALARM
In addition to other alarms which may be detected by the controller, the instrument can trigger an alarm
when the atmospheric conditions are such that carbon will be deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the
furnace. The alarm may be wired to an output (e.g. relay) to initiate an external alarm.
AUTOMATIC PROBE CLEANING
The instrument has a probe clean and recovery strategy that can be programmed to occur between batches
or be manually requested. At the start of the cleaning process a ‘snapshot’ of the probe mV is taken, and a
short blast of compressed air is used to remove any soot and other particles that may have accumulated on
the probe. A minimum and maximum cleaning time can be set by the user. If the probe mV has not recovered to within 5% of the snapshot value within the maximum recovery time set then an alarm is given. This
indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or refurbishment is due. During the cleaning and recovery cycle the PV is frozen, thereby ensuring continuous furnace operation. The ‘Pv Frozen’ parameter can be
used in an individual strategy, for example to hold the integral action during cleaning.
ENDOTHERMIC GAS CORRECTION
A gas analyser may be used to determine the carbon monoxide (CO) concentration of the endothermic gas.
If a 4 to 20mA output is available from the analyser, this can be applied to the instrument to adjust the calculated % carbon reading automatically. Alternatively, this value can be entered manually.
CLEAN PROBE
As these sensors are used in furnace environments they require regular cleaning. Cleaning (Burn Off) is performed by forcing compressed air through the probe. Cleaning can be initiated either manually or automatically using a timed period. During cleaning ‘PV Frozen’ is set to ‘Yes’.
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION
In order to measure oxygen concentrations, one end of the probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be
measured, whilst the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere. For most applications, air provides a
suitable reference (reference input = 20.95 for air).
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 67
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.10.2 Configuration
The configuration parameters appear in one of three lists as shown in Figure 4.10.2a.
Zirconia
Gas Ref
Main
Probe type
Resolution
Min Calc Temp
Tolerance
Oxygen Exp
Temp Input
Probe Input
Temp Offset
Probe Offset
Carbon Potential
Dew Point
Oxygen
Soot Alarm
PV Frozen
Probe Status
Balance Integral
Carb Act CO O2
Probe state
Oxygen Type
CO Local
CO Remote
CO Remote Enable
H2 Local
H2 remote
H2 Remote Enable
H2 In use
Clean
Clean Frequency
Clean Time
Min Rcv Time
Max Rcv Time
Clean Valve
Clean Probe
Time2Cln
Clean Enable
Clean Max Temp
Clean Abort
Clean Rcov Time
Last Clean
Clean Msg Reset
Probe Fault
Cant Clean
Clean Abort
Clean Temp
Figure 4.10.2a Zirconia probe configuration layout.
ZIRCONIA MAIN
The parameters that appear depend on the ‘Probe Type’ setting. For this reason, not all the parameters listed appear for all probe types. Figure 4.10.2b shows a typical configuration page.
Zirconia.Main
Probe Type Eurotherm
Resolution 2
Min Calc Temp 720
Tolerance 1.0
Oxygen Exp 2
Temp Input 0
Probe Input 0
Carbon Potential Off
Dew Point Off
Oxygen Off
Temp Offset 0
Probe Offset 0
Soot alarm No
PV Frozen Yes
Probe Status Min Calc Temp
Balance Integral No
Carb Act CO O2 0.0000
Probe State Not Ready
Oxygen type Nernst
Figure 4.10.2 Zirconia Probe configuration (typical)
Page 68
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.10.2 CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
MAIN PARAMETERS
Probe Type
Resolution
Gas Reference
Rem Gas Ref
Rem Gas Enable
Working Gas
Min Calc Temp*
Oxygen Exp
Tolerance
Process Factor
Clean Frequency
Clean Time
Min Rcov Time
Max Rcov Time
Temp Input*
Temp Offset*
Probe Input
Probe mV Offset
Oxygen
Carbon Potential
Dew Point
Soot Alarm
Probe Fault
PV Frozen
Clean Valve
Clean State
Time to Clean
Probe Status
Balance Integral
Carb Act CO O2
Probe State
OxygenType
Select from a variety of probe manufacturers. The subsequent parameter list depends
on which manufacturer is selected.
Enter the number of decimal places to be used for the value display
Reference value for the hydrogen concentration in the atmosphere.
Remote reference value for hydrogen concentration in the atmosphere. Allows hydrogen concentration to be read from an external source.
‘Yes’ allows remote gas measurement. ‘No’ uses the internal Gas Reference value.
Read only. Working Reference Gas value
The minimum temperature in at which the calculation is valid.
The exponent units of the log oxygen type calculation. valid entries -24 to +24.
Sooting tolerance multiplier. Allows the user to adjust the sensitivity of the Sooting
alarm, in order to reduce the incidence of nuisance alarms.
Process factor defined by the probe manufacturer.
Allows the interval between probe cleaning cycles to be entered in hours and minutes.
Allows Probe clean time to be entered in hours and minutes.
The minimum recovery time after purging in hours and minutes.
The maximum recovery time after purging in hours and minutes.
Zirconia probe temperature input value
Allows a temperature offset to be entered for the probe.
Zirconia probe mV input
Allows an offset to be entered for the probe mV input
Read only. calculated oxygen value
Read only. The calculated carbon potential.
Read only. The dew point value derived from temperature and remote gas reference inputs.
Read only. Sooting alarm. Active if sooting is likely to take place. The sensitivity of the
alarm can be adjusted by using the ‘Tolerance’ parameter, above.
‘Yes’ indicates a sensor break.
Read only. Parameter set to ‘Yes’ during Probe cleaning.
Read only. Enable the Clean valve.
Read only. The burn off state of the zirconia probe: ‘Waiting’, ‘Cleaning’ or ‘Recovering’.Clean Probe‘Yes’ = Initiate probe cleaning. ‘No’ = Do not clean probe.
Read only. The time remaining, in hours and minutes until the next cleaning cycle is
due.
Read only. Current probe status
OK
Normal working
mV Sensor Brk
Probe input sensor break
Temp Sensor Brk Temperature input sensor break
Min Calc Temp
Probe deteriorating
This output goes ‘true’ when a step change in the output occurs, which requires an integral re-balance if the readings are used for PID control.
The carbon activity for the surface gas reaction between Carbon monoxide (CO) and
Oxygen (O2)
Read only. The current state of the probe. If ‘Measuring’, then the outputs are updated.
For any other state (Clean, Clean Recovery, Test impedance, Impedance Recovery,
Waiting), the outputs are not updated.
Oxygen equation being used.
* Temperature units are those configured for the channel to which the temperature measuring transducer is connected.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 69
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.10.2 CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
GAS REFERENCES PARAMETERS
CO Local
CO Remote
CO Remote En
CO in Use
H2 Local
H2 Remote
H2 Remote En
H2 In Use
Reference value for the carbon monoxide (CO) concentration in the atmosphere.
Remote reference value for the carbon monoxide concentration in the atmosphere. allows the value to be read remotely.
‘Yes’ allows remote CO measurement. ‘No’ uses the internal value.
The CO gas measurement value currently being used.
Reference value for the hydrogen (H) concentration in the atmosphere.
Remote reference value for the hydrogen concentration in the atmosphere. allows the
value to be read remotely.
‘Yes’ allows remote H measurement. ‘No’ uses the internal value.
The H gas measurement value currently being used.
CLEAN PARAMETERS
Clean Frequency
Clean Time
Min Rcov Time
Max Rcov time
Clean Valve
Clean Probe
Time to Clean
Clean Enable
Clean Max Temp
Clean Abort
Clean Rcov Time
Last Clean
Clean Msg Reset
Probe Fault
Cant Clean
Clean Abort
Clean Temp
Page 70
Allows the interval between probe cleaning cycles to be entered in hours and minutes.
Allows Probe clean time to be entered in hours and minutes.
The minimum recovery time after purging in hours and minutes.
The maximum recovery time after purging in hours and minutes.
Read only. Enable the Clean valve.
Initiate probe cleaning
Read only. The time remaining, in hours and minutes until the next cleaning cycle is
due.
Enable probe cleaning
Maximum temperature for cleaning. If the temperature exceeds this value, cleaning is
aborted.
Abort probe cleaning
The time taken for the probe to recover to 95% of its original value after the last clean.
If the last clean did not recover within the Max Rcov time, this value is set to 0.
The mV output from the probe after the last clean.
‘Yes’ clears cleaning related alarms
‘Yes’ means that the probe failed to recover to 95% of its original output, following a
clean,
Conditions exist which prevent a clean cycle starting. Can be cleared using ‘Clean Msg
Reset’.
A clean cycle was aborted. Can be cleared using ‘Clean Msg Reset’.
A clean cycle was aborted because the temperature was too high. Can be cleared using
‘Clean Msg Reset’.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
4.10.3 Wiring
Figure 4.10.3 shows a typical wiring arrangement for a Zirconia probe.
Cooling
solenoid
Outer electrode
Inner electrode
Zirconia
pellet
Screen
Dilution
Air
Clean Probe
Thermocouple
Enrichment gas
AI 1, AI 2 = analogue inputs
AI1 (zirconia) input range must be
configured as 0 to 2V (max.).
Power
supply
I/O1= Logic output
O/P2 to O/P 5 = Relay outputs
DI A = Digital input
Power
supply
Gas
valve
Figure 4.10.3 Typical zirconia probe wiring
4.11 ALARM SUMMARY
Allows the user to view the overall status of the unit’s alarms, and to carry out a global acknowledgement of
active alarms if required.
Global Ack
Allows the user to acknowledge all applicable alarms simultaneously. ‘Manual’ alarms
must be non-active before they can be acknowledged.
Any Channel alarm Indicates if there are any channel alarms active, acknowledged etc.
Any Sys Alarm
Indicates if there are any active system alarms.
Any Alarm
Indicates if there are any channel or system alarms active.
Alarm Summary.Global
Global Ack No
Any Channel Alarm Yes NAck
Any Sys Alarm Yes
Any Alarm Yes
Figure 4.11 Alarm summary display
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 71
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS
5.1 INSTALLATION
The installation of the Modbus link consists of connecting a standard Ethernet cable between the RJ45 connector at the rear of the unit to a host computer either directly or via a network. A ‘straight-through’ cable
can be used in either case (i.e. a cross-over cable is not required).
5.2 INTRODUCTION
MODBUS TCP allows the instrument to act as a 'slave' device to one or more host computers connected via
the RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder. Each recorder must have a unique Internet Protocol (IP) address, set up as described in Section 4.2.1 (Network.Interface).
MODBUS TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is a variant of the MODBUS family of communications protocols intended for supervision and control of automated equipment specifically covering the use of MODBUS
messaging in an intranet or internet environment, using TCP/IP protocols. Much of the MODBUS detail in
this manual is derived from the document openmbus.doc, available at http://www.modbus.org/default.htm
The above mentioned document also includes implementation guidelines for users.
Note: The Modbus protocol allows a maximum of 255 data bytes to be read from or written to in
one transaction. For this reason, the maximum number of standard (16 bit) registers that can be
accessed in one transaction is 255/2 = 127 and the maximum number of IEEE (32-bit) registers is
127/2 = 63.
5.2.1 Function Codes
MODBUS function codes 3, 4, 6, 8 and 16, defined in table 8.2.1a below, are supported and are fully described in section 5.5, below.
Code
Modbus definition
Description
03
Read holding registers
Reads the binary contents if holding registers. In this implementation codes 3 and 4 are identical in operation.
04
Read input registers
Reads the binary contents if holding registers. In this implementation codes 3 and 4 are identical in operation.
06
Preset single register
08
Diagnostics
16
Preset multiple registers
Writes a single value to a single register.
Performs a simple loop back test.
Writes values to multiple holding registers.
Table 5.2.1a MODBUS Function code definition
DIAGNOSTIC CODES
Function code 08, subfunction 00 (Return query data) echoes the query (Loop back).
Page 72
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.2.1 FUNCTION CODES (Cont.)
EXCEPTION CODES
MODBUS TCP provides reserved codes used for exceptions. These codes provide error information relating to failed requests. Exceptions are signalled by hex 80 being added to the function code of the request,
followed by one of the codes listed in table 8.2.1b, below.
Code
Modbus definition
Dec Hex
01 01 Illegal function
Description (see Modbus specification for full details)
An invalid function code was received
02
02
Illegal Data Address
An invalid data address was received
03
03
Illegal Data Value
An invalid data value was received
04
04
Slave Device Failure
An unrecoverable error occurred in the recorder
09
09
Illegal Sub Function
An invalid sub function was received
10
0A
Gateway path unavailable
Gateway misconfigured or overloaded
11
0B
Gateway target device failed Device not present on the network
to respond
Table 5.2.1b Exception codes
5.2.2 Data types
The following data types are supported:
1. 2's complement signed 16-bit analogue values with implied decimal point. The decimal point position
must be configured in both the recorder and the host computer.
2. 16, 32 and 64 bit signed integers.
3. 16-bit unsigned integer values.
4. 32 bit IEEE Floating point values.
5. Strings of limited size, can be transferred across Modbus TCP in Unicode format using a single nonmultiplexed set of consecutive registers.
DATA ENCODING
MODBUS uses what is called a 'Big endian' representation for addresses and data items. This means that
when a numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted, the most significant byte is sent first. For
example a 32-bit hex value of 12345678 would be transmitted as 12, followed by 34, followed by 56 and
finally 78.
5.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes
When a recorder receives a multi-register write request, it is possible that one or more requests will be rejected. Under such a circumstance, the recorder accepts all valid write requests and ignores any invalid
writes. No error response is produced.
5.2.4 Master communications timeout
Whilst the instrument is archiving, it is possible that communications responses slow sufficiently to cause
communications timouts. The Modbus master device should be configured with a timout value large
enough to ensure against nuisance timeouts during archiving.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 73
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.2.4 Non-volatile parameters in EEPROM
CAUTION
The parameters in the following list must not be written-to on a continuous basis as to do so will
damage the EEPROM, greatly shortening its useful life.
Note: ‘nvol’ = ‘non-volatile’. Loop ‘N’ = Loop1 and Loop2; Channel ‘N’ = Channel 1, 2, 3 and 4 etc.
Channel.N.AlarmN.Amount
Channel.N.AlarmN.Average Time
Channel.N.AlarmN.Block
Channel.N.AlarmN.Change Time
Channel.N.AlarmN.Deviation
Channel.N.AlarmN.Dwell
Channel.N.AlarmN.Hysteresis
Channel.N.AlarmN.Latch
Channel.N.AlarmN.Threshold
Channel.N.AlarmN.Type
Channel.N.Main.Break Response
Channel.N.Main.CJ Type
Channel.N.Main.Descriptor
Channel.N.Main.Ext CJ Temp
Channel.N.Main.Filter
Channel.N.Main.Input High
Channel.N.Main.Input Low
Channel.N.Main.Lin Type
Channel.N.Main.Offset
Channel.N.Main.Range High
Channel.N.Main.Range Low
Channel.N.Main.Range Units
Channel.N.Main.Resolution
Channel.N.Main.Scale High
Channel.N.Main.Scale Low
Channel.N.Main.Sensor Break Type
Channel.N.Main.Shunt
Channel.N.Main.Test Signal
Channel.N.Main.Type
Channel.N.Main.Units
Channel.N.Trend.Colour
Channel.N.Trend.Span High
Channel.N.Trend.Span Low
Custom Message..MessageN
Digital I/O.1A1B (Dig.IO)..Invert
Digital I/O.1A1B (Dig.IO)..Min On Time
Digital I/O.1A1B (Dig.IO)..Type
Digital I/O.2A2B (Relay)..Invert
Digital I/O.2A2B (Relay)..Min On Time
Digital I/O.2A2B (Relay)..Type
Digital I/O.3A3B (Relay)..Invert
Digital I/O.3A3B (Relay)..Min On Time
Digital I/O.3A3B (Relay)..Type
Digital I/O.4AC (Relay)..Invert
Digital I/O.4AC (Relay)..Min On Time
Digital I/O.4AC (Relay)..Type
Digital I/O.5AC (Relay)..Invert
Digital I/O.5AC (Relay)..Min On Time
Digital I/O.5AC (Relay)..Type
Digital I/O.LALC (Dig.In)..Invert
Digital I/O.LALC (Dig.In)..Min On Time
Digital I/O.LALC (Dig.In)..Type
Digital I/O.LBLC (Dig.In)..Invert
Digital I/O.LBLC (Dig.In)..Min On Time
Digital I/O.LBLC (Dig.In)..Type
Group.Recording.ChannelN
Group.Recording.Enable
Group.Recording.Interval
Group.Recording.UHH Compression
Group.Recording.VirtualChanN
Group.Trend.Descriptor
Page 74
Group.Trend.Interval
Group.Trend.Major Divs
Group.Trend.PointN
Instrument.Display.Brightness
Instrument.Display.Dual Loop
Instrument.Display.H.Trend scaling
Instrument.Display.Home Page
Instrument.Display.Horizontal Bar
Instrument.Display.Horizontal Trend
Instrument.Display.HPage Timeout
Instrument.Display.Loop control
Instrument.Display.Numeric
Instrument.Display.Promote List
Instrument.Display.Save After
Instrument.Display.Saver Brightness
Instrument.Display.Setpoint colour
Instrument.Display.Trend Backgrnd
Instrument.Display.Vertical Bar
Instrument.Display.Vertical Trend
Instrument.Info.Name
Instrument.Locale.Date Format
Instrument.Locale.DST Enable
Instrument.Locale.End Day
Instrument.Locale.End Month
Instrument.Locale.End On
Instrument.Locale.End Time
Instrument.Locale.Start Day
Instrument.Locale.Start Month
Instrument.Locale.Start On
Instrument.Locale.Start Time
Instrument.Locale.Time Zone
Instrument.Notes.NoteN
Instrument.Promote List Param N
Instrument.Promote List Param N Desc
Instrument.Security.Comms Pass
Instrument.Security.Default Config.
Instrument.Security.Engineer Pass
Instrument.Security.Operator Pass
Instrument.Security.Supervisor Pass
Instrument.Upgrade.Account Password
Instrument.Upgrade.Account Username
Instrument.Upgrade.Server IP Address
Instrument.Upgrade.Source Path
Instrument.Upgrade.Upgrade
Loop.N.Diagnostics.Loop Mode
Loop.N.Output.Ch2 Deadband
Loop.N.Output.ChN OnOff Hyst
Loop.N.Output.ChN Travel Time
Loop.N.Output.Cool Type
Loop.N.Output.FF Gain
Loop.N.Output.FF Offset
Loop.N.Output.FF Trim Lim
Loop.N.Output.FF Type
Loop.N.Output.Manual Mode
Loop.N.Output.Manual Startup
Loop.N.Output.Output High
Loop.N.Output.Output Low
Loop.N.Output.Pff En
Loop.N.Output.Pot Brk Mode
Loop.N.Output.Rate
Loop.N.Output.Rate Disable
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.2.4 NON-VOLATILE PARAMETERS IN EEPROM (Cont.)
Loop.N.Output.Safe OP
Loop.N.Output.Sbrk Mode
Loop.N.Output.Sbrk OP
Loop.N.PID.Boundary 1-2
Loop.N.PID.Boundary 2-3
Loop.N.PID.CBH
Loop.N.PID.CBH2
Loop.N.PID.CBH3
Loop.N.PID.CBL
Loop.N.PID.CBL2
Loop.N.PID.CBL3
Loop.N.PID.LBT
Loop.N.PID.LBT2
Loop.N.PID.LBT3
Loop.N.PID.MR
Loop.N.PID.MR2
Loop.N.PID.MR3
Loop.N.PID.Number of Sets
Loop.N.PID.PB
Loop.N.PID.PB2
Loop.N.PID.PB3
Loop.N.PID.R2G
Loop.N.PID.R2G2
Loop.N.PID.R2G3
Loop.N.PID.Remote Input
Loop.N.PID.Sched Type
Loop.N.PID.Td
Loop.N.PID.Td2
Loop.N.PID.Td3
Loop.N.PID.Ti
Loop.N.PID.Ti2
Loop.N.PID.Ti3
Loop.N.Setpoint.Manual Track
Loop.N.Setpoint.Range High
Loop.N.Setpoint.Range Low
Loop.N.Setpoint.Servo To PV
Loop.N.Setpoint.Setpoint Track
Loop.N.Setpoint.SP High Limit
Loop.N.Setpoint.SP Low Limit
Loop.N.Setpoint.SP Trim High
Loop.N.Setpoint.SP Trim Low
Loop.N.Setup.Auto/Man Access
Loop.N.Setup.ChN Control
Loop.N.Setup.Control Action
Loop.N.Setup.Deriv. Type
Loop.N.Setup.Loop Name
Loop.N.Setup.PB Units
Loop.N.Setup.Setpoint Access
Loop.N.Tune.AT.R2G
Loop.N.Tune.High Output
Loop.N.Tune.Low Output
Loop.N.Tune.Type
Network.Archiving.CSV Date Format
Network.Archiving.CSV Headers
Network.Archiving.CSV Headings
Network.Archiving.CSV Messages
Network.Archiving.CSV Tab Del
Network.Archiving.CSV Values
Network.Archiving.Destination
Network.Archiving.File Format
Network.Archiving.On Media Full
Network.Archiving.Period
Network.Archiving.Primary Password
Network.Archiving.Primary Server
Network.Archiving.Primary User
Network.Archiving.Rate
Network.Archiving.Remote Path
Network.Archiving.Sec. Password
Network.Archiving.Sec. Server
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Network.Archiving.Sec. User
Network.FTP Server.Password
Network.FTP Server.Username
Network.Interface.DNS Server
Network.Interface.Gateway
Network.Interface.IP Address
Network.Interface.IP Type
Network.Interface.Subnet Mask
Network.Modbus.Address
Network.Modbus.Input Timeout
Network.Modbus.PrefMaster IP
Network.Modbus.Serial Mode
Network.Modbus.Time Format
Network.Modbus.Unit ID Enable
User Lin.N..Num. Of Points
User Lin.N..Xn
User Lin.N..Yn
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Amount
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Average Time
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Block
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Change Time
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Deviation
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Dwell
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Hysteresis
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Latch
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Threshold
Virtual Channel.N.AlarmN.Type
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Descriptor
Virtual Channel.N.Main.High Cut Off
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Low Cut Off
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Operation
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Period
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Preset Value
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Resolution
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Type
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Units
Virtual Channel.N.Main.Units Scaler
Virtual Channel.N.Trend.Colour
Virtual Channel.N.Trend.Span High
Virtual Channel.N.Trend.Span Low
Zirconia.Clean.Clean Enable
Zirconia.Clean.Clean Frequency
Zirconia.Clean.Clean Max Temp
Zirconia.Clean.Clean Time
Zirconia.Clean.Max Rcov Time
Zirconia.Clean.Min Rcov Time
Zirconia.Gas References.CO Ideal
Zirconia.Gas References.CO Local
Zirconia.Gas References.CO Remote En
Zirconia.Gas References.H2 Local
Zirconia.Gas References.H2 Remote En
Zirconia.Main.Clean Frequency
Zirconia.Main.Clean Time
Zirconia.Main.Gas Reference
Zirconia.Main.Max Rcov Time
Zirconia.Main.Min Calc Temp
Zirconia.Main.Min Rcov Time
Zirconia.Main.Oxygen Exp
Zirconia.Main.Oxygen Type
Zirconia.Main.Probe Offset
Zirconia.Main.Probe Type
Zirconia.Main.Process Factor
Zirconia.Main.Rem Gas Enable
Zirconia.Main.Resol’n
Zirconia.Main.Resolution
Zirconia.Main.Temp Offset
Zirconia.Main.Tolerence
Page 75
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST
This list is arranged in alphabetical block order and gives the memory address for each parameter in both
hex and decimal.
The blocks are as follows:
Alarm summary
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Custom messages
Digital I/O
Group
Instrument
Loop 1
Loop 2
Network
OR block
User Lin 1
User Lin 2
User Lin 3
User Lin 4
Virtual chan 1
Virtual chan 2
Virtual chan 3
Virtual chan 4
Virtual chan 5
Virtual chan 6
Virtual chan 7
Virtual chan 8
Virtual chan 9
Virtual chan 10
Virtual chan 11
Virtual chan 12
Virtual chan 13
Virtual chan 14
Zirconia
DIGITAL I/O ASSIGNMENTS
There are seven DIO instances, each of which is associated with a particular set of terminals at the rear of the
instrument (figure 2.2), as follows:
DIO 1 is the digital I/O associated with terminals 1A1B
DIO 2 is the relay associated with terminals 2A2B
DIO 3 is the digital input associated with terminals LALC
DIO 4 is the relay associated with terminals 3A3B
DIO 5 is the digital input associated with terminals LBLC
DIO 6 is the relay associated with terminals 4AC
DIO 7 is the relay associated with terminals 5AC
Page 76
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
AlarmSummary.AnyAlarm
AlarmSummary.AnyChanAlarm
0 = No active alarms; 1 = one or more alarms active
0 = No channel alarms
1 = Channel alarm(s) active but all ack’d.
2 = Channel alarm(s) active but not all ack’d
0 = No system alarms; 1 = 1 or more system alm(s)
Acknowledge the most recent channel alarm
Channel and alarm number of most recent alarm
0 = No alarm
4 = Ch1;Al1
5 =Ch1;Al2
8 = Ch2;Al1
9 = Ch2Al2
12 = Ch3;Al1
13 = Ch3;Al2
16 = Ch4;Al1
17 = Ch4;Al2
132 = VC1;Al1
133 = VC1;Al2
136 = VC2;Al1
137 = VC2;Al2
140 = VC3;Al1
141 = VC3;Al2
144 = VC4;Al1
145 = VC4;Al2
148 = VC5;Al1
149 = VC5;Al2
152 = VC6;Al1
153 = VC6;Al2
156 = VC7;Al1
157 = VC7;Al2
160 = VC8;Al1
161 = VC8;Al2
164 = VC9;Al1
165 = VC9;Al2
168 = VC10;Al1
169 = VC10;Al2
172 = VC11;Al1
173 = VC11;Al2
176 = VC12;Al1
177 = VC12;Al2
180 = VC13;Al1
181 = VC13;Al2
184 = VC14Al1
185 = VC14;Al2
Status of most recent alarm
0 = Off
1 = Active
2 = Safe unack
3 = Active unack
Acknowledge the 2nd most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 2nd most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 2nd most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 3rd most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 3rd most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 3rd most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 4th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 4th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 4th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 5th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 5th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 5th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 6th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 6th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 6th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 7th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 7th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 7th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 8th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 8th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 8th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 9th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 9th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 9th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 10th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 10th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 10th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 11th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 11th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 11th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 12th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 12th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 12th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 13th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 13th most recent alarmr
As Alarm1Status, but for 13th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 14th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 14th most recent alarmr
As Alarm1Status, but for 14th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 15th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 15th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 15th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 16th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 16th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 16th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 17th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 17th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 17th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 18th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 18th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 18th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 19th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 19th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 19th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 20th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 20th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 20th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 21st most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 21st most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 21st most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 22nd most recent channel alarm
bool
uint8
01a2
01a0
418
416
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
bool
uint8
01a1
1192
1190
417
4498
4496
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
1191
4497
Not applicable
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
1195
1193
1194
1198
1196
1197
119b
1199
119a
119e
119c
119d
11a1
119f
11a0
11a4
11a2
11a3
11a7
11a5
11a6
11aa
11a8
11a9
11ad
11ab
11ac
11b0
11ae
11af
11b3
11b1
11b2
11b6
11b4
11b5
11b9
11b7
11b8
11bc
11ba
11bb
11bf
11bd
11be
11c2
11c0
11c1
11c5
11c3
11c4
11c8
11c6
11c7
11cb
11c9
11ca
11ce
11cc
11cd
11d1
4501
4499
4500
4504
4502
4503
4507
4505
4506
4510
4508
4509
4513
4511
4512
4516
4514
4515
4519
4517
4518
4522
4520
4521
4525
4523
4524
4528
4526
4527
4531
4529
4530
4534
4532
4533
4537
4535
4536
4540
4538
4539
4543
4541
4542
4546
4544
4545
4549
4547
4548
4552
4550
4551
4555
4553
4554
4558
4556
4557
4561
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
AlarmSummary.AnySystemAlarm
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm2Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm2Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm2Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm3Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm3Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm3Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm4Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm4Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm4Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm5Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm5Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm5Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm6Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm6Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm6Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm7Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm7Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm7Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm8Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm8Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm8Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm9Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm9Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm9Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm10Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm10Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm10Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm11Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm11Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm11Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm12Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm12Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm12Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm13Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm13Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm13Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm14Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm14Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm14Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm15Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm15Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm15Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm16Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm16Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm16Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm17Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm17Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm17Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm18Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm18Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm18Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm19Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm19Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm19Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm20Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm20Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm20Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm21Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm21Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm21Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm22Ack
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 77
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm22Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm22Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm23Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm23Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm23Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm24Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm24Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm24Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm25Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm25Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm25Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm26Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm26Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm26Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm27Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm27Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm27Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm28Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm28Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm28Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm29Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm29Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm29Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm30Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm30Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm30Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm31Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm31Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm31Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm32Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm32Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm32Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm33Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm33Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm33Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm34Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm34Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm34Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm35Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm35Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm35Status
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm36Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm36Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm36Status
AlarmSummary.GlobalAck
AlarmSummary.StatusWord1
As Alarm1Num, but for 22nd most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 22nd most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 23rd most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 23th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 23rd most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 24th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 24th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 24th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 25th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 25th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 25th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 26th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 26th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 26th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 27th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 27th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 27th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 28th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 28th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 28th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 29th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 29th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 29th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 30th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 30th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 30th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 31st most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 31st most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 31st most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 32nd most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 32nd most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 32nd most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 33rd most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 33rd most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 33rd most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 34th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 34th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 34th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 35th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 35th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 35th most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 36th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 36th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 36th most recent alarm
Acknowledge all alarms. 0=No;1 = yes
A summary of Channel 1-4 alarms
Bit 0: 1 = Channel 1 Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 1 = Channel 1 Alarm 1 not acknowledged
Bit 2: 1 = Channel 1 Alarm 2 active
Bit 3: 1 = Channel 1 Alarm 2 not acknowledged
Bit 4: 1 = Channel 2 Alarm 1 active
Bit 5: 1 = Channel 2 Alarm 1 not acknowledged
Bit 6: 1 = Channel 2 Alarm 2 active
Bit 7: 1 = Channel 2 Alarm 2 not acknowledged
Bit 8: 1 = Channel 3 Alarm 1 active
Bit 9: 1 = Channel 3 Alarm 1 not acknowledged
Bit 10: 1 = Channel 3 Alarm 2 active
Bit 11: 1 = Channel 3 Alarm 2 not acknowledged
Bit 12: 1 = Channel 4 Alarm 1 active
Bit 13: 1 = Channel 4 Alarm 1 not acknowledged
Bit 14: 1 = Channel 4 Alarm 2 active
Bit 15: 1 = Channel 4 Alarm 2 not acknowledged
A summary of Virtual Channel 1 to 4 alarms
Bit 0: 1 = Virtual channel 1 Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 1 = Virtual channel 1 Alarm 1 not ack’d
Bit 2: 1 = Virtual channel 1 Alarm 2 active
Bit 3: 1 = Virtual channel 1 Alarm 2 not ack’d
Bit 4: 1 = Virtual channel 2 Alarm 1 active
Bit 5: 1 = Virtual channel 2 Alarm 1 not ack’d
Bit 6: 1 = Virtual channel 2 Alarm 2 active
Bit 7: 1 = Virtual channel 2 Alarm 2 not ack’d
Bit 8: 1 = Virtual channel 3 Alarm 1 active
Bit 9: 1 = Virtual channel 3 Alarm 1 not ack’d
Bit 10: 1 = Virtual channel 3 Alarm 2 active
Bit 11: 1 = Virtual channel 3 Alarm 2 not ack’d
Bit 12: 1 = Virtual channel 4 Alarm 1 active
Bit 13: 1 = Virtual channel 4 Alarm 1 not ack’d
Bit 14: 1 = Virtual channel 4 Alarm 2 active
Bit 15: 1 = Virtual channel 4 Alarm 2 not ack’d
A summary of Virtual Channel 5 to 8 alarms
As for Status Word 2 but for virtual channs 5 to 8
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
int16
11cf
11d0
11d4
11d2
11d3
11d7
11d5
11d6
11da
11d8
11d9
11dd
11db
11dc
11e0
11de
11df
11e3
11e1
11e2
11e6
11e4
11e5
11e9
11e7
11e8
11ec
11ea
11eb
11ef
11ed
11ee
11f2
11f0
11f1
11f5
11f3
11f4
11f8
11f6
11f7
11fb
11f9
11fa
01a3
01a4
4559
4560
4564
4562
4563
4567
4565
4566
4570
4568
4569
4573
4571
4572
4576
4574
4575
4579
4577
4578
4582
4580
4581
4585
4583
4584
4588
4586
4587
4591
4589
4590
4594
4592
4593
4597
4595
4596
4600
4598
4599
4603
4601
4602
419
420
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
int16
01a5
421
Not applicable
int16
01a6
422
Not applicable
AlarmSummary.StatusWord2
AlarmSummary.StatusWord3
Page 78
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
AlarmSummary.StatusWord4
A summary of Virtual Channel 9 to 12 alarms
As for Status Word 2 but for virtual channs 9 to 12
A summary of Virtual Channel 13 to 14 alarms
As for Status Word 2 but for virtual channs 13 to 14
Most recent active system alarm
2nd most recent active system alarm
3rd most recent active system alarm
4th most recent active system alarm
5th most recent active system alarm
6th most recent active system alarm
7th most recent active system alarm
8th most recent active system alarm
9th most recent active system alarm
10th most recent active system alarm
11th most recent active system alarm
12th most recent active system alarm
13th most recent active system alarm
14th most recent active system alarm
15th most recent active system alarm
16th most recent active system alarm
17th most recent active system alarm
18th most recent active system alarm
19th most recent active system alarm
20th most recent active system alarm
21st most recent active system alarm
22nd most recent active system alarm
23rd most recent active system alarm
24th most recent active system alarm
25th most recent active system alarm
26th most recent active system alarm
27th most recent active system alarm
28th most recent active system alarm
29th most recent active system alarm
30th most recent active system alarm
31st most recent active system alarm
32nd most recent active system alarm
int16
01a7
423
Not applicable
int16
01a8
424
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
121a
121b
121c
121d
121e
121f
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
122a
122b
122c
122d
122e
122f
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
01b0
1850
184b
1848
184a
1842
1849
1847
1845
1844
184e
1841
432
6224
6219
6216
6218
6210
6217
6215
6213
6212
6222
6209
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
float32
uint8
184f
1846
0102
6223
6214
258
Not applicable
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
float32
uint8
1843
1840
6211
6208
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
01b1
1870
186b
1868
186a
1862
1869
1867
1865
1864
186e
1861
186f
1866
0103
1863
1860
433
6256
6251
6248
6250
6242
6249
6247
6245
6244
6254
6241
6255
6246
259
6243
6240
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
AlarmSummary.StatusWord5
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm1ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm2ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm3ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm4ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm5ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm6ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm7ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm8ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm9ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm10ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm11ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm12ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm13ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm14ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm15ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm16ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm17ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm18ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm19ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm20ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm21ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm22ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm23ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm24ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm25ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm26ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm27ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm28ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm29ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm30ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm31ID
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm32ID
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledge
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
Channel.1.Alarm1.Active
Channel.1.Alarm1.Amount
Channel.1.Alarm1.AverageTime
Channel.1.Alarm1.Block
Channel.1.Alarm1.ChangeTime
Channel.1.Alarm1.Deviation
Channel.1.Alarm1.Dwell
Channel.1.Alarm1.Hysteresis
Channel.1.Alarm1.Inactive
Channel.1.Alarm1.Latch
Channel.1.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
Channel.1.Alarm1.Reference
Channel.1.Alarm1.Status
Channel.1.Alarm1.Threshold
Channel.1.Alarm1.Type
Channel.1.Alarm2.Acknowledge
Channel.1.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
Channel.1.Alarm2.Active
Channel.1.Alarm2.Amount
Channel.1.Alarm2.AverageTime
Channel.1.Alarm2.Block
Channel.1.Alarm2.ChangeTime
Channel.1.Alarm2.Deviation
Channel.1.Alarm2.Dwell
Channel.1.Alarm2.Hysteresis
Channel.1.Alarm2.Inactive
Channel.1.Alarm2.Latch
Channel.1.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
Channel.1.Alarm2.Reference
Channel.1.Alarm2.Status
Channel.1.Alarm2.Threshold
Channel.1.Alarm2.Type
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
1 = Acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on.
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
Alarm latch type
0 = None
1 = Auto
2 = Manual
3 = Trigger
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
Alarm status
0 = Unacknowledged 1 = None
2 = Active
3 = Inactive
4 = Acknowledged
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarn type
0 = None
1 = Abs High
2 = Abs Low
3 = Dev high
4 = Dev Low
5 = Dev band
6 = ROC rising 7 = ROC falling
10 = Dig Off
11 = Dig high
12 = Dig Low
1 = Acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on.
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As channel.1.Alarm.1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As channel.1.Alarm.1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As channel.1.Alarm.1.Status
Page 79
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Channel.1.Main.CJType
Cold junction compensation type
0 = Internal
1 = External
2 = Remote (Ch1)
3 =Remote (Ch2)
4 = Remote (Ch3)
5 = Remote (Ch4)
Text string to describe the channel
External CJ temperature
Fault response. 0 = none; 1 = Drive high; 2 = Drive low
Filter time constant
Input range maximum value
Input range minimum value
Channel internal cold junction temperature
0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted
Linearisation type
0 =Type B
1 = Type C
2 = Type D
3 = Type E
4 = Type G2
5 = Type J
6 =Type K
7 = Type L
8 = Type N
9 = Type R
10 = Type S
11 = Type T
12 = Type U
13 = NoMoNiCo
14 = Platinel
15 = NiNiMo
16 = Pt20RhPt40Rh 17 = Cu10
18 = Pt100
19 = Pt100A
20 = JPT100
21 = Ni100
22 = Ni120
23 = Cu53
uint8
180c
6156
Not applicable
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
4900
180d
1810
180e
1804
1803
1815
1816
1806
18688
6157
6160
6158
6148
6147
6165
6166
6150
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
1814
1817
0100
1808
1807
1809
1801
180b
180a
180f
1811
1805
0101
6164
6167
256
6152
6151
6153
6145
6155
6154
6159
6161
6149
257
Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
3dp
Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
uint8
1802
6146
Not applicable
uint8
1800
6144
Not applicable
string_t
uint8
4915
1820
18709 Not applicable
6176 Not applicable
float32
float32
1822
1821
6178
6177
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
01b2
18d0
18cb
18c8
18ca
18c2
18c9
18c7
18c5
18c4
18ce
18c1
18cf
434
6352
6347
6344
6346
6338
6345
6343
6341
6340
6350
6337
6351
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.Descriptor
Channel.1.Main.ExtCJTemp
Channel.1.Main.FaultResponse
Channel.1.Main.Filter
Channel.1.Main.InputHigh
Channel.1.Main.InputLow
Channel.1.Main.InternalCJTemp
Channel.1.Main.IPAdjustState
Channel.1.Main.LinType
24 = Linear
25 = Sqrt
26 = x3/2
Channel.1.Trend.SpanHigh
Channel.1.Trend.SpanLow
27 = x5/2
Input value before linearisation, scaling, adjust etc.
Fixed value to be added to/subtracted from PV
The output (displayed) value of the channel.
Range high value
Range low value
Range units: 0 = °C; 1 = °F; 2 = Kelvins
Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places
Scale high value
Scale low value
Sensor break type: 0 =Off; 1 = Low; 2 = High
A diagnostive indication of the input impedance
Shunt value (Ohms)
The PV (output) status
0 =Good
1 = Off
2 = Over range
3 = Under range 4 = HW error
5 = Ranging
6 = Overflow
7 = bad
8 = HW exceeded
9 = No data
12 = Comm channel error
Channel test waveform
0 = Triangle 5hr
1 = Triangle 40 min
2 = Triangle 4 min
3 = triangle 40 sec
4 = Sine 5 hr
5 = Sine 40 min
6 = Sine 4 min
7 = Sine 40 sec
Specifies the type of channel
0 = Off
1 = TC
2 = mV
3=V
4 = mA
5 = RTD
6 = Digital
7 = Test
Units descriptor
Configures the trend colour for this channel
0 = Red
1 = Blue
2 = Green
3 = Honey
4 = Violet
5 = Russet
6 = Dark blue
7 = Jade
8 = Magenta
9 = Dusky rose
10 = Yellow
11 = Powder blue
12 = Dark red
13 = Avocado
14 = Indigo
15 = Dark brown 16 = Aegean
17 = Cyan
18 = Aubergine 19 = Dark orange 20 = Pale yellow
21 = Hyacinth
22 = Dark green 23 = Sugar pink
24 = Bluebell
25 = Orange
26 = Pink
27 = Buttersilk
28 = Terracotta
29 = Blue babe
30 = Lime
31 = Blue jive
32 = Cucumber
33 = Eurogreen 34 = Wheatgerm 35 = Sea Blue
36 = Ginger
37 = Aqua pool
38 = Pale red
39 = Pale blue
40 = Lilac
41 = Sky blue
42 = Wild moss
43 = Turquoise
44 = Pale green
45 = Coffee
49 = Dark Grey
53 = Light grey
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
Channel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledge
Channel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
Channel.2.Alarm1.Amount
Channel.2.Alarm1.AverageTime
Channel.2.Alarm1.Block
Channel.2.Alarm1.ChangeTime
Channel.2.Alarm1.Deviation
Channel.2.Alarm1.Dwell
Channel.2.Alarm1.Hysteresis
Channel.2.Alarm1.Inactive
Channel.2.Alarm1.Latch
Channel.2.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Channel.1.Main.MeasuredValue
Channel.1.Main.Offset
Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Main.RangeHigh
Channel.1.Main.RangeLow
Channel.1.Main.RangeUnits
Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.ScaleHigh
Channel.1.Main.ScaleLow
Channel.1.Main.SensorBreakType
Channel.1.Main.SensorBreakVal
Channel.1.Main.Shunt
Channel.1.Main.Status
Channel.1.Main.TestSignal
Channel.1.Main.Type
Channel.1.Main.Units
Channel.1.Trend.Colour
Page 80
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Channel.2.Alarm1.Reference
Channel.2.Alarm1.Status
Channel.2.Alarm1.Threshold
Channel.2.Alarm1.Type
Channel.2.Alarm2.Acknowledge
Channel.2.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
Channel.2.Alarm2.Active
Channel.2.Alarm2.Amount
Channel.2.Alarm2.AverageTime
Channel.2.Alarm2.Block
Channel.2.Alarm2.ChangeTime
Channel.2.Alarm2.Deviation
Channel.2.Alarm2.Dwell
Channel.2.Alarm2.Hysteresis
Channel.2.Alarm2.Inactive
Channel.2.Alarm2.Latch
Channel.2.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
Channel.2.Alarm2.Reference
Channel.2.Alarm2.Status
Channel.2.Alarm2.Threshold
Channel.2.Alarm2.Type
Channel.2.Main.CJType
Channel.2.Main.Descriptor
Channel.2.Main.ExtCJTemp
Channel.2.Main.FaultResponse
Channel.2.Main.Filter
Channel.2.Main.InputHigh
Channel.2.Main.InputLow
Channel.2.Main.InternalCJTemp
Channel.2.Main.IPAdjustState
Channel.2.Main.LinType
Channel.2.Main.MeasuredValue
Channel.2.Main.Offset
Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Main.RangeHigh
Channel.2.Main.RangeLow
Channel.2.Main.RangeUnits
Channel.2.Main.Resolution
Channel.2.Main.ScaleHigh
Channel.2.Main.ScaleLow
Channel.2.Main.SensorBreakType
Channel.2.Main.SensorBreakVal
Channel.2.Main.Shunt
Channel.2.Main.Status
Channel.2.Main.TestSignal
Channel.2.Main.Type
Channel.2.Main.Units
Channel.2.Trend.Colour
Channel.2.Trend.SpanHigh
Channel.2.Trend.SpanLow
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarn type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarn type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Cold junction compensation type (as for Channel.1.Main)
Channel descriptor
External CJ temperature
Fault response (as for Channel.1.Main)
Filter time constant
Input range maximum value
Input range minimum value
Channel 2 internal cold junction temperature
0 = Channel unadjusted; 1 = Channel adjusted
Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main)
Input value before linearisation, scaling, adjust etc.
Fixed value to be added to/subtracted from PV
The output (displayed) value of the channel.
Range high value
Range low value
Range units (as channel.1.Main)
Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places
Scale high value
Scale low value
Sensor break type (as for Channel.1.Main)
A diagnostive indication of the input impedance
Shunt value in Ohms
Channel status (as for Channel.1.Main.Status)
Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main)
Channel function (as for Channel.1.Main.Type)
Channel units string
Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
float32
float32
18c6
0106
18c3
18c0
01b3
18f0
18eb
18e8
18ea
18e2
18e9
18e7
18e5
18e4
18ee
18e1
18ef
18e6
0107
18e3
18e0
188c
491b
188d
1890
188e
1884
1883
1895
1896
1886
1894
1897
0104
1888
1887
1889
1881
188b
188a
188f
1891
1885
0105
1882
1880
4930
18a0
18a2
18a1
6342
262
6339
6336
435
6384
6379
6376
6378
6370
6377
6375
6373
6372
6382
6369
6383
6374
263
6371
6368
6284
18715
6285
6288
6286
6276
6275
6293
6294
6278
6292
6295
260
6280
6279
6281
6273
6283
6282
6287
6289
6277
261
6274
6272
18736
6304
6306
6305
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Channel.2.Main.Resolution
3dp
Set by Channel.2.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.2.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.2.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Channel.2.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.2.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm1.Acknowledge
Channel.3.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
Channel.3.Alarm1.Active
Channel.3.Alarm1.Amount
Channel.3.Alarm1.AverageTime
Channel.3.Alarm1.Block
Channel.3.Alarm1.ChangeTime
Channel.3.Alarm1.Deviation
Channel.3.Alarm1.Dwell
Channel.3.Alarm1.Hysteresis
Channel.3.Alarm1.Inactive
Channel.3.Alarm1.Latch
Channel.3.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
Channel.3.Alarm1.Reference
Channel.3.Alarm1.Status
Channel.3.Alarm1.Threshold
Channel.3.Alarm1.Type
Channel.3.Alarm2.Acknowledge
Channel.3.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
Channel.3.Alarm2.Active
Channel.3.Alarm2.Amount
Channel.3.Alarm2.AverageTime
Channel.3.Alarm2.Block
Channel.3.Alarm2.ChangeTime
Channel.3.Alarm2.Deviation
Channel.3.Alarm2.Dwell
Channel.3.Alarm2.Hysteresis
Channel.3.Alarm2.Inactive
Channel.3.Alarm2.Latch
Channel.3.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on.
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarn type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on.
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
01b4
1950
194b
1948
194a
1942
1949
1947
1945
1944
194e
1941
194f
1946
010a
1943
1940
01b5
1970
196b
1968
196a
1962
1969
1967
1965
1964
196e
1961
196f
436
6480
6475
6472
6474
6466
6473
6471
6469
6468
6478
6465
6479
6470
266
6467
6464
437
6512
6507
6504
6506
6498
6505
6503
6501
6500
6510
6497
6511
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 81
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Channel.3.Alarm2.Reference
Channel.3.Alarm2.Status
Channel.3.Alarm2.Threshold
Channel.3.Alarm2.Type
Channel.3.Main.CJType
Channel.3.Main.Descriptor
Channel.3.Main.ExtCJTemp
Channel.3.Main.FaultResponse
Channel.3.Main.Filter
Channel.3.Main.InputHigh
Channel.3.Main.InputLow
Channel.3.Main.InternalCJTemp
Channel.3.Main.IPAdjustState
Channel.3.Main.LinType
Channel.3.Main.MeasuredValue
Channel.3.Main.Offset
Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Main.RangeHigh
Channel.3.Main.RangeLow
Channel.3.Main.RangeUnits
Channel.3.Main.Resolution
Channel.3.Main.ScaleHigh
Channel.3.Main.ScaleLow
Channel.3.Main.SensorBreakType
Channel.3.Main.SensorBreakVal
Channel.3.Main.Shunt
Channel.3.Main.Status
Channel.3.Main.TestSignal
Channel.3.Main.Type
Channel.3.Main.Units
Channel.3.Trend.Colour
Channel.3.Trend.SpanHigh
Channel.3.Trend.SpanLow
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarn type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Cold junction compensation type (as for Channel.1.Main)
Text string to describe the channel
External CJ temperature
Fault response (as for Channel.1.Main)
Filter time constant
Input range maximum value
Input range minimum value
Channel internal cold junction temperature
0 = Channel unadjusted; 1 = Channel adjusted
Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main.LinType)
Input value before linearisation, scaling, adjust etc.
Fixed value to be added to/subtracted from PV
The output (displayed) value of the channel.
Range high value
Range low value
Range units (as channel.1.Main.Units)
Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places
Scale high value
Scale low value
Sensor break type (as for Channel.1.Main)
A diagnostive indication of the input impedance
Shunt value in Ohms
Channel status (as for Channel.1.Main.Status)
Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main)
Channel function (as for Channel.1.Main.Type)
Channel units string
Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
float32
float32
1966
010b
1963
1960
190c
4936
190d
1910
190e
1904
1903
1915
1916
1906
1914
1917
0108
1908
1907
1909
1901
190b
190a
190f
1911
1905
0109
1902
1900
494b
1920
1922
1921
6502
267
6499
6496
6412
18742
6413
6416
6414
6404
6403
6421
6422
6406
6420
6423
264
6408
6407
6409
6401
6411
6410
6415
6417
6405
265
6402
6400
18763
6432
6434
6433
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Channel.3.Main.Resolution
3dp
Set by Channel.3.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.3.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.3.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Channel.3.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.3.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm1.Acknowledge
Channel.4.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
Channel.4.Alarm1.Active
Channel.4.Alarm1.Amount
Channel.4.Alarm1.AverageTime
Channel.4.Alarm1.Block
Channel.4.Alarm1.ChangeTime
Channel.4.Alarm1.Deviation
Channel.4.Alarm1.Dwell
Channel.4.Alarm1.Hysteresis
Channel.4.Alarm1.Inactive
Channel.4.Alarm1.Latch
Channel.4.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
Channel.4.Alarm1.Reference
Channel.4.Alarm1.Status
Channel.4.Alarm1.Threshold
Channel.4.Alarm1.Type
Channel.4.Alarm2.Acknowledge
Channel.4.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
Channel.4.Alarm2.Active
Channel.4.Alarm2.Amount
Channel.4.Alarm2.AverageTime
Channel.4.Alarm2.Block
Channel.4.Alarm2.ChangeTime
Channel.4.Alarm2.Deviation
Channel.4.Alarm2.Dwell
Channel.4.Alarm2.Hysteresis
Channel.4.Alarm2.Inactive
Channel.4.Alarm2.Latch
Channel.4.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
Channel.4.Alarm2.Reference
Channel.4.Alarm2.Status
Channel.4.Alarm2.Threshold
Channel.4.Alarm2.Type
Channel.4.Main.CJType
Channel.4.Main.Descriptor
Channel.4.Main.ExtCJTemp
Channel.4.Main.FaultResponse
Channel.4.Main.Filter
Channel.4.Main.InputHigh
Channel.4.Main.InputLow
Channel.4.Main.InternalCJTemp
Channel.4.Main.IPAdjustState
Channel.4.Main.LinType
Channel.4.Main.MeasuredValue
Channel.4.Main.Offset
Channel.4.Main.PV
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on.
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarn type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarn type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Cold junction compensation type(as for Channel.1.Main)
Text string to describe the channel
External CJ temperature
Fault response (as for Channel.1.Main)
Filter time constant
Input range maximum value
Input range minimum value
Channel internal cold junction temperature
0 = Channel unadjusted; 1 = Channel adjusted
Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main.LinType)
Input value before linearisation, scaling, adjust etc.
Fixed value to be added to/subtracted from PV
The output (displayed) value of the channel.
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
01b6
19d0
19cb
19c8
19ca
19c2
19c9
19c7
19c5
19c4
19ce
19c1
19cf
19c6
010e
19c3
19c0
01b7
19f0
19eb
19e8
19ea
19e2
19e9
19e7
19e5
19e4
19ee
19e1
19ef
19e6
010f
19e3
19e0
198c
4951
198d
1990
198e
1984
1983
1995
1996
1986
1994
1997
010c
438
6608
6603
6600
6602
6594
6601
6599
6597
6596
6606
6593
6607
6598
270
6595
6592
439
6640
6635
6632
6634
6626
6633
6631
6629
6628
6638
6625
6639
6630
271
6627
6624
6540
18769
6541
6544
6542
6532
6531
6549
6550
6534
6548
6551
268
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Channel.4.Main.Resolution
3dp
Set by Channel.4.Main.Resolution
Page 82
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Channel.4.Main.RangeHigh
Channel.4.Main.RangeLow
Channel.4.Main.RangeUnits
Channel.4.Main.Resolution
Channel.4.Main.ScaleHigh
Channel.4.Main.ScaleLow
Channel.4.Main.SensorBreakType
Channel.4.Main.SensorBreakVal
Channel.4.Main.Shunt
Channel.4.Main.Status
Channel.4.Main.TestSignal
Channel.4.Main.Type
Channel.4.Main.Units
Channel.4.Trend.Colour
Channel.4.Trend.SpanHigh
Channel.4.Trend.SpanLow
Range high value
Range low value
Range units (as channel.1.Main.RangeUnits)
Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places
Scale high value
Scale low value
Sensor break type (as for Channel.1.Main)
A diagnostive indication of the input impedance
Shunt value in Ohms
Channel status (as for Channel.1.Main.Status)
Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main.TestSignal)
Channel function (as for Channel.1.Main.Type)
Units descriptor
Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
float32
float32
1988
1987
1989
1981
198b
198a
198f
1991
1985
010d
1982
1980
4966
19a0
19a2
19a1
6536
6535
6537
6529
6539
6538
6543
6545
6533
269
6530
6528
18790
6560
6562
6561
Set by Channel.4.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.4.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Channel.4.Main.Resolution
Set by Channel.4.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
CustomMessage.Message1
CustomMessage.Message2
CustomMessage.Message3
CustomMessage.Message4
CustomMessage.Message5
CustomMessage.Message6
CustomMessage.Message7
CustomMessage.Message8
CustomMessage.Message9
CustomMessage.Message10
CustomMessage.Trigger1
CustomMessage.Trigger2
CustomMessage.Trigger3
CustomMessage.Trigger4
CustomMessage.Trigger5
CustomMessage.Trigger6
CustomMessage.Trigger7
CustomMessage.Trigger8
CustomMessage.Trigger9
CustomMessage.Trigger10
Custom Message No. 1
Custom Message No. 2
Custom Message No. 3
Custom Message No. 4
Custom Message No. 5
Custom Message No. 6
Custom Message No. 7
Custom Message No. 8
Custom Message No. 9
Custom Message No. 10
Custom message No. 1 trigger
Custom message No. 2 trigger
Custom message No. 3 trigger
Custom message No. 4 trigger
Custom message No. 5 trigger
Custom message No. 6 trigger
Custom message No. 7 trigger
Custom message No. 8 trigger
Custom message No. 9 trigger
Custom message No. 10 trigger
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
5e00
5e65
5eca
5f2f
5f94
5ff9
605e
60c3
6128
618d
28f0
28f1
28f2
28f3
28f4
28f5
28f6
28f7
28f8
28f9
24064
24165
24266
24367
24468
24569
24670
24771
24872
24973
10480
10481
10482
10483
10484
10485
10486
10487
10488
10489
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
DigitalIO.1.Invert
DigitalIO.1.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.1.Output
DigitalIO.1.PV
Invert signal. 0 = Do not invert; 1 = Invert
Minimum on time for time proportioned outputs
0 = output off; 1 = output on.
For contact inputs, 0 = open; 1 = closed
For On Off outouts, <0.5 = drive low, else drive high
For Time proportional outputs, PV = demanded output %
Digital I/O type
0 = Contact input
1 = On Off output
2 = Time proprtioning output
3 = Valve raise
4 = Valve lower
Valve positioning linkage backlash compensation (seconds)
Inertia value for the valve
0 = Do not invert; 1 = Invert
Minimum on time for time proportioned outputs
0 = output off; 1 = output on
As DigitalIO.1.PV
For valve positioning: 0 = Continue; 1 = Freeze
As DigitalIO.1.Type
0 = Do not invert; 1 = Invert
Minimum on time for time proportioned outputs
0 = output off; 1 = output on
As DigitalIO.1.PV
As DigitalIO.1.Type
0 = Do not invert; 1 = Invert
Minimum on time for time proportioned outputs
0 = output off; 1 = output on
As DigitalIO.1.PV
As DigitalIO.1.Type
0 = Do not invert; 1 = Invert
Minimum on time for time proportioned outputs
0 = output off; 1 = output on
As DigitalIO.1.PV
As DigitalIO.1.Type
Valve positioning linkage backlash compensation (seconds)
Inertia value for the valve
0 = Do not invert; 1 = Invert
Minimum on time for time proportioned outputs
0 = output off; 1 = output on
As DigitalIO.1.PV
For valve positioning: 0 = Continue; 1 = Freeze
As DigitalIO.1.Type
0 = Do not invert; 1 = Invert
0 = Do not invert; 1 = Invert
bool
float32
bool
float32
1503
1502
1504
1501
5379
5378
5380
5377
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
uint8
1500
5376
Not applicable
float32
float32
bool
float32
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
bool
float32
bool
float32
uint8
bool
float32
bool
float32
uint8
bool
float32
bool
float32
uint8
float32
float32
bool
float32
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
bool
float32
1518
1517
1513
1512
1514
1511
1519
1510
1523
1522
1524
1521
1520
1533
1532
1534
1531
1530
1543
1542
1544
1541
1540
1558
1557
1553
1552
1554
1551
1559
1550
1563
1562
5400
5399
5395
5394
5396
5393
5401
5392
5411
5410
5412
5409
5408
5427
5426
5428
5425
5424
5443
5442
5444
5441
5440
5464
5463
5459
5458
5460
5457
5465
5456
5475
5474
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
DigitalIO.1.Type
DigitalIO.2.Backlash
DigitalIO.2.Inertia
DigitalIO.2.Invert
DigitalIO.2.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.2.Output
DigitalIO.2.PV
DigitalIO.2.Standby action
DigitalIO.2.Type
DigitalIO.3.Invert
DigitalIO.3.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.3.Output
DigitalIO.3.PV
DigitalIO.3.Type
DigitalIO.4.Invert
DigitalIO.4.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.4.Output
DigitalIO.4.PV
DigitalIO.4.Type
DigitalIO.5.Invert
DigitalIO.5.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.5.Output
DigitalIO.5.PV
DigitalIO.5.Type
DigitalIO.6.Backlash
DigitalIO.6.Inertia
DigitalIO.6.Invert
DigitalIO.6.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.6.Output
DigitalIO.6.PV
DigitalIO.6.StandbyAction
DigitalIO.6.Type
DigitalIO.7.Invert
DigitalIO.7.MinOnTime
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 83
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
DigitalIO.7.Output
DigitalIO.7.PV
DigitalIO.7.Type
0 = output off; 1 = output on
As DigitalIO.1.PV
As DigitalIO.1.Type
bool
float32
uint8
1564
1561
1560
5476
5473
5472
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Group.Recording.Channel1En
Group.Recording.Channel2En
Group.Recording.Channel3En
Group.Recording.Channel4En
Group.Recording.Compression
Group.Recording.Enable
Group.Recording.FlashDuration
Group.Recording.FlashFree
Group.Recording.FlashSize
Group.Recording.Interval
Channel 1 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Channel 2 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Channel 3 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Channel 4 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
The UHH file compression rate (0 = Normal; 1 = High)
0 = Recording disabled; 1 = Recording enabled
Time in days until flash history files begin to be overwitten
Unused space in the internal flash in MBytes
Size of the internal flash in MBytes
Recording interval
0 =8Hz
1 = 4 Hz
2 = 2Hz
3 = 1Hz
4 = 2 sec
5 = 5 sec
6 = 10 sec
7 = 20 sec
8 = 30 sec
9 = 1 min
10 = 2 min
11 = 5 min
12 = 10 min
13 = 20 min
14 = 30 min
15 = 1 hr
Recording status
0 = Not recording
1 = Disabled
2 = Messages only
3 = Recording enabled
4 = Recording paused
1 = Suspend recording
Virtual Channel 1 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 2 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 3 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 4 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 5 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 6 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 7 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 8 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 9 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 10 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 11 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 12 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 13 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Virtual Channel 14 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Group descriptor
Trend interval. As Group.Recording.Interval, above
Number of major divisions
1st point in the group (VCh = Virtual channel)
0 =No trend
1 = Channel 1
2 = Channel 2
3 = Channel 3
4 = Channel 4
5 = VCh1
6 = VCh2
7 = VCh3
8 = VCh4
9 = VCh5
10 = VCh6
11 = VCh7
12 = VCh8
13 = VCh9
14 = VCh10
15 = VCh11
16 = VCh12
17 = VCH13
18 = VCh14
As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 2nd point in group
As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 3rd point in group
As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 4th point in group
As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 5th point in group
As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 6th point in group
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
int32
1023
1024
1025
1026
1040
1020
1039
1038
1037
1022
4131
4132
4133
4134
4160
4128
4153
4152
4151
4130
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
Not applicable
int16
1036
4150
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
string_t
int32
uint8
uint8
1035
1027
1028
1029
102a
102b
102c
102d
102e
102f
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
5b00
1002
1004
1006
4149
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
23296
4098
4100
4102
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
1007
1008
1009
100a
100b
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
string_t
bool
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
4400
1082
1081
1090
109b
109e
10A8
17408
4226
4225
4240
4251
4254
4264
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
bool
bool
int16
uint8
bool
uint8
bool
bool
int16
uint8
1093
1098
1096
1094
109d
109a
109f
1099
10ea
1091
1092
4243
4248
4246
4244
4253
4250
4255
4249
4330
4241
4242
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
109c
4252
Not applicable
bool
bool
string_t
int16
1097
1095
447a
0079
4247
4245
17530
121
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Group.Recording.Status
Group.Recording.Suspend
Group.Recording.VirtualChan1En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan2En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan3En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan4En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan5En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan6En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan7En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan8En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan9En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan10En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan11En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan12En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan13En
Group.Recording.VirtualChan14En
Group.Trend.Descriptor
Group.Trend.Interval
Group.Trend.MajorDivisions
Group.Trend.Point1
Group.Trend.Point2
Group.Trend.Point3
Group.Trend.Point4
Group.Trend.Point5
Group.Trend.Point6
Instrument.Clock.Date
Instrument.Clock.DST
Instrument.Clock.Time
Instrument.Display.Brightness
Instrument.Display.DualLoopControl
Instrument.Display.FaceplateCycling
Instrument.Display.HistoryBackground
Instrument.Display.HomePage
Instrument.Display.HorizontalBar
Instrument.Display.HorizontalTrend
Instrument.Display.HPageTimeout
Instrument.Display.HTrendScaling
Instrument.Display.LoopControl
Instrument.Display.LoopSetpointColour
Instrument.Display.Numeric
Instrument.Display.PromoteListView
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverAfter
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverBrightness
Instrument.Display.TrendBackground
Instrument.Display.VerticalBar
Instrument.Display.VerticalTrend
Instrument.Info.Bootrom
Instrument.Info.CompanyID
Page 84
Local date
1= DST active; 0 = DST inactive
Local time (including Zone and DST effects)
Display brightness 10 = 10%; 20 = 20% etc. (whole decades)
1 = Dual loop control page available for use
1 = Faceplate cycling On
History display background colour
0 = Black; 1 = Dark Grey; 2 = Light grey; 3 = White.
Home display page
1 = Horizontal bar mode enabled
1 = Horizontal trend mode enabled
Home time out value in minutes (0 = no timeout)
0 = hide horizontal trend scale; 1 = scale permanent
1 = Single loop control pages available for use
Loop setpoint colour (As Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
1 = Numeric mode enabled
1 = promote list display enabled
Screen saver time in minures. 0 = off
Screen saver brightness 10 = 10%; 20 = 20% etc.
(whole decades only)
Trend chart colour:
0 = Black; 1 = Dark Grey; 2 = Light grey; 3 = White.
1 = vertical bar mode enabled
1 = Vertical trend mode enabled
BootROM version
Always returns 1280
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Instrument.Info.ConfigRev
Instrument.Info.IM
The instrument configuration revision number
Instrument mode
Operating: All algorithms and I/O active.
Standby: Control o/p off. Absolute alarms active
Engineer: All outputs inactive.
The current supply voltage (for PFF applications)
The instrument descriptor
Displays the number of non-volatile writes performed
The instrument security revision number
Shows instrument type
Shows instrument version
Date format (0 = DDMMYY. 1 = MMDDYY; 2 = YYMMDD)
1 = Daylight Saving Time enabled
Daylight savings: End day
0 = Sunday
1= Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday 4 = Thursday 5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
Daylight savings: End month
0 = January
1= February
2 = March
3 = April
4 = May
5 = June
6 = July
7 = August
8 = September
9 = October
10 = November
11 = December
Week for changing to/from DST
0 = First
1= Second
2 = Third
3 = Fourth
4 = Last
5 = Second to last
DST end time in hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds
Language (0 = English)
DST start day. As Instrument.Locale.EndDay, above
DST start month As Instrument.Locale.EndMonth, above
Start DST on. As Instrument.Locale.EndOn, above
DST start time. As Instrument.Locale.EndTime above
Time zone
0 = GMT - 12 hours
1 = GMT - 11 hours
2 = GMT - 10 hours
3 = GMT - 9 hours
4 = GMT - 8 hours
5 = GMT - 7 hours
6 = GMT - 6 hours
7 = GMT - 5 hours
8 = GMT - 4 hours
9 = GMT - 3.5 hours
10 = GMT - 3 hours
11 = GMT - 2 hours
12 = GMT - 1 hour
13 = GMT
14 = GMT + 1 hour
15 = GMT + 2 hours
16 = GMT + 3 hours
17 = GMT + 3.5 hours
18 = GMT + 4 hours
19 = GMT + 4.5 hours
20 = GMT + 5 hours
21 = GMT + 5.5 hours
22 = GMT + 5.75 hours
23 = GMT + 6 hours
24 = GMT + 6.5 hours
25 = GMT + 7 hours
26 = GMT + 8 hours
27 = GMT + 9 hours
28 = GMT + 9.5 hours
29 = GMT + 10 hours
30 = GMT + 11 hours
31 = GMT + 12 hours
32 = GMT + 13 hours
Operator Note
Operator note 1
Operator note 2
Operator note 3
Operator note 4
Operator note 5
Operator note 6
Operator note 7
Operator note 8
Operator note 9
Operator note 10
Promote parameter No. 1
Descriptor for promote parameterNo. 1
Promote parameter No. 2
Descriptor for promote parameter No. 2
Promote parameter No. 3
Descriptor for promote parameter No. 3
Promote parameter No. 4
Descriptor for promote parameter No. 4
Promote parameter No. 5
Descriptor for promote parameter No. 5
Promote parameter No. 6
Descriptor for promote parameter No. 6
Promote parameter No. 7
Descriptor for promote parameterNo. 7
Promote parameter No. 8
Descriptor for promote parameter No. 8
Promote parameter No. 9
Descriptor for promote parameter No. 9
Promote parameter No. 10
Descriptor for promote parameter No. 10
1 = Password required for comms access
int32
uint8
10a0
00c7
4256
199
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
string_t
int32
int32
uint8
string_t
uint8
bool
uint8
10a6
445f
10a5
10a4
10a2
4474
10b1
10b3
10ba
4262
17503
4261
4260
4258
17524
4273
4275
4282
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
10bb
4283
Not applicable
uint8
10b9
4281
Not applicable
time_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
time_t
uint8
10b8
10b0
10b6
10b7
10b5
10b4
10b2
4280
4272
4278
4279
4277
4276
4274
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
bool
5500
5580
5600
5680
5700
5780
5800
5880
5900
5980
5a00
10e0
6300
10e1
6315
10e2
632a
10e3
633f
10e4
6354
10e5
6369
10e6
637e
10e7
6393
10e8
63a8
10e9
63bd
10c1
21760
21888
22016
22144
22272
22400
22528
22656
22784
22912
23040
4320
25344
4321
25365
4322
25386
4323
25407
4324
25428
4325
25449
4326
25470
4327
25491
4328
25512
4329
25533
4289
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Instrument.Info.LineVoltage
Instrument.Info.Name
Instrument.Info.NvolWrites
Instrument.Info.SecurityRev
Instrument.Info.Type
Instrument.Info.Version
Instrument.Locale.DateFormat
Instrument.Locale.DSTenable
Instrument.Locale.EndDay
Instrument.Locale.EndMonth
Instrument.Locale.EndOn
Instrument.Locale.EndTime
Instrument.Locale.Language
Instrument.Locale.StartDay
Instrument.Locale.StartMonth
Instrument.Locale.StartOn
Instrument.Locale.StartTime
Instrument.Locale.TimeZone
Instrument.Notes.Note
Instrument.Notes.Note1
Instrument.Notes.Note2
Instrument.Notes.Note3
Instrument.Notes.Note4
Instrument.Notes.Note5
Instrument.Notes.Note6
Instrument.Notes.Note7
Instrument.Notes.Note8
Instrument.Notes.Note9
Instrument.Notes.Note10
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam1
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam1Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam2
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam2Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam3
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam3Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam4
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam4Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam5
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam5Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam6
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam6Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam7
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam7Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam8
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam8Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam9
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam9Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam10
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam10Desc
Instrument.Security.CommsPass
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 85
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Instrument.Security.DefaultConfig
Instrument.Security.EngineerAccess
Instrument.Security.EngineerPassword
Instrument.Security.FeaturePass
Instrument.Security.OperatorPassword
Instrument.Security.PassPhrase
Instrument.Security.SupervisorPassword
1 = set all parameters to factory settings
1 = Engineer access required
Engineer pass phrase (default = 100)
Option enable code (manufacturer supplied)
Operator pass phrase (default = blank)
The password required if ‘CommsPass’ = 1
Supervisor pass phrase (default = blank)
bool
bool
string_t
int32
string_t
string_t
string_t
10c2
10c0
63d3
10c3
6437
444a
6405
4290
4288
25555
4291
25655
17482
25605
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Loop.1.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.Error
Loop.1.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.1.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.1.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.SBrk
Loop.1.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.1.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.1.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.1.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.1.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.1.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.1.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.1.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.1.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.1.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.1.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.1.Diag.WrkOPHi
Loop.1.Diag.WrkOPLo
Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.1.Main.AutoMan
Loop.1.Main.Inhibit
Loop.1.Main.IntHold
Loop.1.Main.TargetSP
Loop.1.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.1.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.1.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.1.OP.Ch1PotBreak
Loop.1.OP.Ch1PotPosition
Loop.1.OP.Ch1TravelTime
Loop.1.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.1.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.1.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.1.OP.Ch2PotBreak
Loop.1.OP.Ch2PotPosition
Loop.1.OP.Ch2TravelTime
Loop.1.OP.CoolType
Derivative Output Contribution
Calculated error
Integral Output Contribution
Loop Break (0 = No break; 1 = Break)
Mode of the Loop (0 = Auto; 1 = Man; 2 = Off)
Proportional Output Contribution
Sensor Break Status ( 0 = No break; 1 = Break)
The Scheduled Cutback High (0 = Auto)
The Scheduled Cutback Low (0 = Auto)
The Scheduled Loop Break Time
The Scheduled Manual Reset
The Scheduled Output High Limit
The Scheduled Output Low Limit
The Scheduled Proportional Band
The Scheduled Relative Cool Gain
The Scheduled Derivative Time (0 = Off)
The Scheduled Integral Time (0 = Off)
Target Output value
Working Output High Limit
Working Output Low Limit
Working Output
Auto/Manual Mode (0 = Auto; 1 = Man)
Control Inhibit (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Integral action inhibit. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Target Setpoint
Working Setpoint
Ch1 On/Off Hysteresis in Engineering Units
Channel 1 Output Value
Ch1 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Ch1 Valve Position
Channel 1 Travel Time
Channel 2 Deadband
Ch2 On/Off Hysteresis in Eng Units
Channel 2 (Cool) Output Value
Ch2 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Ch2 Valve Position
Channel 2 Travel Time
Cooling Algorithm Type
0 = Linear 1 = Oil
2 = Water
3 = Fan
0 = Power Feedforward disabled; 1 = PFF enabled
Feedforward Gain
Feedforward Offset
Feedforward Trim Limit
Feedforward Type (0 = None; 1 = Remote; 2 = SP; 3 = PV)
Feedforward Value
Remote Feed Forward Input
Forced manual output value
Manual Startup Mode (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Manual Output Mode (0 = Track; 1 = Step; 2 = Last MOP)
Manual Output Value
Measured Mains Voltage
Valve Nudge Lower (1 = Lower)
Valve Nudge Raise (1 = Raise)
Output High Limit
Output Low Limit
Potentiometer Break Mode
(0 = Raise; 1 = Lower; 2 = Rest: 3 = Model)
Calibrate Potentiometer
Output Rate Limit Value (0 = Off)
Output Rate Limit Disable (1 = Disabled)
Remote Output High Limit
Remote Output Low Limit
Safe Output Value
The output power in sensor break
Sensor Break Mode (0 = SbrkOP; 1 = Hold)
Enable Output Tracking (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Output Track Value
Current PID Set
Threshold for swapping between set 1 and set 2
Threshold for swapping between set 2 and set 3
Cutback high value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto)
Cutback high value for PID set 2 (0 = Auto)
Cutback high value for PID set 3 (0 = Auto)
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
0212
020d
0211
020f
1691
0210
0213
1695
1696
1698
1697
169a
169b
1692
1699
1694
1693
020e
0215
0214
0204
0201
0205
0206
0202
0203
1672
020b
1679
1678
1674
166f
1673
020c
167b
167a
1675
1683
530
525
529
527
5777
528
531
5781
5782
5784
5783
5786
5787
5778
5785
5780
5779
526
533
532
516
513
517
518
514
515
5746
523
5753
5752
5748
5743
5747
524
5755
5754
5749
5763
0dp
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
0dp
0dp
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
uint8
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
1681
1685
1686
1687
1684
1688
168d
168f
1690
167f
1680
1682
1677
1676
166d
166e
167c
5761
5765
5766
5767
5764
5768
5773
5775
5776
5759
5760
5762
5751
5750
5741
5742
5756
Not applicable
3dp
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
uint8
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
f821
1670
1671
168c
168b
167e
168e
167d
168a
1689
1638
1639
163a
163f
1647
164f
63521
5744
5745
5772
5771
5758
5774
5757
5770
5769
5688
5689
5690
5695
5703
5711
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Same as Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Loop.1.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.1.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.1.OP.ForcedOP
Loop.1.OP.ManStartup
Loop.1.OP.ManualMode
Loop.1.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.1.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.1.OP.NudgeLower
Loop.1.OP.NudgeRaise
Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.1.OP.PotBreakMode
Loop.1.OP.PotCalibrate
Loop.1.OP.Rate
Loop.1.OP.RateDisable
Loop.1.OP.RemOPH
Loop.1.OP.RemOPL
Loop.1.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.1.OP.SbrkOP
Loop.1.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.1.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.1.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.1.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.1.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.1.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh3
Page 86
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow3
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.1.PID.NumSets
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.1.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.1.PID.SchedulerType
Cutback low value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto)
Cutback low value for PID set 2 (0 = Auto)
Cutback low value for PID set 3 (0 = Auto)
Derivative time for PID set 1
Derivative time for PID set 2
Derivative time for PID set 3
Integral time for PID set 1
Integral time for PID set 2
Integral time for PID set 3
Loop break time for PID set 1
Loop break time for PID set 2
Loop break time for PID set 3
Manual reset value for PID set 1
Manual reset value for PID set 2
Manual reset value for PID set 3
Number of PID Sets to be used (max = 3)
Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 1
Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 2
Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 3
Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 1
Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 2
Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 3
Proportional band value for PID set 1
Proportional band value for PID set 2
Proportional band value for PID set 3
Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 1
Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 2
Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 3
Scheduler Remote Input
Scheduler Type
0 = Off
1 = Set
2 = SP
3 = PV
4 = Error 5 = OP
6 = Rem
Edit access to ‘Auto Man’ in Loop display page
0 = Read/Write (R/W) all modes
1 = Editable in all modes except ‘Logged out’
2 = Editable only at Engineer and Supervisor levels
Heat/Ch1 Control Type
0 =Off; 1 = On Off; 2 = PID; 3 = VPU; 4 = VPB
Channel 2 control type (As channel 1, above)
Control Action (0 = Reverse; 1 = Direct)
Derivative Type (0 = PV; 1 = Error)
Loop Name
Loop Type (0 = Single; 1 = Cascade; 2 = Override; 3 = Ratio)
Proportional Band Units
Edit access to ‘SP’ in Loop display page
0 = Read/Write (R/W) all modes
1 = Editable in all modes except ‘Logged out’
2 = Editable only at Engineer and Supervisor levels
Alternate Setpoint
Alternate Setpoint Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable)
Manual Track Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable)
Setpoint Range High Limit
Setpoimt Range Low Limit
Setpoint Rate Limit Value (0 = Rate limit off)
Setpoint Rate Limit Disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint Rate Limit Complete (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Servo to PV Enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Setpoint High Limit
SP Integral Balance (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint Low Limit
Active Setpoint Select (0 = SP1; 1 = SP2)
Enables setpoint tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint Trim value
Setpoint Trim High Limit
Setpoint Trim Low Limit
PV for Programmer to Track
Manual Tracking Value
Autotune Enable (0 = Autotune Off; 1 = on)
Enable Auto-Tune of R2G (0 = Yes; 1 = No)
Autotune High Output Power Limit
Autotune Low Output Power Limit
Autotune stage
0 = Reset
1 = None
2 = Monitor
3 = Current SP 4 = NewSP
5 = ToSp
6 = Max
7 = Min
Time in this Stage of Tune
Tune status
0 = Off
1 = Ready
2 = Complete
3 = Timeout
4 = Ti Lmit
5 = R2g limit
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
1640
1648
1650
163d
1645
164d
163c
1644
164c
1642
164a
1652
1641
1649
1651
1636
1653
1655
1657
1654
1656
1658
163b
1643
164b
163e
1646
164e
1637
1635
5696
5704
5712
5693
5701
5709
5692
5700
5708
5698
5706
5714
5697
5705
5713
5686
5715
5717
5719
5716
5718
5720
5691
5699
5707
5694
5702
5710
5687
5685
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
Not applicable
uint8
16a8
5800
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
1601
1602
1603
1605
5d00
1600
1604
16a7
5633
5634
5635
5637
23808
5632
5636
5799
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
bool
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
1660
1661
1667
1659
165a
1662
1663
020a
166c
165c
165d
165e
166b
165f
165b
1668
1664
1665
1666
1669
166a
1631
1634
1632
1633
0208
5728
5729
5735
5721
5722
5730
5731
522
5740
5724
5725
5726
5739
5727
5723
5736
5732
5733
5734
5737
5738
5681
5684
5682
5683
520
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
float32
uint8
0209
0207
521
519
0dp
Not applicable
Loop.1.Setup.AutoManAccess
Loop.1.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.1.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.1.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.1.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.1.Setup.LoopName
Loop.1.Setup.LoopType
Loop.1.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.1.Setup.SPAccess
Loop.1.SP.AltSP
Loop.1.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.1.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.1.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.1.SP.RangeLow
Loop.1.SP.Rate
Loop.1.SP.RateDisable
Loop.1.SP.RateDone
Loop.1.SP.ServoToPV
Loop.1.SP.SP1
Loop.1.SP.SP2
Loop.1.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPIntBal
Loop.1.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPSelect
Loop.1.SP.SPTrack
Loop.1.SP.SPTrim
Loop.1.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.1.SP.TrackPV
Loop.1.SP.TrackSP
Loop.1.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.1.Tune.AutoTuneR2G
Loop.1.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.1.Tune.Stage
Loop.1.Tune.StageTime
Loop.1.Tune.State
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 87
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Loop.1.Tune.StepSize
The output power step to be applied when performing
a disturbance response autotune
Autotune Algorithm Type
(0 = Cycle; 1 = Single; 2 = Adaptive)
float32
104f
4175
0dp
uint8
1630
5680
Not applicable
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
0292
028d
0291
028f
1791
0290
0293
1795
1796
1798
1797
179a
179b
1792
1799
1794
1793
028e
0295
0294
0284
0281
0285
0286
0280
0282
0283
1772
028b
1779
1778
1774
176f
1773
028c
177b
177a
1775
1783
658
653
657
655
6033
656
659
6037
6038
6040
6039
6042
6043
6034
6041
6036
6035
654
661
660
644
641
645
646
640
642
643
6002
651
6009
6008
6004
5999
6003
652
6011
6010
6005
6019
0dp
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
0dp
0dp
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
uint8
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
1781
1785
1786
1787
1784
1788
178d
178f
1790
177f
1780
1782
1777
1776
176d
176e
177c
6017
6021
6022
6023
6020
6024
6029
6031
6032
6015
6016
6018
6007
6006
5997
5998
6012
Not applicable
3dp
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
1770
1771
178c
178b
177e
178e
177d
178a
1789
1738
1739
173a
173f
1747
174f
1740
1748
1750
6000
6001
6028
6027
6014
6030
6013
6026
6025
5944
5945
5946
5951
5959
5967
5952
5960
5968
1dp
Not applicable
Same as Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut
Same as Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Loop.1.Tune.Type
Loop.2.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.Error
Loop.2.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.2.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.2.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.SBrk
Loop.2.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.2.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.2.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.2.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.2.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.2.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.2.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.2.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.2.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.2.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.2.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.2.Diag.WrkOPHi
Loop.2.Diag.WrkOPLo
Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.2.Main.AutoMan
Loop.2.Main.Inhibit
Loop.2.Main.IntHold
Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.Main.TargetSP
Loop.2.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.2.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.2.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.2.OP.Ch1PotBreak
Loop.2.OP.Ch1PotPosition
Loop.2.OP.Ch1TravelTime
Loop.2.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.2.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.2.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.2.OP.Ch2PotBreak
Loop.2.OP.Ch2PotPosition
Loop.2.OP.Ch2TravelTime
Loop.2.OP.CoolType
Loop.2.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.2.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.2.OP.ForcedOP
Loop.2.OP.ManStartup
Loop.2.OP.ManualMode
Loop.2.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.2.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.2.OP.NudgeLower
Loop.2.OP.NudgeRaise
Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.2.OP.PotBreakMode
Loop.2.OP.Rate
Loop.2.OP.RateDisable
Loop.2.OP.RemOPH
Loop.2.OP.RemOPL
Loop.2.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.2.OP.SbrkOP
Loop.2.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.2.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.2.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.2.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.2.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.2.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh3
Loop.2.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.2.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.2.PID.CutbackLow3
Page 88
Derivative Output Contribution
Calculated Error
Integral Output Contribution
Loop Break (0 = No break; 1 = Break)
Loop mode (0 = Auto; 1 = Man; 2 = Off)
Proportional Output Contribution
Sensor break status (0 = No break; 1 = Break)
The Scheduled Cutback Hi (0 = Auto)
The Scheduled Cutback Lo (0 = Auto)
The Scheduled Loop Break Time
The Scheduled Manual Reset
The Scheduled Output High Limit
The Scheduled Output Low Limit
The Scheduled Proportional Band
The Scheduled Relative Cool Gain
The Scheduled Derivative Time (0 = Off)
The Scheduled Integral Time (0 = Off)
Target Output
Working Output Hi Limit
Working Output Lo Limit
Working Output
Auto/Manual Mode (Mode. 0 = Auto; 1 = Man)
Control Inhibit (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Integral action inhibit. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Process Variable value
Target Setpoint
Working Setpoint
Channel 1 hysteresis in engineering units
Channel 1 Output Value
Ch1 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Ch1 Valve Position
Channel 1 Travel Time
Channel 2 Deadband
Channel 2 hysteresis in engineering units
Channel 2 output value
Channel 2 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Channel 2 Valve Position
Channel 2 Travel Time
Cooling Algorithm Type
0 = Linear; 1 = Oil; 2 = Water; 3 = Fan
0 = Power Feedforward disabled; 1 = PFF enabled
Feedforward Gain
Feedforward Offset
Feedforward Trim Limit
Feedforward Type (0 = None; 1 = Remote; 2 = SP; 3 = PV)
Feedforward Value
Remote Feed Forward Input
Forced manual output value
Manual Startup Mode (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Manual Output Mode (0 = Track; 1 = Step; 2 = Last MOP)
Manual Output Value
Measured Mains Voltage
Valve Nudge Lower (1 = Lower)
Valve Nudge Raise (1 = Raise)
Output High Limit
Output Low Limit
Potentiometer Break Mode
(0 = Raise; 1 = Lower; 2 = Rest; 3 = Model)
Output Rate Limit Value (0 = off)
Output Rate Limit Disable (0 = No, 1 = Yes)
Remote Output High Limit
Remote Output Low Limit
Safe Output Value
The output power under sensor break conditions
Sensor Break Mode (0 = SbrkOP; 1 = Hold)
Enable Output Tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Output Track Value
Current PID set
Threshold for swapping between set 1 and set 2
Threshold for swapping between set 2 and set 3
Cutback high value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto)
Cutback high value for PID set 2 (0 = Auto)
Cutback high value for PID set 3 (0 = Auto)
Cutback low value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto)
Cutback low value for PID set 2 (0 = Auto)
Cutback low value for PID set 3 (0 = Auto)
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime3
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime3
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime3
Loop.2.PID.ManualReset
Loop.2.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.2.PID.ManualReset3
Loop.2.PID.NumSets
Loop.2.PID.OutputHi
Loop.2.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.2.PID.OutputHi3
Loop.2.PID.OutputLo
Loop.2.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.2.PID.OutputLo3
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand3
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain3
Loop.2.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.2.PID.SchedulerType
Derivative time for PID set 1
Derivative time for PID set 2
Derivative time for PID set 3
Integral time for PID set 1
Integral time for PID set 2
Integral time for PID set 3
Loop break time for PID set 1
Loop break time for PID set 2
Loop break time for PID set 3
Manual reset value for PID set 1
Manual reset value for PID set 2
Manual reset value for PID set 3
Number of PID sets to be used (max. 3)
Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 1
Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 2
Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 3
Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 1
Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 2
Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 3
Proportional band value for PID set 1
Proportional band value for PID set 2
Proportional band value for PID set 3
Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 1
Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 2
Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 3
Scheduler Remote Input
Scheduler Type
0 = Off
1 = Set
2 = SP
3 = PV
4 = Error
5 = OP
6 = Rem
Edit access to ‘Auto Man’ in Loop display page
0 = Read/Write (R/W) all modes
1 = Editable in all modes except ‘Logged out’
2 = Editable only at Engineer and Supervisor levels
Channel 1 Control Type
0 =Off; 1 = On Off; 2 = PID; 3 = VPU; 4 = VPB
Channel 2 Control Type (As channel 1, above)
Control Action (0 = Reverse; 1 = Direct)
Derivative Type (0 = PV; 1 = Error)
Loop Name
Loop Type (0 = single; 1 = cascade; 2 = override; 3 = ratio)
Proportional Band Units (0 = Engineering units; 1 = percent)
Edit access to ‘SP’ in Loop display page
0 = Read/Write (R/W) all modes
1 = Editable in all modes except ‘Logged out’
2 = Editable only at Engineer and Supervisor levels
Alternate Setpoint
Select alternative setpoint (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Manual Track Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable)
Setpoint Range High Limit
Setpoint Range Low Limit
Setpoint Rate Limit Value (0 = Rate limit off)
Setpoint Rate Limit Disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint Rate Limit Complete (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Servo to PV Enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Setpoint High Limit
SP Integral Balance (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint Low Limit
Active Setpoint Select (0 = SP1; 1 = SP2)
Enables setpoint tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint Trim
Setpoint Trim High Limit
Setpoint Trim Low Limit
PV for Programmer to Track
Manual Tracking Value
Initiate autotune (0 = Autotune Off; 1 = on)
Enable autotue of R2G (0 = Yes; 1 = No)
Autotune High Output Power Limit
Autotune Low Output Power Limit
Stage of Tune
0 = Reset
1 = None
2 = Monitor
3 = Current SP 4 = NewSP
5 = ToSp
6 = Max
7 = Min
Time in this Stage of Tune
Autotune state
0 = Off
1 = Ready
2 = Complete
3 = Timeout
4 = Ti Lmit
5 = R2g limit
Autotune Algorithm Type
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
173d
1745
174d
173c
1744
174c
1742
174a
1752
1741
1749
1751
1736
1753
1755
1757
1754
1756
1758
173b
1743
174b
173e
1746
174e
1737
1735
5949
5957
5965
5948
5956
5964
5954
5962
5970
5953
5961
5969
5942
5971
5973
5975
5972
5974
5976
5947
5955
5963
5950
5958
5966
5943
5941
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
Not applicable
uint8
17a8
6056
Not applicable
uint8
1701
5889
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
1702
1703
1705
5d10
1700
1704
17a7
5890
5891
5893
23824
5888
5892
6055
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
bool
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
1760
1761
1767
1759
175a
1762
1763
028a
176c
175c
175d
175e
176b
175f
175b
1768
1764
1765
1766
1769
176a
1731
1734
1732
1733
0288
5984
5985
5991
5977
5978
5986
5987
650
5996
5980
5981
5982
5995
5983
5979
5992
5988
5989
5990
5993
5994
5937
5940
5938
5939
648
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Not applicable
float32
uint8
0289
0287
649
647
0dp
Not applicable
uint8
1730
5936
Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.AutoManAccess
Loop.2.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.2.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.2.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.2.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.2.Setup.LoopName
Loop.2.Setup.LoopType
Loop.2.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.2.Setup.SPAccess
Loop.2.SP.AltSP
Loop.2.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.2.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.2.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.2.SP.RangeLow
Loop.2.SP.Rate
Loop.2.SP.RateDisable
Loop.2.SP.RateDone
Loop.2.SP.ServoToPV
Loop.2.SP.SP1
Loop.2.SP.SP2
Loop.2.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPIntBal
Loop.2.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPSelect
Loop.2.SP.SPTrack
Loop.2.SP.SPTrim
Loop.2.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.2.SP.TrackPV
Loop.2.SP.TrackSP
Loop.2.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.2.Tune.AutoTuneR2G
Loop.2.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.2.Tune.Stage
Loop.2.Tune.StageTime
Loop.2.Tune.State
Loop.2.Tune.Type
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 89
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
nano_ui.Access
Access level
0 = Logged out; 1 = Operator; 2 = Supervisor; 3 = Engineer
Password
uint8
2c00
11264 Not applicable
string_t
5400
21504 Not applicable
uint8
1114
4372
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
111b
111c
1119
111a
111e
111d
1111
1115
1118
1120
1117
1116
1155
4379
4380
4377
4378
4382
4381
4369
4373
4376
4384
4375
4374
4437
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
bool
string_t
uint8
6469
45e6
45d4
456f
64c3
464a
4638
1153
4700
1150
25705
17894
17876
17775
25795
17994
17976
4435
18176
4432
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
1151
4433
Not applicable
Network.DemandArchive.Status
Network.DemandArchive.SuspendSchedule
Network.FTPserver.Password
Network.FTPserver.Username
Network.Interface.ClientIdentifier
Network.Interface.Gateway
Network.Interface.IPaddress
Network.Interface.IPType
Network.Interface.MAC
Network.Interface.SubnetMask
Network.Modbus.Address
Network.Modbus.InputTimeout
Network.Modbus.PrefMasterIP
Network.Modbus.SerialMode
Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Network.Modbus.UnitIdEnable
Rate at which to archive history files
0 = None
1 = Every minute
2 = Hourly
3 = Daily
4 = Weekly
5 = Monthly
6 = Automatic
Include header details (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Include headings (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Include process values (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Include messages (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Use Tab delimeter instead of comma (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Date/Time format (0 = Text; 1 = spreadsheet numeric)
Archive destination. 0 = USB; 1 = FTP Server
Archive file format (0 = Binary; 1 = CSV; 2 = both)
Time in days until the USB is full
Amount of unused USB memory remaining (MB)
The size of the USB memory
Media full event strategy (0 = Overwrite; 1 = Stop archiving)
Period of history to be archived
0 = None
1 = last 60 mins 2 = last 24hrs
3 = last 7 days 4 = last 31 days 5 = all history
6 = all history since last archive
Primary FTP server password
Primary FTP server username
Primary FTP server IP address
The destination path for the archive files
Secondary FTP server password
Secondary FTP server username
Secondary FTP server IP address
Triggers an immediate demand archive
Last archive write date/time
FTP Demand acrhive status (Primary server)
0 = Inactive
1 = Connecting 2 = Transferring
3 = Failed
4 = Complete
FTP Demand acrhive status (Secondary server)
See PrimaryStatus (above)
USB Demand archive status
1 = Suspend scheduled archiving
FTP Server account password
FTP Server account username
DHCP option 21 Instrument ID
Default gateway internet protocol address
Internet Protocol (IP) address of this instrument
IP Lookup. 0 = DHCP, 1 = Fixed
Media Access Control (MAC) address of this instrument
Sub network identification mask
Modbus address for this instrument
Modbus Input inactivity timeout (in seconds)
Preferred master IP
Modbus serial port mode
Time parameter comms resolution
Unit ident enable
uint8
bool
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
uint8
string_t
string_t
uint8
int16
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
1152
1154
651d
46ae
4715
4524
4500
1102
4548
4512
1140
1141
469c
1143
1144
1142
4434
4436
25885
18094
18197
17700
17664
4354
17736
17682
4416
4417
18076
4419
4420
4418
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
OR.1.Input1
OR.1.Input2
OR.1.Input3
OR.1.Input4
OR.1.Input5
OR.1.Input6
OR.1.Input7
OR.1.Input8
OR.1.Output
OR.2.Input1
OR.2.Input2
OR.2.Input3
OR.2.Input4
OR.2.Input5
OR.2.Input6
OR.2.Input7
OR.2.Input8
OR.2.Output
OR.3.Input1
OR.3.Input2
OR.3.Input3
OR.3.Input4
OR.3.Input5
OR.3.Input6
OR.3.Input7
OR.3.Input8
OR Block 1, input 1.
OR Block 1, input 2.
OR Block 1, input 3.
OR Block 1, input 4.
OR Block 1, input 5.
OR Block 1, input 6.
OR Block 1, input 7.
OR Block 1, input 8.
OR Block 1, output.
OR Block 2, input 1.
OR Block 2, input 2.
OR Block 2, input 3.
OR Block 2, input 4.
OR Block 2, input 5.
OR Block 2, input 6.
OR Block 2, input 7.
OR Block 2, input 8.
OR Block 1, output.
OR Block 3, input 1.
OR Block 3, input 2.
OR Block 3, input 3.
OR Block 3, input 4.
OR Block 3, input 5.
OR Block 3, input 6.
OR Block 3, input 7.
OR Block 3, input 8.
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
2d00
2d01
2d02
2d03
2d04
2d05
2d06
2d07
2d08
2d10
2d11
2d12
2d13
2d14
2d15
2d16
2d17
2d18
2d20
2d21
2d22
2d23
2d24
2d25
2d26
2d27
11520
11521
11522
11523
11524
11525
11526
11527
11528
11536
11537
11538
11539
11540
11541
11542
11543
11544
11552
11553
11554
11555
11556
11557
11558
11559
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
nano_ui.Password
Network.Archive.ArchiveRate
Network.Archive.CSVHeaders
Network.Archive.CSVHeadings
Network.Archive.CSVIncludeValues
Network.Archive.CSVMessages
Network.Archive.CSVTabDelimiter
Network.Archive.CVSDateFormat
Network.Archive.Destination
Network.Archive.FileFormat
Network.Archive.MediaDuration
Network.Archive.MediaFree
Network.Archive.MediaSize
Network.Archive.OnFull
Network.Archive.Period
Network.Archive.PrimaryPassword
Network.Archive.PrimaryUser
Network.Archive.PServerIPAddress
Network.Archive.RemotePath
Network.Archive.SecondaryPassword
Network.Archive.SecondaryUser
Network.Archive.SServerIPAddress
Network.Archive.Trigger
Network.DemandArchive.LastWrittenOn
Network.DemandArchive.PrimaryStatus
Network.DemandArchive.SecStatus
Page 90
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
Resolution
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
OR.3.Output
OR.4.Input1
OR.4.Input2
OR.4.Input3
OR.4.Input4
OR.4.Input5
OR.4.Input6
OR.4.Input7
OR.4.Input8
OR.4.Output
OR.5.Input1
OR.5.Input2
OR.5.Input3
OR.5.Input4
OR.5.Input5
OR.5.Input6
OR.5.Input7
OR.5.Input8
OR.5.Output
OR.6.Input1
OR.6.Input2
OR.6.Input3
OR.6.Input4
OR.6.Input5
OR.6.Input6
OR.6.Input7
OR.6.Input8
OR.6.Output
OR.7.Input1
OR.7.Input2
OR.7.Input3
OR.7.Input4
OR.7.Input5
OR.7.Input6
OR.7.Input7
OR.7.Input8
OR.7.Output
OR.8.Input1
OR.8.Input2
OR.8.Input3
OR.8.Input4
OR.8.Input5
OR.8.Input6
OR.8.Input7
OR.8.Input8
OR.8.Output
OR.9.Input1
OR.9.Input2
OR.9.Input3
OR.9.Input4
OR.9.Input5
OR.9.Input6
OR.9.Input7
OR.9.Input8
OR.9.Output
OR.10.Input1
OR.10.Input2
OR.10.Input3
OR.10.Input4
OR.10.Input5
OR.10.Input6
OR.10.Input7
OR.10.Input8
OR.10.Output
OR.11.Input1
OR.11.Input2
OR.11.Input3
OR.11.Input4
OR.11.Input5
OR.11.Input6
OR.11.Input7
OR.11.Input8
OR.11.Output
OR.12.Input1
OR.12.Input2
OR.12.Input3
OR.12.Input4
OR.12.Input5
OR.12.Input6
OR.12.Input7
OR.12.Input8
OR.12.Output
OR Block 3, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 4, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 5, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 6, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 7, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 8, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 9, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 10, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 11, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, input 2. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, input 3. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, input 4. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, input 5. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, input 6. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, input 7. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on
OR Block 12, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
2d28
2d30
2d31
2d32
2d33
2d34
2d35
2d36
2d37
2d38
2d40
2d41
2d42
2d43
2d44
2d45
2d46
2d47
2d48
2d50
2d51
2d52
2d53
2d54
2d55
2d56
2d57
2d58
2d60
2d61
2d62
2d63
2d64
2d65
2d66
2d67
2d68
2d70
2d71
2d72
2d73
2d74
2d75
2d76
2d77
2d78
2d80
2d81
2d82
2d83
2d84
2d85
2d86
2d87
2d88
2d90
2d91
2d92
2d93
2d94
2d95
2d96
2d97
2d98
2da0
2da1
2da2
2da3
2da4
2da5
2da6
2da7
2da8
2db0
2db1
2db2
2db3
2db4
2db5
2db6
2db7
2db8
11560
11568
11569
11570
11571
11572
11573
11574
11575
11576
11584
11585
11586
11587
11588
11589
11590
11591
11592
11600
11601
11602
11603
11604
11605
11606
11607
11608
11616
11617
11618
11619
11620
11621
11622
11623
11624
11632
11633
11634
11635
11636
11637
11638
11639
11640
11648
11649
11650
11651
11652
11653
11654
11655
11656
11664
11665
11666
11667
11668
11669
11670
11671
11672
11680
11681
11682
11683
11684
11685
11686
11687
11688
11696
11697
11698
11699
11700
11701
11702
11703
11704
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 91
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
UserLin.1.NumberOfBreakpoints
UserLin.1.X1
UserLin.1.X2
UserLin.1.X3
UserLin.1.X4
UserLin.1.X5
UserLin.1.X6
UserLin.1.X7
UserLin.1.X8
UserLin.1.X9
UserLin.1.X10
UserLin.1.X11
UserLin.1.X12
UserLin.1.X13
UserLin.1.X14
UserLin.1.X15
UserLin.1.X16
UserLin.1.X17
UserLin.1.X18
UserLin.1.X19
UserLin.1.X20
UserLin.1.X21
UserLin.1.X22
UserLin.1.X23
UserLin.1.X24
UserLin.1.X25
UserLin.1.X26
UserLin.1.X27
UserLin.1.X28
UserLin.1.X29
UserLin.1.X30
UserLin.1.X31
UserLin.1.X32
UserLin.1.Y1
UserLin.1.Y2
UserLin.1.Y3
UserLin.1.Y4
UserLin.1.Y5
UserLin.1.Y6
UserLin.1.Y7
UserLin.1.Y8
UserLin.1.Y9
UserLin.1.Y10
UserLin.1.Y11
UserLin.1.Y12
UserLin.1.Y13
UserLin.1.Y14
UserLin.1.Y15
UserLin.1.Y16
UserLin.1.Y17
UserLin.1.Y18
UserLin.1.Y19
UserLin.1.Y20
UserLin.1.Y21
UserLin.1.Y22
UserLin.1.Y23
UserLin.1.Y24
UserLin.1.Y25
UserLin.1.Y26
UserLin.1.Y27
UserLin.1.Y28
UserLin.1.Y29
UserLin.1.Y30
UserLin.1.Y31
UserLin.1.Y32
Number of points in user linearisation table 1
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 1
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 2
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 3
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 4
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 5
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 6
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 7
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 8
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 9
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 10
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 11
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 12
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 13
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 14
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 15
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 16
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 17
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 18
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 19
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 20
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 21
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 22
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 23
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 24
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 25
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 26
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 27
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 28
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 29
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 30
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 31
User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 32
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 1
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 2
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 3
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 4
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 5
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 6
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 7
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 8
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 9
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 10
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 11
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 12
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 13
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 14
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 15
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 16
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 17
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 18
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 19
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 20
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 21
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 22
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 23
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 24
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 25
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 26
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 27
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 28
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 29
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 30
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 31
User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2900
2901
2903
2905
2907
2909
290b
290d
290f
2911
2913
2915
2917
2919
291b
291d
291f
2921
2923
2925
2927
2929
292b
292d
292f
2931
2933
2935
2937
2939
293b
293d
293f
2902
2904
2906
2908
290a
290c
290e
2910
2912
2914
2916
2918
291a
291c
291e
2920
2922
2924
2926
2928
292a
292c
292e
2930
2932
2934
2936
2938
293a
293c
293e
2940
10496
10497
10499
10501
10503
10505
10507
10509
10511
10513
10515
10517
10519
10521
10523
10525
10527
10529
10531
10533
10535
10537
10539
10541
10543
10545
10547
10549
10551
10553
10555
10557
10559
10498
10500
10502
10504
10506
10508
10510
10512
10514
10516
10518
10520
10522
10524
10526
10528
10530
10532
10534
10536
10538
10540
10542
10544
10546
10548
10550
10552
10554
10556
10558
10560
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
UserLin.2.NumberOfBreakpoints
UserLin.2.X1
UserLin.2.X2
UserLin.2.X3
UserLin.2.X4
UserLin.2.X5
UserLin.2.X6
UserLin.2.X7
UserLin.2.X8
UserLin.2.X9
UserLin.2.X10
UserLin.2.X11
UserLin.2.X12
UserLin.2.X13
Number of points in user linearisation table 2
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 1
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 2
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 3
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 4
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 5
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 6
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 7
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 8
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 9
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 10
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 11
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 12
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 13
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
29c0
29c1
29c3
29c5
29c7
29c9
29cb
29cd
29cf
29d1
29d3
29d5
29d7
29d9
10688
10689
10691
10693
10695
10697
10699
10701
10703
10705
10707
10709
10711
10713
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
Page 92
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
UserLin.2.X14
UserLin.2.X15
UserLin.2.X16
UserLin.2.X17
UserLin.2.X18
UserLin.2.X19
UserLin.2.X20
UserLin.2.X21
UserLin.2.X22
UserLin.2.X23
UserLin.2.X24
UserLin.2.X25
UserLin.2.X26
UserLin.2.X27
UserLin.2.X28
UserLin.2.X29
UserLin.2.X30
UserLin.2.X31
UserLin.2.X32
UserLin.2.Y1
UserLin.2.Y2
UserLin.2.Y3
UserLin.2.Y4
UserLin.2.Y5
UserLin.2.Y6
UserLin.2.Y7
UserLin.2.Y8
UserLin.2.Y9
UserLin.2.Y10
UserLin.2.Y11
UserLin.2.Y12
UserLin.2.Y13
UserLin.2.Y14
UserLin.2.Y15
UserLin.2.Y16
UserLin.2.Y17
UserLin.2.Y18
UserLin.2.Y19
UserLin.2.Y20
UserLin.2.Y21
UserLin.2.Y22
UserLin.2.Y23
UserLin.2.Y24
UserLin.2.Y25
UserLin.2.Y26
UserLin.2.Y27
UserLin.2.Y28
UserLin.2.Y29
UserLin.2.Y30
UserLin.2.Y31
UserLin.2.Y32
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 14
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 15
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 16
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 17
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 18
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 19
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 20
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 21
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 22
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 23
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 24
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 25
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 26
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 27
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 28
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 29
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 30
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 31
User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 32
User linearisation table 2 ‘Y’ value 1
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 2
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 3
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 4
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 5
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 6
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 7
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 8
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 9
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 10
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 11
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 12
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 13
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 14
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 15
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 16
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 17
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 18
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 19
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 20
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 21
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 22
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 23
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 24
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 25
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 26
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 27
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 28
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 29
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 30
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 31
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
29db
29dd
29df
29e1
29e3
29e5
29e7
29e9
29eb
29ed
29ef
29f1
29f3
29f5
29f7
29f9
29fb
29fd
29ff
29c2
29c4
29c6
29c8
29ca
29cc
29ce
29d0
29d2
29d4
29d6
29d8
29da
29dc
29de
29e0
29e2
29e4
29e6
29e8
29ea
29ec
29ee
29f0
29f2
29f4
29f6
29f8
29fa
29fc
29fe
2a00
10715
10717
10719
10721
10723
10725
10727
10729
10731
10733
10735
10737
10739
10741
10743
10745
10747
10749
10751
10690
10692
10694
10696
10698
10700
10702
10704
10706
10708
10710
10712
10714
10716
10718
10720
10722
10724
10726
10728
10730
10732
10734
10736
10738
10740
10742
10744
10746
10748
10750
10752
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
UserLin.3.NumberOfBreakpoints
UserLin.3.X1
UserLin.3.X2
UserLin.3.X3
UserLin.3.X4
UserLin.3.X5
UserLin.3.X6
UserLin.3.X7
UserLin.3.X8
UserLin.3.X9
UserLin.3.X10
UserLin.3.X11
UserLin.3.X12
UserLin.3.X13
UserLin.3.X14
UserLin.3.X15
UserLin.3.X16
UserLin.3.X17
UserLin.3.X18
UserLin.3.X19
UserLin.3.X20
UserLin.3.X21
UserLin.3.X22
UserLin.3.X23
UserLin.3.X24
UserLin.3.X25
UserLin.3.X26
UserLin.3.X27
UserLin.3.X28
Number of points in user linearisation table 32
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 1
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 2
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 3
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 4
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 5
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 6
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 7
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 8
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 9
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 10
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 11
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 12
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 13
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 14
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 15
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 16
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 17
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 18
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 19
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 20
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 21
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 22
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 23
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 24
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 25
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 26
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 27
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 28
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2a80
2a81
2a83
2a85
2a87
2a89
2a8b
2a8d
2a8f
2a91
2a93
2a95
2a97
2a99
2a9b
2a9d
2a9f
2aa1
2aa3
2aa5
2aa7
2aa9
2aab
2aad
2aaf
2ab1
2ab3
2ab5
2ab7
10880
10881
10883
10885
10887
10889
10891
10893
10895
10897
10899
10901
10903
10905
10907
10909
10911
10913
10915
10917
10919
10921
10923
10925
10927
10929
10931
10933
10935
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 93
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
UserLin.3.X29
UserLin.3.X30
UserLin.3.X31
UserLin.3.X32
UserLin.3.Y1
UserLin.3.Y2
UserLin.3.Y3
UserLin.3.Y4
UserLin.3.Y5
UserLin.3.Y6
UserLin.3.Y7
UserLin.3.Y8
UserLin.3.Y9
UserLin.3.Y10
UserLin.3.Y11
UserLin.3.Y12
UserLin.3.Y13
UserLin.3.Y14
UserLin.3.Y15
UserLin.3.Y16
UserLin.3.Y17
UserLin.3.Y18
UserLin.3.Y19
UserLin.3.Y20
UserLin.3.Y21
UserLin.3.Y22
UserLin.3.Y23
UserLin.3.Y24
UserLin.3.Y25
UserLin.3.Y26
UserLin.3.Y27
UserLin.3.Y28
UserLin.3.Y29
UserLin.3.Y30
UserLin.3.Y31
UserLin.3.Y32
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 29
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 30
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 31
User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 32
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 1
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 2
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 3
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 4
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 5
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 6
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 7
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 8
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 9
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 10
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 11
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 12
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 13
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 14
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 15
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 16
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 17
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 18
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 19
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 20
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 21
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 22
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 23
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 24
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 25
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 26
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 27
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 28
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 29
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 30
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 31
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2ab9
2abb
2abd
2abf
2a82
2a84
2a86
2a88
2a8a
2a8c
2a8e
2a90
2a92
2a94
2a96
2a98
2a9a
2a9c
2a9e
2aa0
2aa2
2aa4
2aa6
2aa8
2aaa
2aac
2aae
2ab0
2ab2
2ab4
2ab6
2ab8
2aba
2abc
2abe
2ac0
10937
10939
10941
10943
10882
10884
10886
10888
10890
10892
10894
10896
10898
10900
10902
10904
10906
10908
10910
10912
10914
10916
10918
10920
10922
10924
10926
10928
10930
10932
10934
10936
10938
10940
10942
10944
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
UserLin.4.NumberOfBreakpoints
UserLin.4.X1
UserLin.4.X2
UserLin.4.X3
UserLin.4.X4
UserLin.4.X5
UserLin.4.X6
UserLin.4.X7
UserLin.4.X8
UserLin.4.X9
UserLin.4.X10
UserLin.4.X11
UserLin.4.X12
UserLin.4.X13
UserLin.4.X14
UserLin.4.X15
UserLin.4.X16
UserLin.4.X17
UserLin.4.X18
UserLin.4.X19
UserLin.4.X20
UserLin.4.X21
UserLin.4.X22
UserLin.4.X23
UserLin.4.X24
UserLin.4.X25
UserLin.4.X26
UserLin.4.X27
UserLin.4.X28
UserLin.4.X29
UserLin.4.X30
UserLin.4.X31
UserLin.4.X32
UserLin.4.Y1
UserLin.4.Y2
UserLin.4.Y3
UserLin.4.Y4
UserLin.4.Y5
UserLin.4.Y6
UserLin.4.Y7
UserLin.4.Y8
UserLin.4.Y9
UserLin.4.Y10
UserLin.4.Y11
Number of points in user linearisation table 4
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 1
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 2
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 3
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 4
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value v5
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 6
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 7
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 8
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 9
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 10
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 11
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 12
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 13
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 14
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 15
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 16
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 17
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 18
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 19
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 20
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 21
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 22
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 23
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 24
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 25
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 26
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 27
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 28
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 29
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 30
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 31
User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 32
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 1
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 2
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 3
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 4
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 5
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 6
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 7
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 8
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 9
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 10
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 11
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2b40
2b41
2b43
2b45
2b47
2b49
2b4b
2b4d
2b4f
2b51
2b53
2b55
2b57
2b59
2b5b
2b5d
2b5f
2b61
2b63
2b65
2b67
2b69
2b6b
2b6d
2b6f
2b71
2b73
2b75
2b77
2b79
2b7b
2b7d
2b7f
2b42
2b44
2b46
2b48
2b4a
2b4c
2b4e
2b50
2b52
2b54
2b56
11072
11073
11075
11077
11079
11081
11083
11085
11087
11089
11091
11093
11095
11097
11099
11101
11103
11105
11107
11109
11111
11113
11115
11117
11119
11121
11123
11125
11127
11129
11131
11133
11135
11074
11076
11078
11080
11082
11084
11086
11088
11090
11092
11094
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
Page 94
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
UserLin.4.Y12
UserLin.4.Y13
UserLin.4.Y14
UserLin.4.Y15
UserLin.4.Y16
UserLin.4.Y17
UserLin.4.Y18
UserLin.4.Y19
UserLin.4.Y20
UserLin.4.Y21
UserLin.4.Y22
UserLin.4.Y23
UserLin.4.Y24
UserLin.4.Y25
UserLin.4.Y26
UserLin.4.Y27
UserLin.4.Y28
UserLin.4.Y29
UserLin.4.Y30
UserLin.4.Y31
UserLin.4.Y32
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 12
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 13
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 14
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 15
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 16
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 17
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 18
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 19
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 20
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 21
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 22
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 23
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 24
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 25
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 26
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 27
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 28
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 29
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 30
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 31
User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2b58
2b5a
2b5c
2b5e
2b60
2b62
2b64
2b66
2b68
2b6a
2b6c
2b6e
2b70
2b72
2b74
2b76
2b78
2b7a
2b7c
2b7e
2b80
11096
11098
11100
11102
11104
11106
11108
11110
11112
11114
11116
11118
11120
11122
11124
11126
11128
11130
11132
11134
11136
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Status
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
Alarm latch type (0 = None; 1 = Auto; 2 = Manual; 3 = Trigger
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
Indication of the active and acknowledge status
0 = Unacknowledged
1 = None
2 = Active
3 = Inactive
4 = Acknowledged
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarm type
0 = None
1 = Abs High
2 = Abs Low
3 = Dev high
4 = Dev Low
5 = Dev band
6 = ROC rising
7 = ROC falling
10 = Dig Off
11 = Dig High
12 = Dig Low
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
High cut off value for totalisers and counters
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Low cutoff value for totalisers and counters
Modbus input value
Specifies the operation of the virtual channel
0 = Off
2 = Add
3 = Subtract
4 = Multiply
5 = Divide
6 = Group avg
7 = Group min
8 = Group max
9 = Modbus i/p
11 = Copy
20 = Grp min latch 21 = Grp max latch
34 = Chan max 35 = Chan min
36 = Chan avg
43 = Config rev 64 = Off
65 = On
80 = Off
81 = On
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The preset value
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
01c0
1c50
1c4b
1c48
1c4a
1c42
1c49
1c47
1c45
1c44
1c4e
1c41
1c4f
1c46
0122
448
7248
7243
7240
7242
7234
7241
7239
7237
7236
7246
7233
7247
7238
290
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
float32
uint8
1c43
1c40
7235
7232
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
01c1
1c70
1c6b
1c68
1c6a
1c62
1c69
1c67
1c65
1c64
1c6e
1c61
1c6f
1c66
0123
1c63
1c60
4b00
1c23
1c05
1c07
1c08
1c04
1c06
1c01
449
7280
7275
7272
7274
7266
7273
7271
7269
7268
7278
7265
7279
7270
291
7267
7264
19200
7203
7173
7175
7176
7172
7174
7169
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
int32
bool
float32
1c0a
1c0c
1c0d
7178
7180
7181
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.1.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.1.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.1.Main.PresetValue
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 95
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Status
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
0120
1c0b
1c02
1c11
0121
288
7179
7170
7185
289
Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
time_t
bool
uint8
1c09
1c0e
1c00
7177
7182
7168
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.1.Main.UnitsScaler
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
Virtual Channel output status
0 =Good
1 = Off
2 = Over range
3 = Under range 4 = HW error
5 = Ranging
6 = Overflow
7 = bad
8 = HW exceeded
9 = No data
12 = Comms channel error
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Specifies the type of virtual channel
1 = Maths; 2 = Totaliser; 3 = Counter
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
string_t
float32
4b15
1c03
19221 Not applicable
7171 1dpVirtualChannel.1.Trend.ColourConfigures the trend colour for this virtual
channeluint81c207200Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.1.Trend.SpanLow
0 = Red
1 = Blue
2 = Green
3 = Honey
4 = Violet
5 = Russet
6 = Dark blue
7 = Jade
8 = Magenta
9 = Dusky rose 10 = Yellow
11 = Powder blue
12 = Dark red
13 = Avocado
14 = Indigo
15 = Dark brown 16 = Aegean
17 = Cyan
18 = Aubergine 19 = Dark orange 20 = Pale yellow
21 = Hyacinth
22 = Dark green
23 = Sugar pink
24 = Bluebell
25 = Orange
26 = Pink
27 = Buttersilk
28 = Terracotta
29 = Blue babe
30 = Lime
31 = Blue jive
32 = Cucumber
33 = Eurogreen 34 = Wheatgerm 35 = Sea Blue
36 = Ginger
37 = Aqua pool
38 = Pale red
39 = Pale blue
40 = Lilac
41 = Sky blue
42 = Wild moss 43 = Turquoise
44 = Pale green
45 = Coffee
49 = Dark Grey
53 = Light grey
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
float32
float32
1c22
1c21
7202
7201
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.2.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.2.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.2.Main.PresetValue
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
01c2
1cd0
1ccb
1cc8
1cca
1cc2
1cc9
1cc7
1cc5
1cc4
1cce
1cc1
1ccf
1cc6
0126
1cc3
1cc0
01c3
1cf0
1ceb
1ce8
1cea
1ce2
1ce9
1ce7
1ce5
1ce4
1cee
1ce1
1cef
1ce6
0127
1ce3
1ce0
4b1b
1ca3
1c85
1c87
1c88
1c84
1c86
1c81
1c8a
1c8c
1c8d
450
7376
7371
7368
7370
7362
7369
7367
7365
7364
7374
7361
7375
7366
294
7363
7360
451
7408
7403
7400
7402
7394
7401
7399
7397
7396
7406
7393
7407
7398
295
7395
7392
19227
7331
7301
7303
7304
7300
7302
7297
7306
7308
7309
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Type
Page 96
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.2.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.2.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.2.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.2.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.2.Trend.SpanLow
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
0124
1c8b
1c82
1c91
0125
1c89
1c8e
1c80
4b30
1c83
1ca0
1ca2
1ca1
292
7307
7298
7313
293
7305
7310
7296
19248
7299
7328
7330
7329
Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.3.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.3.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.3.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.3.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.3.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.3.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.3.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.3.Trend.SpanLow
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1
Input 2
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01c4
1d50
1d4b
1d48
1d4a
1d42
1d49
1d47
1d45
1d44
1d4e
1d41
1d4f
1d46
012a
1d43
1d40
01c5
1d70
1d6b
1d68
1d6a
1d62
1d69
1d67
1d65
1d64
1d6e
1d61
1d6f
1d66
012b
1d63
1d60
4b36
1d23
1d05
1d07
1d08
1d04
1d06
1d01
1d0a
1d0c
1d0d
0128
1d0b
1d02
1d11
0129
1d09
1d0e
1d00
4b4b
1d03
1d20
1d22
1d21
452
7504
7499
7496
7498
7490
7497
7495
7493
7492
7502
7489
7503
7494
298
7491
7488
453
7536
7531
7528
7530
7522
7529
7527
7525
7524
7534
7521
7535
7526
299
7523
7520
19254
7459
7429
7431
7432
7428
7430
7425
7434
7436
7437
296
7435
7426
7441
297
7433
7438
7424
19275
7427
7456
7458
7457
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Deviation
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
01c6
1dd0
1dcb
1dc8
1dca
1dc2
1dc9
1dc7
454
7632
7627
7624
7626
7618
7625
7623
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 97
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.4.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.4.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.4.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.4.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.4.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.4.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.4.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.4.Trend.SpanLow
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarAlarm dwell timeAlarm dwell
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
Averaging period
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
1dc5
1dc4
1dce
1dc1
1dcf
1dc6
012e
1dc3
1dc0
01c7
1df0
1deb
1de8
1dea
1de2
1de9
1de5
1de4
1dee
1de1
1def
1de6
012f
1de3
1de0
4b51
1da3
1d85
1d87
1d88
1d84
1d86
1d81
1d8a
1d8c
1d8d
012c
1d8b
1d82
1d91
012d
1d89
1d8e
1d80
4b66
1d83
1da0
1da2
1da1
7621
7620
7630
7617
7631
7622
302
7619
7616
455
7664
7659
7656
7658
7650
7657
7653
7652
7662
7649
7663
7654
303
7651
7648
19281
7587
7557
7559
7560
7556
7558
7553
7562
7564
7565
300
7563
7554
7569
301
7561
7566
7552
19302
7555
7584
7586
7585
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Reference
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
01c8
1e50
1e4b
1e48
1e4a
1e42
1e49
1e47
1e45
1e44
1e4e
1e41
1e4f
1e46
0132
1e43
1e40
01c9
1e70
1e6b
1e68
1e6a
1e62
1e69
1e67
1e65
1e64
1e6e
1e61
1e6f
1e66
456
7760
7755
7752
7754
7746
7753
7751
7749
7748
7758
7745
7759
7750
306
7747
7744
457
7792
7787
7784
7786
7778
7785
7783
7781
7780
7790
7777
7791
7782
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Page 98
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.5.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.5.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.5.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.5.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.5.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.5.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.5.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.5.Trend.SpanLow
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
nitiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
0133
1e63
1e60
4b6c
1e23
1e05
1e07
1e08
1e04
1e06
1e01
1e0a
1e0c
1e0d
0130
1e0b
1e02
1e11
0131
1e09
1e0e
1e00
4b81
1e03
1e20
1e22
1e21
307
7779
7776
19308
7715
7685
7687
7688
7684
7686
7681
7690
7692
7693
304
7691
7682
7697
305
7689
7694
7680
19329
7683
7712
7714
7713
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.6.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.6.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.6.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.6.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
ncrement/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
01ca
1ed0
1ecb
1ec8
1eca
1ec2
1ec9
1ec7
1ec5
1ec4
1ece
1ec1
1ecf
1ec6
0136
1ec3
1ec0
01cb
1ef0
1eeb
1ee8
1eea
1ee2
1ee9
1ee7
1ee5
1ee4
1eee
1ee1
1eef
1ee6
0137
1ee3
1ee0
4b87
1ea3
1e85
1e87
1e88
1e84
1e86
1e81
1e8a
1e8c
1e8d
0134
1e8b
1e82
1e91
0135
1e89
1e8e
1e80
458
7888
7883
7880
7882
7874
7881
7879
7877
7876
7886
7873
7887
7878
310
7875
7872
459
7920
7915
7912
7914
7906
7913
7911
7909
7908
7918
7905
7919
7910
311
7907
7904
19335
7843
7813
7815
7816
7812
7814
7809
7818
7820
7821
308
7819
7810
7825
309
7817
7822
7808
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 99
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.6.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.6.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.6.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.6.Trend.SpanLow
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4b9c
1e83
1ea0
1ea2
1ea1
19356
7811
7840
7842
7841
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.7.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.7.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.7.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.7.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.7.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.7.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.7.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.7.Trend.SpanLow
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChanneAlarm trigger thresholdAlarm threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
Averaging period
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01cc
1f50
1f4b
1f48
1f4a
1f42
1f49
1f47
1f45
1f44
1f4e
1f41
1f4f
1f46
013a
1f43
1f40
01cd
1f70
1f6b
1f68
1f6a
1f62
1f69
1f67
1f65
1f64
1f6e
1f61
1f6f
1f66
1f63
1f60
4ba2
1f23
1f05
1f07
1f08
1f04
1f06
1f01
1f0a
1f0c
1f0d
0138
1f0b
1f02
1f11
0139
1f09
1f0e
1f00
4bb7
1f03
1f20
1f22
1f21
460
8016
8011
8008
8010
8002
8009
8007
8005
8004
8014
8001
8015
8006
314
8003
8000
461
8048
8043
8040
8042
8034
8041
8039
8037
8036
8046
8033
8047
8038
8035
8032
19362
7971
7941
7943
7944
7940
7942
7937
7946
7948
7949
312
7947
7938
7953
313
7945
7950
7936
19383
7939
7968
7970
7969
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
01ce
1fd0
1fcb
1fc8
1fca
1fc2
1fc9
1fc7
1fc5
1fc4
1fce
1fc1
1fcf
1fc6
013e
1fc3
1fc0
462
8144
8139
8136
8138
8130
8137
8135
8133
8132
8142
8129
8143
8134
318
8131
8128
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Not applicable
Page 100
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.8.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.8.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.8.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.8.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.8.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.8.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.8.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.8.Trend.SpanLow
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01cf
1ff0
1feb
1fe8
1fea
1fe2
1fe9
1fe7
1fe5
1fe4
1fee
1fe1
1fef
1fe6
013f
1fe3
1fe0
4bbd
1fa3
1f85
1f87
1f88
1f84
1f86
1f81
1f8a
1f8c
1f8d
013c
1f8b
1f82
1f91
013d
1f89
1f8e
1f80
4bd2
1f83
1fa0
1fa2
1fa1
463
8176
8171
8168
8170
8162
8169
8167
8165
8164
8174
8161
8175
8166
319
8163
8160
19389
8099
8069
8071
8072
8068
8070
8065
8074
8076
8077
316
8075
8066
8081
317
8073
8078
8064
19410
8067
8096
8098
8097
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Input2
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’t
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
01d0
2050
204b
2048
204a
2042
2049
2047
2045
2044
204e
2041
204f
2046
0142
2043
2040
01d1
2070
206b
2068
206a
2062
2069
2067
2065
2064
206e
2061
206f
2066
0143
2063
2060
4bd8
2023
2005
2007
2008
464
8272
8267
8264
8266
8258
8265
8263
8261
8260
8270
8257
8271
8262
322
8259
8256
465
8304
8299
8296
8298
8290
8297
8295
8293
8292
8302
8289
8303
8294
323
8291
8288
19416
8227
8197
8199
8200
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 101
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.9.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.9.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.9.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.9.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.9.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.9.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.9.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.9.Trend.SpanLow
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
2004
2006
2001
200a
200c
200d
0140
200b
2002
2011
0141
2009
200e
2000
4bed
2003
2020
2022
2021
8196
8198
8193
8202
8204
8205
320
8203
8194
8209
321
8201
8206
8192
19437
8195
8224
8226
8225
Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.10.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.10.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.10.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.10.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.10.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.10.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.10.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.10.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.10.Trend.SpanLow
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
Averaging period
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01d2
20d0
20cb
20c8
20ca
20c2
20c9
20c7
20c5
20c4
20ce
20c1
20cf
20c6
0146
20c3
20c0
01d3
20f0
20eb
20e8
20ea
20e2
20e9
20e7
20e5
20e4
20ee
20e1
20ef
20e6
0147
20e3
20e0
4bf3
20a3
2085
2087
2088
2084
2086
2081
208a
208c
208d
0144
208b
2082
2091
0145
2089
208e
2080
4c08
2083
20a0
20a2
20a1
466
8400
8395
8392
8394
8386
8393
8391
8389
8388
8398
8385
8399
8390
326
8387
8384
467
8432
8427
8424
8426
8418
8425
8423
8421
8420
8430
8417
8431
8422
327
8419
8416
19443
8355
8325
8327
8328
8324
8326
8321
8330
8332
8333
324
8331
8322
8337
325
8329
8334
8320
19464
8323
8352
8354
8353
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.10.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.10.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.10.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.10.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.10.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.10.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.10.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
bool
bool
01d4
2150
468
8528
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 102
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.11.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.11.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.11.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.11.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.11.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.11.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.11.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.11.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.11.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.11.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.11.Trend.SpanLow
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
214b
2148
214a
2142
2149
2147
2145
2144
214e
2141
214f
2146
014a
2143
2140
01d5
2170
216b
2168
216a
2162
2169
2167
2165
2164
216e
2161
216f
2166
014b
2163
2160
4c0e
2123
2105
2107
2108
2104
2106
2101
210a
210c
210d
0148
210b
2102
2111
0149
2109
210e
2100
4c23
2103
2120
2122
2121
8523
8520
8522
8514
8521
8519
8517
8516
8526
8513
8527
8518
330
8515
8512
469
8560
8555
8552
8554
8546
8553
8551
8549
8548
8558
8545
8559
8550
331
8547
8544
19470
8483
8453
8455
8456
8452
8454
8449
8458
8460
8461
328
8459
8450
8465
329
8457
8462
8448
19491
8451
8480
8482
8481
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.11.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.11.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.11.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.11.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.11.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.11.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.11.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.11.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.ChangeTime
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
01d6
21d0
21cb
21c8
21ca
21c2
21c9
21c7
21c5
21c4
21ce
21c1
21cf
21c6
014e
21c3
21c0
01d7
21f0
21eb
21e8
21ea
21e2
21e9
470
8656
8651
8648
8650
8642
8649
8647
8645
8644
8654
8641
8655
8646
334
8643
8640
471
8688
8683
8680
8682
8674
8681
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 103
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.12.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.12.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.12.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.12.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.12.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.12.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.12.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.12.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.12.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.12.Trend.SpanLow
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptorl
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
21e7
21e5
21e4
21ee
21e1
21ef
21e6
014f
21e3
21e0
4c29
21a3
2185
2187
2188
2184
2186
2181
218a
218c
218d
014c
218b
2182
2191
014d
2189
218e
2180
4c3e
2183
21a0
21a2
21a1
8679
8677
8676
8686
8673
8687
8678
335
8675
8672
19497
8611
8581
8583
8584
8580
8582
8577
8586
8588
8589
332
8587
8578
8593
333
8585
8590
8576
19518
8579
8608
8610
8609
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.12.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.12.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.12.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.12.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.12.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.12.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.12.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.12.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.13.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.13.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.13.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.13.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.13.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The Preset value
The virtual channel output value
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
01d8
2250
224b
2248
224a
2242
2249
2247
2245
2244
224e
2241
224f
2246
0152
2243
2240
01d9
2270
226b
2268
226a
2262
2269
2267
2265
2264
226e
2261
226f
2266
0153
2263
2260
4c44
2223
2205
2207
2208
2204
2206
2201
220a
220c
220d
0150
472
8784
8779
8776
8778
8770
8777
8775
8773
8772
8782
8769
8783
8774
338
8771
8768
473
8816
8811
8808
8810
8802
8809
8807
8805
8804
8814
8801
8815
8806
339
8803
8800
19524
8739
8709
8711
8712
8708
8710
8705
8714
8716
8717
336
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.13.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.13.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.13.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.13.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.13.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.13.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.13.Main.Resolution
Page 104
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.13.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.13.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.13.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.13.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.13.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.13.Trend.SpanLow
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
220b
2202
2211
0151
2209
220e
2200
4c59
2203
2220
2222
2221
8715
8706
8721
337
8713
8718
8704
19545
8707
8736
8738
8737
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.13.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Status
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Active
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Amount
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Block
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Deviation
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Dwell
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Inactive
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Latch
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Reference
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Status
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Threshold
VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Type
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.14.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Input2
VirtualChannel.14.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.14.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.14.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.14.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.14.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.14.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.14.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.14.Trend.SpanLow
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’
Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary)
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm trigger threshold
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01da
22d0
22cb
22c8
22ca
22c2
22c9
22c7
22c5
22c4
22ce
22c1
22cf
22c6
0156
22c3
22c0
01db
22f0
22eb
22e8
22ea
22e2
22e9
22e7
22e5
22e4
22ee
22e1
22ef
22e6
0157
22e3
22e0
4c5f
22a3
2285
2287
2288
2284
2286
2281
228a
228c
228d
0154
228b
2282
2291
0155
2289
228e
2280
4c75
2283
22a0
22a2
22a1
474
8912
8907
8904
8906
8898
8905
8903
8901
8900
8910
8897
8911
8902
342
8899
8896
475
8944
8939
8936
8938
8930
8937
8935
8933
8932
8942
8929
8943
8934
343
8931
8928
19551
8867
8837
8839
8840
8836
8838
8833
8842
8844
8845
340
8843
8834
8849
341
8841
8846
8832
19573
8835
8864
8866
8865
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
Set by VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Same as VirtualChannel.14.Main.PV
Zirconia.aC_CO_O2
Zirconia.BalanceIntegral
Zirconia.CarbonPot
Zirconia.Clean.AbortClean
Zirconia.Clean.CantClean
Zirconia.Clean.CleanAbort
Zirconia.Clean.CleanEnable
Zirconia.Clean.CleanFreq
Carbon Activity Between CO and O2
Balance Integral
Calculated Carbon Potential
1 = Abort cleaning process
1 = can’t clean
1 = Cleaning cycle has been aborted
1 = probe cleaning allowed
Interval between probe cleaning cycles
float32
bool
float32
bool
bool
bool
bool
time_t
289e
289d
2892
28b5
28c3
28c4
28b2
28aa
10398
10397
10386
10421
10435
10436
10418
10410
4dp
Not applicable
Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 105
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)
Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Zirconia.Clean.CleanMaxTemp
Maximum temperature for cleaning. If, during the cleaning
cycle, the probe temperature exceeds this value, cleaning
is aborted.
1 = Clear cleaning related alarms
1 = Initiate a probe cleaning cycle
The time taken to recover from last clean.
0 = max. clean recovery time exceeded last time
1 = Clean cycle aborted because cleaning temperature was
too high.
The time for which the probe is cleaned
1 = Enable probe cleaning valve
Probe output after last clean, in mV
Max. recovery time after a purge
Min. recovery time after a purge
1 = Probe failed to recover following the clean cycle
Time to next cleaning cycle
Interval between cleaning cycles
Initiates a demand cleaning cycle
Cleaning State (0 = Waiting, 1 = Cleaning, 2 = Recovering)
The time for which the probe is cleaned
1 = Enable probe cleaning valve
Calculated Dewpoint
Reference value for hydrogen concentration
Gas ref value when Oxygen Type = Nernst
The CO gas measurement value being used
Reference value for CO concentration
CO concentration from remote source
1 = Allow remote gas measurement
The hydrogen gas measurement value being used
Reference value for hydrogen concentration
Hydrogen concentration from remote source
1 = Allow remote gas measurement
Maximum recovery time after a purge
Min. temp at which the calculation is valid
Minimum recovery time after a purge
Number of decimal places
Calculated Oxygen value
Exponent used by log oxygen calculations
The oxygen equation being used.
0 = Nernst
1=Nernst Bosch
2 = Nernst CP
3= Ferronova
Probe Clean Recovery Warning
Probe input in mV
Probe offset in mV
State of the probe measurement system
0 = Measuring
1 = Cleaning
2 = Clean Recovery
3 = Test impedance
4 = Impedance recovery
5 = Not ready
Status of Probe
0 = OK
1 = mVSbr
2 = TempSbr
3 = MincalcT
Type of Probe
25 = MMI
26 = AACC
27 = Dray
28 = Accu
29 = SSI
30 = MacD
31 = Bosch
32 = Barber
33 = ferono
34 = PrbmV
35 = Eurotherm
Process Factor (Value defined by probe manufacturer)
1 = PV frozen
1 = Enable use of remote gas reference
Remote Gas Reference Value
1 = Soot alarm active
Probe temperature Input
Temperature Offset
Time To Next Clean
Sooting Tolerance
Working Reference Gas Value
float32
28b4
10420 0dp
bool
bool
time_t
28b3
28b0
28b6
10419 Not applicable
10416 Not applicable
10422 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
bool
28c5
10437 Not applicable
time_t
bool
float32
time_t
time_t
bool
time_t
time_t
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
bool
time_t
float32
time_t
uint8
float32
int16
uint8
28ab
28af
28b7
28ad
28ac
28ae
28b1
2889
289a
2899
288a
2898
2893
2882
28a9
28a4
28a1
28a2
28a3
28a8
28a5
28a6
28a7
288c
2886
288b
2881
2894
288d
28a0
10411
10415
10423
10413
10412
10414
10417
10377
10394
10393
10378
10392
10387
10370
10409
10404
10401
10402
10403
10408
10405
10406
10407
10380
10374
10379
10369
10388
10381
10400
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
0dp
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Set by Zirconia.Resolution
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Same as Zirconia.TempInput
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
float32
float32
uint8
2896
2890
2891
289f
10390
10384
10385
10399
Not applicable
0dp
Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Not applicable
uint8
289c
10396 Not applicable
uint8
2880
10368 Not applicable
float32
bool
bool
float32
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
2888
2897
2884
2883
2895
288e
288f
289b
2887
2885
10376
10391
10372
10371
10389
10382
10383
10395
10375
10373
Zirconia.Clean.CleanMsgReset
Zirconia.Clean.CleanProbe
Zirconia.Clean.CleanRecoveryTime
Zirconia.Clean.CleanTemp
Zirconia.Clean.CleanTime
Zirconia.Clean.CleanValve
Zirconia.Clean.LastCleanMv
Zirconia.Clean.MaxRcovTime
Zirconia.Clean.MinRcovTime
Zirconia.Clean.ProbeFault
Zirconia.Clean.Time2Clean
Zirconia.CleanFreq
Zirconia.CleanProbe
Zirconia.CleanState
Zirconia.CleanTime
Zirconia.CleanValve
Zirconia.DewPoint
Zirconia.GasRef
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Ideal
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_InUse
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Local
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Remote
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_RemoteEn
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_InUse
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_Local
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_Remote
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_RemoteEn
Zirconia.MaxRcovTime
Zirconia.MinCalTemp
Zirconia.MinRcovTime
Zirconia.NumResolution
Zirconia.Oxygen
Zirconia.OxygenExp
Zirconia.OxygenType
Zirconia.ProbeFault
Zirconia.ProbeInput
Zirconia.ProbeOffset
Zirconia.ProbeState
Zirconia.ProbeStatus
Zirconia.ProbeType
Zirconia.ProcFactor
Zirconia.PVFrozen
Zirconia.RemGasEn
Zirconia.RemGasRef
Zirconia.SootAlm
Zirconia.TempInput
Zirconia.TempOffset
Zirconia.Time2Clean
Zirconia.Tolerance
Zirconia.WrkGas
Page 106
Resolution
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
0dp
Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
1dp
1dp
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6 iTOOLS
iTools software running on a pc allows quick and easy access to the configuration of the unit. The parameters
used are generally the same as those described in section 4 above, with the addition of various diagnostic
parameters.
iTools also gives the user the ability to create software wiring between function blocks, such wiring being
carried out using the Graphical wiring Editor feature.
A further feature - the display mode ‘Promote List’, is populated using iTools - see section 3.4.7 for details.
In addition to the guidance given here, there are two on-line Help systems available within iTools: Parameter
help and iTools help. Parameter help is accessed by clicking on ‘Help’ in the toolbar (opens the complete
parameter help system), by right-clicking on a parameter and selecting ‘Parameter Help’ from the resulting
context menu, or by clicking on the Help menu and selecting ‘Device Help’. iTools help is accessed by clicking on the Help menu, and selecting ‘Contents’. iTools help is also available in manual format under part
number HA028838, either as a physical manual or as a pdf file.
Figure 6 Help access
6.1 iTools CONNECTION
The following descriptions assume that iTools software has been correctly installed on the pc.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 107
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.1.1 Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications
Note: the following description is based on windows XP. Windows ‘Vista’ is similar.
It is first necessary to determine the IP address of the unit, as described under ‘Network.Interface’ in section
4.2.1.
Once the Ethernet link has been correctly installed, carry out the following actions at the pc:
1. Click on ‘Start’
2. Click on ‘Control Panel’. (If Control Panel opens in ‘Category View’ select ‘Classic View’ instead.)
3. Double-click on ‘iTools’.
4. Click on the TCP/IP tab in the Registry settings configuration.
5. Click on ‘Add...’ The ‘New TCP/IP Port’ dialogue box opens.
6. Type-in a name for the port, then click ‘Add...’ again
7. Type the IP address of the unit in the ‘Edit Host’ box which appears. Click OK.
8. Check the details in the ‘New TCP/IP Port’ box, then click on ‘OK’.
9. Click on ‘OK’ in the ‘Registry settings’ box to confirm the new port.
(Continued)
Figure 6.1.1a Adding a new Ethernet port
Page 108
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.1.1 ETHERNET (TCP/IP) COMMUNICATIONS (Cont.)
To check that the pc can now communicate with the instrument, Click ‘Start’. ‘All Programs’, ‘Accessories’,
‘Command Prompt’
when the Command Prompt box appears, type in: Ping<Space>IP1.IP2.IP3.IP4<Enter> (where IP1 to IP4 are
the IP address of the instrument).
If the Ethernet link to the instrument is operating correctly, the ‘successful’ reply arrives. Otherwise, the
‘failed’ reply arrives, in which case, the Ethernet link, IP address, and pc port details should be verified.
Figure 6.1.1b Command prompt ‘Ping’ screens (typical)
Once the Ethernet link to the instrument has been verified, iTools can be started (or shut down and
restarted), and the Scan toolbar icon used, to ‘find’ the instrument. The scan can be stopped at any
time by clicking on the Scan icon a second time.
See section 6.2 for more details of the scan procedure.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 109
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.1.2 Direct Connection
This section describes how to connect a pc directly to the instrument.
WIRING
Connection is made from the Ethernet connector at the rear of the Instrument to an Ethernet RJ45
connector, usually located at the rear of the pc. The cable can be either a ‘cross-over’ or ‘straight
through’ type.
PC Ethernet
connector.
Once wired correctly, and powered up, it is necessary to enter a suitable IP address and subnet mask into
the Comms configuration of the Driver Module. This information can be found as follows:
1. At the pc, click ‘Start’. ‘All Programs’, ‘Accessories’, ‘Command Prompt’
2. When the Command Prompt box appears, type IPConfig<Enter>
The response is a display, such as that shown below, giving the IP address and Subnet mask of the pc.
Choose an address in the range covered by these two values.
A subnet mask element of 255 means that the equivalent element of the IP address must be used
unchanged. A subnet mask element of 0 means that the equivalent element of the IP address may take
any value between 1 and 255 (0 is not allowed). In the example below, the range of IP addresses which
may be chosen for the Driver Module is 123.123.123.2 to 123.123.123.255. (123.123.123.0 is not
allowed and 123.123.123.1 is the same as the pc’s address, and may therefore not be used.)
Figure 6.1.2b IP Config command
3.
4.
In Network.Interface configuration (section 4.2.1) enter the selected IP address and the subnet mask
(as it appears in the command prompt window) in the relevant parts of the menu.
Check communications by ‘pinging’ as described in section 6.1.1, above.
Once the link to the instrument has been verified, iTools can be started (or shut down and re-started), and
the Scan toolbar icon used, to ‘find’ the instrument. The scan can be stopped at any time by clicking on the
Scan icon a second time.
See section 6.2 for more details of the scan procedure.
Subnet Masks and IP addresses.
Subnet Masks are most readily understood when looked at in binary format.
For example, a mask of 255.255.240.10 can be re-written as:
11111111.11111111.11110000.00001010. In such a case, IP addresses
11111111.11111111.1111xxxx.xxxx1x1x would be recognised (where x can be either a 0 or
Subnet mask
IP addresses
(Binary)
IP addresses
(decimal)
Page 110
255
255
240 to 255
10, 11, 14, 15,
26, 27, 30, 31,
42, 43, 46, 47 etc.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.2 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTS
Clicking on the ‘Scan’ toolbar icon causes a dialogue box (shown below) to appear. This allows the user to
define a search range of addresses.
Notes:
1. The relevant instrument address is that entered in the Network.Modbus configuration item (section 4.2.4, and it can take any value between 1 and 254 inclusive, as long as it is unique to the comms link.
2. The default selection (Scan all device addresses...) will detect any instrument on the serial link,
which has a valid address.
As the search progresses, any instruments detected by the scan appear as thumbnails (faceplates) in the
‘Panel Views’ area, normally located at the bottom of the iTools screen. (options/Panel Views position allows
this area to be moved to the top of the window, or the Close icon
can be used to close it. Once closed it
can be re-opened by clicking on ‘Panel Views’ in the ‘View’ menu.)
Figure 6.2a Scan range enable
Figure 6.2b iTools initial window with one instrument detected
Once the instrument has been detected stop the scan. When the instrument has synchronised, click on the
‘Access’ button to enter configuration mode (a password might be required). Once the editing session is
complete, click on the Access button again to quit configuration mode.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 111
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3 GRAPHICAL WIRING EDITOR
Clicking on the Graphical wiring Editor tool bar icon causes the Graphical wiring window for the current instrument configuration to open.
Figure 6.3 Graphical wiring Editor
The graphical wiring editor allows:
1. Function blocks, notes, comments etc. to be ‘drag and dropped’ into the wiring diagram from the tree
list (left pane).
2. Parameters to be wired to one another by clicking on the output, the clicking on the required input.
3. Viewing and/or editing of parameter values by right-clicking on a function block and selecting ‘Function Block View’.
4. The user to select parameter lists and to switch between parameter and wiring editors.
5. Completed wiring to be downloaded to the instrument (function blocks and wiring items with dashed
outlines are new, or have been edited since the last download).
Page 112
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3.1 Tool bar
Download wiring to instrument
Mouse select. Select normal mouse operation. Mutually exclusive with ‘Mouse Pan’ below.
Mouse Pan. When active, this causes the mouse cursor to change to a hand-shaped icon. Allows the
graphical wiring diagram to be click-dragged within the GWE window aperture.
Zoom. Allows the magnification factor of the wiring diagram to be selected
Pan tool. Whilst left clicked, the cursor appears as a rectangle showing which part of the wiring diagram is currently displayed. Click dragging allows the rectangle to be moved freely about the diagram. The size of the rectangle depends on the zoom setting.
Show/Hide grid. This toggles an alignment grid on and off.
Undo, redo.Allows the user to undo the last action, or, once an undo action has taken place, to undo
the undo. Short cuts are <Ctrl>+<Z. for undo; <Ctrl>+<V, for undo
Cut, Copy, Paste. Normal Cut (copy and delete), Copy (copy without delete) and Paste (insert into)
functions. Shortcuts are: <Ctrl> + <X> for ‘Cut’; <Ctrl> + <C> for copy and <Ctrl> + <V> for Paste.
Copy diagram fragment; Paste diagram fragment. Allows a part of the wiring diagram to be selected,
named and be saved to file. The fragment may then be pasted into any wiring diagram, including the
source diagram
Create compound; Flatten compound. These two icons allow compounds to be created and ‘un created’ (flattened).
6.3.2 Wiring editor operating details
COMPONENT SELECTION
Single wires are shown with boxes at ‘corners’ when selected. When more than one wire is selected, as part
of a group, the wire colour changes to magenta. All other items have a dashed line drawn round them when
selected.
Clicking on a single item selects it. An Item can be added to the selection by holding down the control key
(ctrl) whilst clicking on the item. (A selected item can be deselected in the same way.) If a block is selected,
then all its associated wires are also selected.
Alternatively, the mouse can be click-dragged on the background to create a ‘rubber band’ round the relevant area; anything within this area being selected when the mouse is released.
<Ctrl>+<A> selects all items on the active diagram.
BLOCK EXECUTION ORDER
The order in which the blocks are executed by the instrument depends on the way in which they are wired.
Each block displays its place in its sequence in a coloured block in the bottom left-hand corner (figure
6.3.2a).
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 113
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)
FUNCTION BLOCKS
A Function Block is an algorithm which may be wired to and from other function blocks to make a control
strategy. Each function block has inputs and outputs. Any parameter may be wired from, but only parameters that are alterable in Operator Mode may we wired to. A function block includes any parameters that are
needed to configure or operate the algorithm. The inputs and outputs which are considered to be of most
use are always shown. In most cases all of these need to be wired before the block can perform a useful task.
If a function block is not faded in the tree (left hand pane) it can be dragged onto the diagram. The block
can be dragged around the diagram using the mouse.
A Channel block is shown below as an example. When block type information is alterable (as in this case)
click on the box with the down arrow in it to display a dialogue box allowing the value to be edited.
Down arrow
Position in
execution order
Figure 6.3.2a Function block example
If it is required to wire from a parameter, which is not shown as a recommended output, click on the
‘Click to Select Output’ icon in the bottom right hand corner to display a full list of parameters in the
block (figure 6.3.2c, below). Click on one of these to start a wire.
FUNCTION BLOCK CONTEXT MENU
Right click in the function block to display the context menu.
Function block view Displays a list of parameters associated with the function
block. ‘Hidden’ parameters can be displayed by de-selecting ‘Hide Parameters and Lists when not Relevant in the options menu ‘Parameter availability setting...’ item
Re-Route wires
Redraws all wiring associated with the function block.
Re-route input wires Redraws all input wiring associated with the function block
Re-route output wires Redraws all output wiring associated with the function
block.
Show wiring using tags
Wires are not drawn, but their start and end destinations
are indicated by tags instead. Reduces wire clutter in diagrams where source and destination are widely separated.
Hovering the cursor over the tag shows both its source and
destination parameters and their values
Figure 6.3.2b Function block
context menu
Page 114
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)
FUNCTION BLOCK CONTEXT MENU (Cont.)
Hide unwanted connections
Causes the display to include only wired items.
Cut
Allows one or more selected items to be moved to the Clipboard ready for pasting into
another diagram or compound, or for use in a Watch window, or OPC scope. The original items are greyed out, and function blocks and wires are shown dashed until next
download, after which they are removed from the diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Cut operations carried out since the last download can be ‘undone’ by using the ‘Undo’
tool bar icon, by selecting ‘Undelete’ or by using the short cut <Ctrl>+<Z>.
Copy
Allows one or more selected items to be copied to the Clipboard ready for pasting into
another diagram or compound, or for use in a Watch window, or OPC scope. The original items remain in the current wiring diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>. If items are
pasted to the same diagram from which they were copied, the items will be replicated
with different block instances. Should this result in more instances of a block than are
available, an error display appears showing details of which items couldn’t be copied.
Paste
Copies items from the Clipboard to the current wiring diagram. Short cut =
<Ctrl>+<V>. If items are pasted to the same diagram from which they were copied, the
items will be replicated with different block instances. Should this result in more instances of a block than are available, a Paste error display appears showing details of
those items which could not be copied.
Delete
Marks all selected items for deletion. Such items are shown dashed until next download, after which they are removed from the diagram. Short cut = <Del>.
Undelete
Reverses ‘Delete’ and ‘Cut’ operations carried out on selected item(s) since the last
download.
Bring to Front
Brings selected items to the front of the diagram.
Push to Back
Sends the selected items to the back of the diagram.
Edit Parameter Value...This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an editable parameter. Selecting
this menu item causes a pop-up window to appear, which allows the user to edit the parameter value.
Parameter Properties This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an editable parameter. Selecting
this menu item causes a pop-up window to appear, which allows the user to view the
parameter properties, and also, to view the parameter Help (by clicking on the ‘Help’
tab).
Parameter Help
Produces Parameter Properties and Help information for the selected function block or
parameter, depending on the hover position of the cursor, when the right-click occurs.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 115
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)
WIRES
To make a wire
1. Drag two (or more) blocks onto the diagram from the function block tree.
2. Start a wire by either clicking on a recommended output or
clicking on the ‘Click to Select output’ icon at the bottom
right corner of the block to bring up the connection dialogue, and clicking on the required parameter. Recommended connections are shown with a green plug symbol;
other parameters which are available being shown in yellow. Clicking on the red button causes all parameters to be
shown. To dismiss the connection dialogue either press the
escape key on the keyboard, or click the cross at the bottom
left of the dialogue box.
3. Once the wire has started a dashed wire is drawn from the
output to the current mouse position. To complete the wire
click on the required destination parameter.
4. Wires remain dashed until they are downloaded
Figure 6.3.2c Output selection dialogue box.
Routing wires
When a wire is placed it is auto-routed. The auto routing algorithm searches for a clear path between the
two blocks. A wire can be auto-routed again using the context menus or by double clicking the wire. A wire
segment can be edited manually by click-dragging. If the block to which it is connected is moved, the end
of the wire moves with it, retaining as much of the path as possible.
If a wire is selected by clicking on it, it is drawn with small boxes on its corners.
Wire Context Menu
Right click on a wire to display the wire block context menu:
Force Exec Break When wires form a loop, a break point must be introduced,
where the value written to the block comes from a source which
was last executed during the previous cycle. A break is automatically placed by iTools, and appears in red.
Force Exec Break
allows the user to define where a break must be placed. Surplus
breaks appear in black.
Re-Route wire
Replaces the current wire route with a new route generated from
scratch.
Use Tags
Toggles between wire and tag mode between parameters. Tag
mode is useful for sources and destinations which are widely separated.
Find Start
Goes to the source of the wire.
Find End
Goes to the destination of the wire.
Cut, Copy, Paste
Not used in this context.
Delete
Marks the wire for deletion. The wire is redrawn as a dashed line (or dashed tags) until
next download. Operation can be reversed until after next download.
Undelete
Reverses the effect of the Delete operation up until the next download, after which, Undelete is disabled.
Bring to Front
Brings the wire to the front of the diagram.
Push to Back
Sends the wire to the back of the diagram.
Page 116
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)
Wire Colours
Black
Red
Magenta
Purple
Green
Normal functioning wire
The wire is connected to a non-changeable parameter. Values are rejected by the destination block.
A normal functioning wire is being hovered-over by the mouse cursor.
A red wire is being hovered-over by the mouse cursor.
New Wire (dashed green wire changes to solid black after being downloaded.)
COMMENTS
Comments are added to a wiring diagram by click-dragging them from the Function Block tree onto the diagram. As soon as the mouse is released, a dialogue box opens to allow the comment text to be entered.
Carriage returns are used to control the width of the comment. Once text entry is complete, ‘OK’ causes the
comment to appear on the diagram. There are no restrictions on the size of a comment. Comments are
saved to the instrument along with the diagram layout information.
Comments can be linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the bottom right-hand
corner of the comment box and then clicking again on the required block or wire. A dashed line is drawn to
the top of the block or to the selected wire segment (figure 6.3.2f).
Note: Once the comment has been linked, the Chain icon disappears. It re-appears when the
mouse cursor is hovered over the bottom right-hand corner of the comment box.
Comment Context Menu
Edit
Opens the Comment dialogue box to allow the comment text to
be edited.
Unlink
Deletes the current link from the comment.
Cut
Moves the comment to the Clipboard, ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copy
Copies the comment from the wiring diagram to the Clipboard,
ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>.
Paste
Copies a comment from the Clipboard to the wiring diagram.
Figure 6.3.2e
Short cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Comment context menu
Delete
Marks the comment for deletion at next download.
Undelete
Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken place
since.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 117
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)
MONITORS
Monitor points are added to a wiring diagram by click-dragging them from the Function Block tree onto the
diagram. A monitor shows the current value (updated at the iTools parameter list update rate) of the parameter to which it is linked. By default the name of the parameter is shown. To hide the parameter name either
double click on the monitor box or ‘Show Names’ in the context (right-click) menu can be used to toggle the
parameter name on and off.
Monitors are linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the bottom right-hand corner of the box and then clicking again on the required parameter. A dashed line is drawn to the top of the
block or the selected wire segment.
Note: Once the monitor has been linked, the Chain icon disappears. It re-appears when the mouse
cursor is hovered over the bottom right-hand corner of the monitor box.
Figure 6.3.2f Comment and Monitor appearance
Monitor Context Menu
Show names
Unlink
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Undelete
Bring to Front
Push to Back
Parameter Help
Toggles parameter names on and off in the monitor box.
Deletes the current link from the monitor.
Moves the monitor to the Clipboard, ready to be pasted elsewhere.
Short cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copies the monitor from the wiring diagram to the Clipboard,
ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>.
Copies a monitor from the Clipboard to the wiring diagram. Short
cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Figure 6.3.2g
Marks the monitor for deletion at next download.
Monitor context menu
Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken place
since.
Moves the item to the ‘top’ layer of the diagram.
Moves the item to the ‘bottom’ layer of the diagram.
Shows parameter help for the item.
DOWNLOADING
When the wiring editor is opened the current wiring and diagram layout is read from the instrument. No
changes are made to the instrument function block execution or wiring until the download button is pressed.
Any changes made using the operator interface after the editor is opened are lost on download.
When a block is dropped onto the diagram, instrument parameters are changed to make the parameters for
that block available. If changes are made and the editor is closed without saving them there is a delay while
the editor clears these parameters.
During download, the wiring is written to the instrument which then calculates the block execution order and
starts executing the blocks. The diagram layout including comments and monitors is then written into instrument flash memory along with the current editor settings. When the editor is reopened, the diagram is
shown positioned as it was when it was last downloaded.
Page 118
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)
COLOURS
Items on the diagram are coloured as follows:
Red
Blue
Green
Magenta
Purple
Black
Items which totally or partially obscure other items and items which are totally or partially obscured by other items. Wires that are connected to unalterable or non-available
parameters. Execution breaks.
Non-available parameters in function blocks.
Items added to the diagram since last download are shown as green dashed lines.
All selected items, or any item over which the cursor is hovering.
Red wires when being hovered over by the mouse cursor.
All items added to the diagram before the last download. Redundant execution breaks.
Monitor and comment text.
DIAGRAM CONTEXT MENU
Cut
Active only when the right click occurs within the bounding
rectangle which appears when more than one item is selected. Moves the selection off the diagram to the Clipboard.
Short cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copy
As for ‘Cut’, but the selection is copied, leaving the original
on the diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>.
Paste
Copies the contents of the Clipboard to the diagram. Short
cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Re-Route wires
Reroutes all selected wires. If no wires are selected, all wires
are re-routed.
Align Tops
Aligns the tops of all blocks in the selected area.
Align Lefts
Aligns the left edges of all blocks in the selected area.
Space Evenly
Spaces selected items such that their top left corners are
spaced evenly across the width of the diagram. Click on the
item which is to be the left-most item, then <Ctrl>+<left
click> the remaining items in the order in which they are to
appear.
Delete
Marks the item for deletion at next download time.
Can be ‘Undeleted’ up until download occurs.
Figure 6.3.2h
Undelete
Reverses the action of ‘Delete’ on the selected item.
Diagram
context menu
Select All
Selects all items on the current diagram.
Create Compound Active only when the right click occurs, in the top level diagram, within the bounding
rectangle which appears when more than one item is selected. Creates a new wiring diagram as described in ‘Compound’, below.
Rename
Allows a new name to entered for the current wiring diagram. This name appears in the
relevant tab.
Copy Graphic
Copies the selected items (or the whole diagram if no items are selected) to the clipboard as a Windows metafile, suitable for pasting into a documentation application.
Wiring entering/leaving the selection (if any) are drawn in tag mode.
Save Graphic...
As for ‘Copy Graphic’ above, but saves to a user-specified file location instead of the
clipboard.
Copy Fragment To File...
Copies selected items to a user-named file in folder ‘My iTools Wiring Fragments’ located in ‘My Documents’.
Paste Fragment From File
Allows the user to select a stored fragment for inclusion in the wiring diagram.
Centre
Places the display window at the centre of the selected items. If ‘Select All’ has previously been clicked-on, then the display widow is placed over the centre of the diagram.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 119
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)
COMPOUNDS
Compounds are used to simplify the top level wiring diagram, by allowing the placing of any number of function blocks within one ‘box’, the inputs and outputs of which operate in the same way as those of a normal
function block.
Each time a compound is created, a new tab appears at the top of the wiring diagram. Initially compounds
and their tabs are named ‘Compound 1’, ‘Compound 2’, etc. but they can be renamed by right clicking either
on the compound in the top level diagram, or anywhere within an open Compound, selecting ‘Rename’ and
typing in the required text string (16 characters max.).
Compounds cannot contain other compounds (i.e. they can be created only in the top level diagram).
Compound creation
1. Empty compounds are created within the top level diagram by clicking on the ‘Create Compound’ tool
bar icon.
2. Compounds can also be created by highlighting one or more function blocks
in the top level diagram and then clicking on the ‘Create Compound’ tool bar
Create
Flatten
icon. The highlighted items are moved from the top level diagram into a new compound compound
compound.
3. Compounds are ‘uncreated’ (flattened), by highlighting the relevant item in the top level menu and
then clicking on the ‘Flatten Compound’ tool bar icon. All the items previously contained within the
compound appear on the top level diagram.
4. Wiring between top level and compound parameters is carried out by clicking on the source parameter, then clicking on the compound (or the compound tab) and then clicking on the destination parameter. Wiring from a compound parameter to a top level parameter or from compound to compound is
carried out in similar manner.
5. Unused function blocks can be moved into compounds by dragging from the tree view. Existing blocks
can be dragged from the top level diagram, or from another compound, onto the tab associated with
the destination compound. Blocks are moved out of compounds to the top level diagram or to another
compound in a similar way. Function blocks can also be ‘cut and pasted’.
6. Default compound names (e.g. ‘Compound 2’) are used only once, so that if, for example, Compounds
1 and 2 have been created, and Compound 2 is subsequently deleted, then the next compound to be
created will be named ‘Compound 3’.
7. Top level elements can be click-dragged into compounds.
TOOL TIPS
Hovering the cursor over the block displays ‘tooltips’ describing that part of the block beneath the cursor.
For function block parameters the tooltip shows the parameter description, its OPC name, and, if downloaded, its value. Similar tooltips are shown when hovering over inputs, outputs and over many other items on
the iTools screen.
A Function Block is enabled by dragging the block onto the diagram, wiring it, and finally downloading it to
the instrument. Initially blocks and associated wires are drawn with dashed lines, and when in this state the
parameter list for the block is enabled but the block is not executed by the instrument.
The block is added to the instrument function block execution list when the ‘Download’ icon is operated and
the items are redrawn using solid lines.
If a block which has been downloaded is deleted, it is shown on the diagram in a ghosted form until the
download button is pressed. (This is because it and any wires to/from it are still being executed in the instrument. On download it will be removed from the instrument execution list and the diagram.) A ghosted block
can be ‘undeleted’ as described in ‘Context menu’, above.
When a dashed block is deleted it is removed immediately.
Page 120
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER
This view can be displayed:
1. by clicking on the ‘Parameter Explorer’ toolbar icon,
2. by double clicking on the relevant block in the tree pane or in the graphical wiring editor
3. by selecting ‘Function Block View’ from the Function block context menu in the Graphical wiring Editor.
4. by selecting ‘parameter Explorer from the ‘View’ menu
5. by using the short cut <Alt>+<Enter>
In each case the function block parameters appear in the iTools window in tabular form, such as the example
in figure 6.4a, below.
Figure 6.4a Parameter table example
The figure above shows the default table layout. Columns can be added/deleted from the view using the
‘Columns’ item of the Explorer or context menus (figure 6.4b).
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 121
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER (Cont.)
Explorer menu
Context menu
Figure 6.4b Column enable/disable
6.4.1 Parameter explorer detail
Figure 6.4.1a shows a typical parameter table. This particular parameter has a number of subfolders associated with it, and each of these is represented by a ‘tab’ across the top of the table.
Figure 6.4.1a Typical parameter table
Notes:
1. Parameters in blue are non-editable (Read only). In the example above all the parameters are
read only. Read/write parameters are in black and have a ‘pencil’ symbol in the ‘read/Write access
column at the left edge of the table. A number of such items are shown in figure 6.4.1a, above.
2. Columns. The default explorer window (figure 6.4a) contains the columns ‘Name’, ‘Description’,
‘Address’, ‘Value’, and ‘Wired From’. As can be seen from figure 6.4b, the columns to be displayed can be selected, to a certain extent, using either the ‘Explorer’ menu or the context menu.
‘Limits’ have been enabled for the example above.
3. Hidden Parameters. By default, iTools hides parameters which are considered irrelevant in the
current context. Such hidden parameters can be shown in the table using the ‘Parameter availability’ settings item of the options menu (figure 6.4.1b). Such items are displayed with a shaded
background.
4. The full pathname for the displayed parameter list is shown at the bottom left hand corner of the
window.
Page 122
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.4.1 PARAMETER EXPLORER DETAIL (Cont.)
Figure 6.4.1b Show/Hide parameters
6.4.2 Explorer tools
A number of tool icons appear above the parameter list:
Back to: and Forward to:. The parameter explorer contains a history buffer of up to 10 lists that have
been browsed in the current instance of the window. The ‘Back to: (list name)’ and ‘Forward to: (list
name)’ icons allow easy retracing or repeating of the parameter list view sequence.
If the mouse cursor is hovered over the tool icon, the name of the parameter list which will appear if the
icon is clicked-on appears. Clicking on the arrow head displays a pick list of up to 10 previously visited
lists which the user can select. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<B> for ‘Back to’ or <Ctrl>+<F> for ‘Forward to’.
Go Up a Level, Go Down a Level. For nested parameters, these buttons allow the user to navigate ‘vertically’ between levels. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<U> for ‘Go Up a Level’ or <Ctrl>+<D> for ‘Go Down a
Level’.
Push pin to give the window global scope. Clicking on this icon causes the current parameter list to be
permanently displayed, even if another instrument becomes the ‘current device’.
6.4.3 Context Menu
Copy Parameter
Copies the clicked-on parameter to the clipboard
Parameter properties
Displays parameter properties for the clicked-on parameter
Parameter Help... Displays help information for the clicked-on parameter
Edit/Paste/Delete/Follow Wire
Not used in this application
Columns
Allows the user to enable/disable a number of parameter table columns (figure 6.1.4b).
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 123
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.5 WATCH/RECIPE EDITOR
The watch/recipe editor is opened by clicking on the Watch/Recipe tool icon, by selecting ‘Watch/Recipe’
in the ‘Views’ menu or by using the short cut <Ctrl>+<A>. The window is in two parts: the left part containing
the watch list; the right-hand part containing one or more data sets, initially empty and unnamed.
The Watch/Recipe window is used:
1. To monitor a list of parameters. This list can contain parameters from many different, and otherwise
unrelated parameter lists within the same device. It cannot contain parameters from different devices.
2. To create ‘data sets’ of parameter values which can be selected and downloaded to the device in the
sequence defined in the recipe. The same parameter may be used more than once in a recipe.
Figure 6.5 Watch/Recipe Editor window (with context menu)
6.5.1 Creating a Watch List
After opening the window, parameters can be added to it as described below. The values of the parameters
update in real-time, allowing the user to monitor a number of values simultaneously.
ADDING PARAMETERS TO THE WATCH LIST
1. Parameters can be click-dragged into the watch list from another area of the iTools window (for example, the parameter explorer window, the graphical wiring editor, the browse tree). The parameter is
placed either in an empty row at the bottom of the list, or if it is dragged on top of an already existing
parameter, it is inserted above this parameter, with the remaining parameters being moved down one
place.
2. Parameters can be dragged from one position in the list to another. In such a case, a copy of the
parameter is produced, the source parameter remaining in its original position.
3. Parameters can be copied <Ctrl>+<C> and pasted <Ctrl>+<V> either within the list, or from a source
external to it, for example the parameter browse window or the graphical wiring editor.
4. The ‘Insert item...’ tool button
the ‘Insert Parameter’ item in the Recipe or context menu or the short
cut <Insert> can be used to open a browse window from which a parameter is selected for insertion
above the currently selected parameter.
DATA SET CREATION
Once all the required parameters have been added to the list, select the empty data set by clicking on the
column header. Fill the data set with current values using one of the following methods:
1. Clicking on the ‘Capture current values into a data set’ tool icon
(also known as the ‘Snapshot Values’ tool).
2. Selecting ‘Snapshot Values’ from the Recipe or Context (right-click) menu.
3. Using the short cut <Ctrl>+<A>.
Page 124
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
6.5.1 CREATING A WATCH LIST (Cont.)
DATA SET CREATION (Cont.)
Individual data values can now be edited by typing directly into the grid cells. Data values can be left blank
or cleared, in which case, no values will be written for those parameters at download. Data values are cleared
by deleting all the characters in the cell then either moving to a different cell or typing <Enter>.
The set is called ‘Set 1’ by default, but it can be renamed by either by using the ‘Rename data set...’ item in
the Recipe or context menus, or by using the short cut <Ctrl>+<R>.
New, empty data sets can be added using one of the following:
1. Clicking on the ‘Create a new empty data set’ toolbar icon.
2. Selecting ‘New Data Set’ in the Recipe or context menus
3. Using the short cut <Ctrl>+<W>
Once created, the data sets are edited as described above.
Finally, once all the required data sets have been created, edited and saved, they can be downloaded the
instrument, one at a time, using the Download tool, the ‘Download Values’ item in the Recipe or context
menus, or the short cut <Ctrl>+<D>.
6.5.2 Watch Recipe toolbar icons
Create a new watch/recipe list. Creates a new list by clearing out all parameters and data sets from an
open window. If the current list has not been saved, confirmation is requested. Short cut <ctrl>+<N>
Open an existing watch/recipe file. If the current list or data set has not been saved, confirmation is
requested. A file dialogue box then opens allowing the user to select a file to be opened. Short cut
<ctrl>+<O>
Save the current watch/recipe list. Allows the current set to be saved to a user specified location. Short
cut <ctrl>+<S>.
Download the selected data set to the device. Short cut <ctrl>+<D>
Insert item ahead of selected item. Short cut <Insert>.
Remove recipe parameter. Short cut <ctrl>+<Delete>.
Move selected item. Up arrow moves selected parameter up the list; down arrow move the selected
parameter down the list.
Create a new empty data set. Short cut <ctrl>+<w>.
Delete an empty data set. Short cut <ctrl>+<Delete>
Capture current values into a data set. Fills the selected data set with values. Short cut <ctrl>+<A>.
Clear the selected data set. Removes values from the selected data set. Short cut <Shift>+<Delete>.
Open OPC Scope. Opens a separate utility that allows trending, data logging and Dynamic Data
Exchange (DDE). OPC Scope is an OPC explorer program that can connect to any OPC server that is in
the windows registry.
(OPC is an acronym for ‘OLE for Process Control, where OLE stands for ‘Object Linking and Embedding’.)
6.5.3 Watch/Recipe Context Menu
The Watch/Recipe Context menu items have the same functions as described above for toolbar items.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 125
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
7 USER WIRING
User wiring, created from the instrument front panel, allows parameters to be wired together so that, for example, a counter can be configured to be incremented when an alarm goes active. This can be used as an
alternative to iTools.
This section is presented as two examples that show the general techniques used to create and delete wires
from the instrument user interface.
Notes:
1. These examples refer to Channel Configuration and to Virtual Channel configuration, descriptions of which are to be found in sections 4.4 and 4.5 respectively.
2. The destination parameter field has a small green triangle at the top left corner to indicate that it
has a wire routed to it. 3A/3B (Relay)
7.1 DRIVE RELAY EXAMPLE
To drive the relay whose terminal contacts are 3A/3B, whilst the temperature being measured by Channel 2
exceeds 30°C. For this example Channel 2 alarm 1 and a hysteresis of 4°C will be used.
1.
In channel 2, Alarm 1 page (see note), set the following parameters:
Type: Abs. High
Threshold: 30
Hysteresis: 4
Latch: None
Block: Off
Dwell:00:00:00
Acknowledge: No
Channel.2.Alarm1
Type Abs Hi
Status Active Not ackd
Threshold 30.0
Hysteresis 4.0
Latch None
Block Off
Dwell 00:00:00
Acknowledge No
Active Yes
Inactive No
N.acknowledged Yes
Acknowledgement No
Figure 7.1a Channel 2, Alarm 1 set up
Note: the channel alarm areas of configuration become accessible only once the channel with which
they are associated has been configured with a suitable ‘Type’ (section 4.4.1).
Page 126
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
7.1 DRIVE RELAY EXAMPLE (Cont.)
User Wiring
2.
3.
Highlight the ‘Active’ field, and press and hold the scroll button for
a few seconds, until the top level User Wiring page appears.
The name of the selected parameter appears at the top of the
page. Any already existing wires from this parameter would
appear below the ‘Add new wire’ area.
Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
To Destination
Add new wire
With ‘Add new wire’ highlighted operate the Scroll button.
User Wiring
Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
Instrument
Network
Group
4.
Use the down arrow to highlight ‘Digital I/O’ and press the scroll
button.
Channel
Virtual Channel
Loop
Digital I/O
User Wiring
Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
Loop
Digital I/O
5.
Use the down arrow to highlight ‘3A3B (Relay)’ and press the scroll
button.
1A1B (Dig.IO)
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B (Relay)
LBLC (Dig.In)
User Wiring
Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
6.
Use the down arrow to highlight ‘PV’ and press the scroll button.
Loop
Digital I/O
1A1B (Dig.IO)
Note: If this parameter is already wired-to, the ‘wired’ symbol
appears to the left of the parameter.
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B (Relay)
PV
7.
When the confirmation window appears, use the up or down
arrow to highlight ‘Ok’, then operate the scroll button again.
Create New Wire?
Cancel
Ok
User Wiring
8.
The top level user wiring page reappears, showing the destination
parameter.
Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
To Destination
Add new wire
Digital I/O.3A3B (Relay).PV
7.1.1 Wire removal
At the top level user wiring page, use the up and down arrow buttons
to highlight the wire to be deleted, and operate the scroll key. In the ‘Delete Wire’ confirmation window,
highlight ‘Ok’ and operate the scroll key again. The wire is deleted without further confirmation.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 127
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
7.2 COUNTER EXAMPLE
This example shows how to set up a counter to be incremented each time Channel 1 Alarm 1 becomes active, and reset each time channel 2, alarm 1 is acknowledged. For this example, Virtual Channel 3 will be
configured as the counter, with a preset value of 0.
1. At Channel.1.Main, set:
Type = test
Test Signal = Sine 4 min.
Scale Low = 0
Scale High = 100
2. At Channel.1.Alarm1, set:
Type = Abs Hi
Threshold = 50
Latch = None
3. At Channel.2.Main, set:
Type = Test
Test Signal = Sine 40 min.
Scale Low = 0
Scale High = 100
4. At Channel.2.Alarm 1, set:
Type = Abs Hi
Threshold = 90
Latch = Manual
5. At Virtual Channel.3.Main, set:
Type = Counter
Operation = On
Input = 1
All the other parameters can be left at their defaults.
6. Still at Virtual Channel 3 (Main), use the up/down arrow buttons to highlight ‘Trigger’. Press and hold
the scroll key. The top level User Wiring page appears, this time with a ‘From Source’ tab as well as the
‘To Destination’ tab of example 1. This is because this parameter is read/write, whereas Alarm Active is
read only (i.e. its value may be read but not changed).
7. Use the up (or down) arrow button to select the ‘From Source’ tab.
Virtual Channel.3.Main
Status Good
Resolution 0
Units
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.MainTrigger
To Destination
From Source
Add new wire
Input 1
Preset No
Preset Value 0
Trigger No
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger
To Destination From Source
Add new wire
Figure 7.2a Wiring a counter: part 1
Page 128
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
7.2 COUNTER EXAMPLE (Cont.)
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Operate the Scroll key to highlight ‘Add new wire’, then again to display the top level parameter list.
Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘Channel’ and operate the scroll button.
Operate the scroll button to select ‘1’.
Highlight ‘Alarm 1’ and operate the scroll button.
Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘Active’. Operate the Scroll button again, and create the new
wire.
13. Use the Page button twice to return to the Virtual Channel 3 menu.
User Wiring
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger
To Destination From Source
Add new wire
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger
Channel
1
Main
Trend
Alarm1
Alarm2
2
User Wiring
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger
Instrument
Alarm1
Type
Network
Group
Status
Channel
Threshold
Virtual Channel
Dwell
Loop
Acknowledge
Digital I/O
Active
Create New Wire?
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger
Cancel
Ok
Instrument
Network
Group
Channel
1
2
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger
To Destination From Source
Add new wire
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acktive
3
Figure 7.2b Wiring a counter: part 2
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
Page 129
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
7.2 COUNTER EXAMPLE (Cont.)
14. At Virtual Channel.3.Main, use the down arrow to select ‘Preset’. Press and hold the scroll key. The top
level User Wiring page appears.
15. Use the up (or down) arrow button to select the ‘From Source’ tab, if not already selected.
16. Operate the Scroll key to highlight ‘Add new wire’, then again to display the top level parameter list.
17. Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘Channel’ and operate the scroll button.
18. Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘2’ and operate the scroll button.
19. Highlight ‘Alarm 1’ and operate the scroll button.
20. Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘Acknowledgement’ (not ‘Acknowledge’). Operate the Scroll
button again, and create the new wire.
User Wiring
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset
To Destination From Source
Add new wire
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset
Channel
1
2
Main
Trend
Alarm1
Alarm2
User Wiring
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset
Instrument
Alarm1
Type
Network
Group
Status
Channel
Threshold
Virtual Channel
Inactive
Loop
N.acknowledged
Digital I/O
Acknowledgement
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset
Create New Wire?
Cancel
Ok
Instrument
Network
Group
Channel
1
2
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset
To Destination From Source
Add new wire
Channel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
3
Figure 7.2c Wiring a counter: part 3
Page 130
HA030554
Issue 1 Jul 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Appendix A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
A1 INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE
This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II and pollution degree 2,
defined as follows:
Installation category II
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V mains is 2500V.
Pollution degree 2
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused
by condensation shall be expected.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix A
Page 131
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
A2 RECORDER SPECIFICATION
I/O types
Analogue i/p
Digital i/o
Digital i/p
Relay o/p
Features
Four
One
Two
Two + two with shared common connection
CSV archive format
File transfer protocol (FTP)
Messages
Modbus TCP slave
uhh (history file) archiving
USB port at rear of instrument
User linearissation tables (four)
Two control loops (optional)
Zirconia probe support (optional)
14 Virtual channels (each configurable as maths, totaliser or counter).
Environmental performance
Ambient temperature range
Operating:
Storage:
Humidity range
Operating:
storage:
Protection
Front panel
Behind panel:
Shock/Vibration
Altitude
Atmosphere
Electrical safety
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emissions:
Immunity
0 to 55°C
-20 to +70°C
5% to 85% RH non condensing
5% to 85% RH non condensing
IP65, NEMA4X (International)
IP10 (International)
To BS EN61131-2 (5 to 150 Hz. at 1g; 1 octave per min.)
<2000 metres
Not suitable for use in explosive or corrosive atmospheres.
BS EN61010-1 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2)
BS EN61326 Limit B - Light industrial.
BS EN61326 Industrial
Other approvals and compliance details
General:
PV input
RoHS
Packaging
CE and cUL, EN61010
AMS2750D compliant
EU; China
BS EN61131-2 section 2.1.3.3.
Physical
Panel mounting
Weight
Panel cutout dimension
Depth behind panel
1/4 DIN
0.44kg (15.52 oz.)
92 mm x 92 mm (both -0.0 +0.8) or 3.62 in x 3.62 in (both -0.00 +0.03 in) (figure 2.1)
90 mm (3.54 in) (figure 2.1) excluding wiring.
Operator interface
Display
Controls
3.5” TFT colour display (320 pixels wide x 240 pixels high)
Four navigation pushbuttons below the display screen (Page, Scroll, Lower and Raise)
Power requirements
Supply voltage
Power dissipation
Fuse type
Interrupt protection
100 to 230Vac ± 15% (48 to 62Hz.)
9W
None
Holdup >10ms at 85V RMS supply voltage.
Battery backup
Stored data
Support time (for real-time clock)
Replacement period
Type
Time, date, maths, totaliser and counter values.
Minimum of 1 year with unit unpowered.
Three years typical
poly-carbonmonofluoride / lithium (BR2330) (PA260195)
Ethernet communications
Type:
Protocols:
Cable type
Maximum length
Termination
10/100baseT Ethernet (IEEE802.3)
Modbus TCP/IP slave, FTP, DHCP
Category 5
100metres (110 yards)
RJ45. Green LED illuminated = link connected; Amber LED flashing shows link activity.
USB port
Number of ports
Standard
Transmission speeds
Maximum current
Peripherals supported
Appendix A
Page 132
One at rear of instrument
USB1.1
1.5Mbits/sec (low speed device)
<100mA
Memory stick
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
A2 RECORDER SPECIFICATION (Cont.)
Update/Archive rates
Sample rate (input/output)
Trend update
Archive sample value
Display value
8Hz
8 Hz max
Latest value at archive time
Latest value at display update time.
A3 ANALOGUE INPUT SPECIFICATION
General
Number of anaologue inputs
Input types
Input type mix
Sample rate
Conversion method
Input ranges
Mains rejection (48 to 62Hz)
Series mode:
Common mode:
Common mode voltage
Series mode voltage
Input impedance
Overvoltage protection Continuous:
Transient (<1ms):
Sensor break detection
Type
Recognition time:
Minimum break resistance:
Four
dc Volts, dc mV, dc mA (external shunt required), thermocouple, RTD (2-wire and 3-wire), digital (contact closure)
Freely configurable
8Hz (125ms)
16 bit delta sigma.
See below.
Shunt (mA inputs only)
Values
additional error due to shunt:
1Ω to 1kΩ, mounted externally.
0.1% input
Isolation
Channel to channel:
Channel to common electronics:
Channel to ground:
Dielectric strength
Test:
Channel to channel:
Channel to ground:
300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
BS EN61010, 1 minute type test
2500 Vac
1500 Vac
>95dB
>179dB
250Vac max.
280mV at lowest range; 5V peak-to-peak, at highest range.
See relevant Range specification, below.
± 30V RMS
±200V pk-pk between terminals.
ac sensor break on each input giving quick response with no associated dc errors.
<3 secs.
40mV, 80mV ranges: 5kΩ; other ranges: 12.5kΩ
DC input ranges
Ranges
40mv, 80mV, 2V; 10V (-4.0 to +10V)
40mV Range
Range:
Resolution
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Temperature coefficient:
Input leakage current:
Input resistance:
-40mV to + 40mV
1.9μV (unfiltered)
1.0μV peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
0.003% (best fit straight line)
±4.6μV ±0.053% of measurement at 25°C ambient
±0.2μV/°C ± 13ppm/°C of measurement from 25°C ambient
±14nA
100MΩ
80mV Range
Range:
Resolution
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Temperature coefficient:
Input leakage current:
Input resistance:
-80mV to + 80mV
3.2μV (unfiltered)
3.3μV peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
0.003% (best fit straight line)
±7.5μV ±0.052% of measurement at 25°C ambient
±0.2μV/°C ± 13ppm/°C of measurement from 25°C ambient
±14nA
100MΩ
2V Range
Range:
Resolution
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Temperature coefficient:
Input leakage current:
Input resistance:
±2V
82μV
90μV peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
0.003% (best fit straight line)
±420μV ±0.044% of measurement at 25°C ambient
±125μV/°C ± 13ppm/°C of measurement from 25°C ambient
±14nA
100MΩ
10V Range
Range:
Resolution
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Temperature coefficient:
Input resistance:
-3V to +10V
500μV
550μV peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
0.007% (best fit straight line) for zero source resistance. Add 0.003% for each 10Ω source and lead resistance
±1.5mV ±0.063% measurement at 25°C ambient
±66μV/°C ± 45ppm/°C of measurement from 25°C ambient
62.5kΩ for input voltages > 5.6V. 667kΩ for input ranges < 5.6V.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix A
Page 133
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
A3 ANALOGUE INPUT SPECIFICATION (Cont.)
Resistance input ranges
Temperature scale
Types, ranges and accuracies
Maximum source current
ITS90
See table
200μA
Pt100 figures
Range:
Resolution:
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Temperature coefficient:
Lead resistance
Bulb current:
0 to 400Ω (-200 to +850°C)
0.05°C
0.05°C peak-peak with 1.6s input filter
0.0033% (best fit straight line)
±0.31°C ±0.023% of measurement in °C at 25°C ambient
±0.01°C/°C ±25ppm/°C measurement in °C from 25°C ambient
0 to 22Ω matched lead resistances
200μA nominal
RTD type
Cu10
Cu53
JPT100
Ni100
Ni120
Pt100
Pt100A
Overall range °C
-20 to + 400
-70 to + 200
-220 to + 630
-60 to + 250
-50 to + 170
-200 to + 850
-200 to + 600
Standard
Max. linearisation error
0.02°C
General electric Co.
<0.01°C
RC21-4-1966
0.01°C
JIS C1604:1989
0.01°C
DIN43760:1987
0.01°C
DIN43760:1987
0.01°C
IEC751
Eurotherm Recorders SA
0.09°C
Table A3a RTD type details
Thermocouple data
Temperature scale
CJC
Types:
Remote CJC source
Internal CJC error
Internal CJC rejection ratio:
Upscale/downscale drive
Types, ranges and accuracies
ITS90
Off, internal, external, remote.
An input or maths channel
<1 °C max, with instrument at 25 °C
40:1 from 25°C
High, low or none independently configurable for each channel’s sensor break detection.
See table A3b
T/C type
B
C
D
E
G2
J
K
L
N
R
S
T
U
NiMo/NiCo
Platinel
Mi/NiMo
Pt20%Rh/Pt40%/Rh
Overall range (°C)
0 to + 1820
0 to +
0 to +
-270 to +
0 to +
-210 to +
-270 to +
-200 to +
-270 to +
-50 to +
-50 to +
-270 to +
-200 to +
-50 to +
0 to +
0 to +
0 to +
2300
2495
1000
2315
1200
1372
900
1300
1768
1768
400
600
1410
1370
1406
1888
Standard
Max. linearisation error
0 to 400°C = 1.7°C
IEC584.1
400 to 1820°C = 0.03°C
Hoskins
0.12°C
Hoskins
0.08°C
IEC584.1
0.03°C
Hoskins
0.07°C
IEC584.1
0.02°C
IEC584.1
0.04°C
DIN43710:1985 (to IPTS68)
0.02°C
IEC584.1
0.04°C
IEC584.1
0.04°C
IEC584.1
0.04°C
IEC584.1
0.02°C
DIN43710:1985
0.08°C
ASTM E1751-95
0.06°C
Engelhard
0.02°C
Ipsen
0.14°C
ASTM E1751-95
0.07°C
Table A3b Thermocouple types, ranges and accuracies
Appendix A
Page 134
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
A4 RELAY AND LOGIC I/O SPECIFICATION
OP1 and OP2 logic i/o and relay specification.
Active (current on) current sourcing logic output
Voltage output across terminals
Short circuit output current
+11V min; +13V max.
6mA min. (steady state); 44mA max. (switch current)
Inactive I/O1 (current off) current sourcing logic output
Voltage output across terminals
0V (min.); 300mV (max)
Output source leakage curent into short circuit
0μA (min.); 100μA max
Active (current on) I/O1 contact closure sourcing logic input
Input current
Input at 12V:
inout at 0V:
Open circuit input voltage
Open circuit (inactve) resistance
Closed circuit (active) resistance
0mA (min.); 44mA (max.)
6mA min. (steady state); 44mA max. (switch current)
11V (min.); 13V (max.)
500Ω (min.);  (max.)
0Ω (min.); 150Ω (max.)
Relay contacts
Contact switching power (resistive)
Maximum current through terminals
Max: 2A at 230V RMS ±15%; Min: 100mA @ 12V.
2A
A5 DIGITAL INPUTS
DigInA, DigInB, contact closure logic input
Contact closure
I/O terminal applied voltage range
Short circuit sensing current (source)
Open circuit (inactive) resistance
Closed circuit (active) resistance
Open circuit (inactive) voltage input
Closed circuit (active) voltage input
0V (min.); 25V (max.)
5.5mA (min.); 6.5mA (max.)
600 Ω (min.);  (max.)
0Ω (min.); 300Ω (max.)
5V (min.); 12V (max.)
-2V (min.); +2V (max.)
A6 BLOCKS SUPPORTED
A6.1 FUNCTION BLOCKS
None this software release
A6.2 APPLICATION BLOCKS
Zirconia
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix A
Page 135
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
This page is deliberately left blank
Appendix A
Page 136
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Appendix B CONTROL LOOPS
Note: See section 4.6 for Loop configuration details
B.1 INTRODUCTION
With this recorder, two control loops are available, each loop containing two outputs (Channel 1 and Channel 2) which can be individually configured for PID, On/Off or valve position. For temperature control, channel 1 is normally configured for heating and channel 2 for cooling.
B1.1 EXAMPLE (HEAT ONLY)
Controller (simplified)
Process under control
Control
output
(OP)
Control algorithm
(PID, On/Off, VP)
Error
Power
regulator
Control
loop
Setpoint
(SP)
Temperature
transducer
Heater
PV (Measured
temperature)
Figure B1.1 Control loop example
The measured temperature (process variable, or ‘PV’) is connected to the input of the controller, where it is
compared with the ‘Setpoint’ (SP) (the target temperature). If there is a difference between the PV and the
SP, the controller calculates and outputs a heating demand. This output is applied to the process heating
device, which in turn causes a change in the PV in a direction intended to result in a zero error.
B2 CONTROL LOOP DEFINITIONS
B2.1 AUTO/MANUAL
In manual mode, if ‘On/Off’ control is configured, the output power may be edited by the user but the only
power values allowed are: +100% (heat on; cool off) for positive user entries, 0% (heat off; cool off) for zero
entry or -100%. (heat off; cool on) for negative entries.
In manual mode, for ‘PID’ control the output may be edited between +100% and (if ‘cool’ is configured),
-100%. The actual output value is subject to limiting and output rate limit.
In manual mode, for valve position control, the up and down arrow buttons directly control (nudge) the raise
and lower relay outputs respectively. It is also possible to control the valve by sending nudge commands
over a serial link, or by software wiring from a suitable parameter. A single nudge command moves the valve
by 1 minimum on time; longer nudge demands produce longer valve movements. See section 9 for more
details.
If sensor break occurs while the controller is in automatic the controller outputs the sensor break output
power. In such a case the user can switch to manual control and edit the output power. On returning to
automatic control, the controller checks again for sensor break.
If autotune is enabled while in manual mode, the autotune remains in a reset state such that when the user
puts the controller into automatic control the autotune starts.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 137
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.2 TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP
B2.2.1 On/Off control
This form of control turns heating power on when the process value is below the setpoint, and turns it off
when it is above the setpoint (see also figure B2.6.9a). If cooling is configured, it has its own relay which operates in a similar way. In Direct Acting mode, the behaviour is inverted. On/off is suitable for controlling
switching devices such as relays.
Because of the thermal inertia of the load, a certain amount of oscillation will take place, and this can affect
the quality of the product. For this reason, On/Off control is not recommended for critical applications.
Depending on the nature of the process being controlled, some hysteresis may have to be included to prevent continuous operation or chatter in the controlling device.
B2.2.2 PID Control
Also known as ‘three term control’, this type of control continuously adjusts the output demand, according
to a set of rules, in order to control the process as closely as possible to requirements. PID provides more
stable control than On/Off control but is more complex to set up as the parameters must match the characteristics of the process under control.
The three major parameters are: Proportional band (PB), Integral time (Ti) and Derivative time (Td) and the
output from the controller is the sum of these three terms. This output is a function of the size and duration
of the error value and the rate-of-change of the process value.
It is possible to disable the integral and/or derivative terms and control on proportional only, on proportional plus integral (PI) or proportional plus derivative (PD).
PI control is often used when the PV is noisy and/or subject to rapid variations, where derivative action would
cause the output power to fluctuate wildly.
PROPORTIONAL BAND
The proportional band (PB) delivers an output which is proportional to the size of the error signal. It is the
range over which the output power is continuously adjustable in a linear fashion from 0% to 100% (for a heat
only controller). Below the proportional band the output is full on (100%), above the proportional band the
output is full off (0%) as shown in figure B2.2.2a.
The width of the proportional band determines the magnitude of the response to the error. If PB is too narrow (high gain) the system oscillates; if it is too wide (low gain) control is sluggish. The ideal situation is when
the proportional band is as narrow as possible without causing oscillation.
Figure B2.2.2a also shows the effect of narrowing proportional band to the point of oscillation. A wide proportional band results in straight line control but with an appreciable initial error between setpoint and actual temperature. As the band is narrowed the temperature gets closer to setpoint until eventually, it
becomes unstable.
The proportional band may be set in engineering units or as a percentage of the controller range.
Wide
Proportional
band
Setpoint
Output
Temperature
Narrow
SP
Increasing
proportional band
Temperature
Time
Figure B2.2.2a Proportional band action (reverse acting)
Appendix B
Page 138
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.2 TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP (Cont.)
INTEGRAL TERM
In a proportional only controller, as seen in the previous section, an error must exist between setpoint and
PV in order for the controller to deliver power. Integral is used to achieve zero steady state control error.
The integral term slowly modifies the output level as a result of any error between setpoint and measured
value. If the measured value is below setpoint the integral action gradually increases the output in an attempt to correct the error. If it is above setpoint integral action gradually decreases the output or increases
the cooling power to correct the error.
Figure B2.2.2b shows proportional plus integral action.
Temperature
SP
Time
Figure B2.2.2b: Proportional + Integral Control
The integral term is set in seconds. The longer the integral time constant, the more slowly the output is modified and the more sluggish the response. Too small an integral time causes the process to overshoot, and
perhaps to start oscillating. The integral action may be disabled by setting its value to Off.
DERIVATIVE TERM
Derivative (or rate) action provides a sudden change in output linked to the rate of change in error, whether
this is caused by PV alone (derivative on PV) or by a change in the SP as well (derivative on error selection).
If the measured value falls quickly, derivative provides a large change in output in an attempt to correct the
perturbation before it goes too far. It is most beneficial in recovering from small perturbations.
Temperature
SP
Time
Figure B2.2.2c Proportional + Integral + Derivative Action
Derivative is used to improve the performance of the loop. There are, however, situations where derivative
may be the cause of instability. For example, if the PV is noisy, then derivative can amplify that noise and
cause excessive output changes, in these situations it is often better to disable the derivative and re-tune the
loop.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 139
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.2 TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP (Cont.)
Derivative should not be used to curb overshoot in situations when the output is saturated at Op High or Op
Low for extended periods, such as process start up, since to do so degrades the steady state performance
of the system. Overshoot inhibition is best left to the approach control parameters, High and Low Cutback.
If Derivative is set to Off, no derivative action will be applied.
Derivative can be calculated on change of PV or change of Error. If configured on error, then changes in the
setpoint will be transmitted to the output. For applications such as furnace temperature control, it is common practice to select Derivative on PV to prevent thermal shock caused by a sudden change of output as
a result of a change in setpoint.
B2.2.3 Motorised valve control
Designed specifically for driving motorised valves this type of control can operate in ‘Unbounded’ mode
(VPU) or ‘Bounded’ mode (VPB). Relay outputs are used to drive the valve motor.
VPB
Position
PID
SP
ChN
Manual
input
= Mechanical linkage
Velocity
Time
proportioning
Motor
Valve
VPU
Velocity
PID
Load
SP
Temp
sensor
Pot.
Manual input
(Pulses)
Time
proportioning
= Mechanical linkage
Motor
Valve
Load
Temp
sensor
Figure B2.2.3 VPB and VPU comparison
Unbounded valve positioning (VPU) does not require a position feedback potentiometer in order to operate
because it controls directly the direction and velocity of the movement of the valve in order to minimise the
error between the setpoint (SP) and the process variable (PV). Control is performed by delivering a ‘raise’ or
‘lower’ pulse to control the velocity of the valve in response to the control demand signal.
Bounded VP (VPB) control uses PID (or any other combination of the three terms) to set a required valve position. A feedback potentiometer linked to the valve provides a signal giving actual valve position. This allows the control loop to calculate the difference between required and actual position dynamically, and
adjust control output accordingly. Control is performed by delivering a ‘raise’ or ‘lower’ pulse to adjust the
valve position.
MANUAL MODE
Bounded VP controls in manual mode because the inner positional loop is still running against the potentiometer feedback, so it is operating as a position loop.
In boundless mode the algorithm is a velocity mode positioner. When manual is selected then the up and
down arrow produce +100% or –100% velocity respectively for the duration of the key press.
In boundless mode it is essential that the motor travel time is set accurately in order to allow the integral time
to calculate correctly. Motor travel time is defined as (valve fully open – valve fully closed). This is not necessarily the time printed on the motor since, if mechanical stops have been set on the motor, the travel time
of the valve may be different.
Every time the valve is driven to its end stops the algorithm is reset to 0% or 100% to compensate for any
changes which may occur due to wear in linkages or other mechanical parts.
This technique makes boundless VP look like a positional loop in manual even though it is not. This enables
combinations of heating and cooling e.g. PID heat, VPU cool with manual mode working as expected.
MOTORISED VALVE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
The loop output which has been configured as valve position can be wired to the PV input of one of the pairs
of relays 2A2B/3A3B or 4AC/5AC which has been configured as Type = ’Valve Raise’. Only one relay input
needs to be wired as the other relay of the pair will be automatically set to ‘Valve Lower’. For example, if
Loop 1 Channel 1 output is wired to Relay 2A2B and the ‘Type’ is configured as ‘Valve Raise’ then the Type
for Relay 3A3B will be ‘Valve Lower’.
Appendix B
Page 140
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.3 LOOP PARAMETERS
B2.3.1 Relative cool gain (R2G)
This is the gain of channel 2 control output, relative to the channel 1 control output and is used to compensate for the different quantities of power available to heat and to cool a process. For example, water cooling
applications might require a relative cool gain of 0.25 because cooling is 4 times greater than the heating
process at the operating temperature.
By default, this parameter is set automatically when an Autotune is performed, but setting the Tune menu
parameter ‘AT.R2G’ to ‘No’ causes the R2G value(s) entered in the PID menu to be used instead.
B2.3.2 High and Low cutback
Cutback high ‘CBH’ and Cutback low ‘CBL’ are values that modify the amount of overshoot, or undershoot,
that occurs during large step changes in PV under start-up conditions, for example. They are independent
of the PID terms which means that the PID terms can be set for optimal steady state response and the cutback parameters used to modify any overshoot which may be present.
Cutback involves moving the proportional band towards the cutback point nearest the measured value
whenever the latter is outside the proportional band and the power is saturated (at 0 or 100% for a heat only
controller). The proportional band moves downscale to the lower cutback point and waits for the measured
value to enter it. It then escorts the measured value with full PID control to the setpoint. In some cases it can
cause a ‘dip’ in the measured value as it approaches setpoint as shown in figure B2.3.2 but generally decreases the time to needed to bring the process into operation.
The action described above is reversed for falling temperature.
If cutback is set to Auto the cutback values are automatically configured to 3  PB.
Upper cutback point (CBH)
SP
Temperature
0% output
100% output
Proportional band
Lower cutback point (CBL)
Time
Figure B2.3.2 Cutback operation
Briefly, if PV < CBL then the output is set to its maximum.
If PV > CBH, then the output is set to its minimum
If PV lies within the range CBH-CBL, then PID calculations take control.
B2.3.3 Manual Reset
With PID control, the integral term automatically removes the steady state error from the setpoint. With PD
control, the integral term is set to ‘OFF’, and the measured value will not settle precisely at the setpoint. The
Manual Reset parameter (MR in the PID menu) represents the value of the power output that will be delivered when the error is zero. This value must be set manually in order to remove the steady state error.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 141
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.3 LOOP PARAMETERS (Cont.)
B2.3.4 Integral Hold
If ‘Integral Hold’ (Main menu) is set to ‘Yes’, the integral component of the PID calculation is frozen, that is, it
holds its current value but does not integrate any disturbances in the plant. This is equivalent to switching
into PD control with a manual reset value preconfigured.
Integral Hold may be used, in a situation where the loop is expected to open. For example, it may be necessary to turn heaters off for a short period or to switch into manual at low power. In this case it may be advantageous to wire Integral Hold to a digital input which activates when the heaters are turned off. When the
heaters are switched on again, because the integral is at its previous value, overshoot is minimised.
B2.3.5 Integral De-bump
This feature is not accessible to the user. When changing from Manual to Auto control. the integral component is forced to: (out put value – proportional component – derivative component) (I = OP – P – D).
This ensures that no change occurs in output at the point of switch over, (‘Bumpless Transfer’). The output
power then gradually changes in accordance with the demand from the PID algorithm.
If manual mode = ‘Track’, bumpless transfer also occurs when changing from Auto to Manual control. At the
point of changeover the output power remains the same as the demand in the auto state. The value can then
be altered by the operator. For other modes, the output steps to the ‘Forced output’ or ‘Last MOP’ value as
appropriate. See ‘Manual Mode in the Output menu for further details
B2.3.6 Loop Break
Loop Break attempts to detect loss of restoring action in the control loop by checking the control output, the
process value and its rate of change. Since response times vary from process to process, the Loop Break
Time (LBT) parameter (PID menu) allows a time to be set before a Loop Break Alarm (Loop Break - Diagnostics menu) becomes active. LBT is set automatically in Autotune.
The Loop Break Alarm parameter has no direct effect on control. In order to define behaviour under Loop
Break conditions, the parameter must be wired, for example, to a relay, which can then activate an external
indicator.
It is assumed that, so long as the requested output power is within the output power limits of a control loop,
the loop is operating in linear control and is therefore not in a loop break condition. If, however, the output
becomes saturated then the loop is operating outside its linear control region. If the output remains saturated at the same output power for a significant duration, then this might be symptomatic of a fault in the control loop. The source of the loop break is not important, but the loss of control could be catastrophic.
Since the worst case time constant for a given load is usually known, a worst case time can be calculated over
which the load should have responded with a minimum movement in temperature. By performing this calculation the corresponding rate of approach towards setpoint can be used to determine if the loop can no
longer control at the chosen setpoint. If the PV was drifting away from the setpoint or approaching the setpoint at a rate less than that calculated, the loop break condition would be met.
If an autotune is performed the loop break time is automatically set to Ti  2 for a PI or PID loop, or to 12 
Td for a PD loop. For an On/Off controller loop break detection is based on loop range settings as 0.1 
Span where Span = Range High – Range Low. Therefore, if the output is at limit and the PV has not moved
by 0.1Span in the loop break time a loop break will occur.
If the loop break time is 0 (off) the loop break time can be set manually. Then, if the output is in saturation
and the PV has not moved by >0.5  Pb in the loop break time, a loop break condition is considered to have
occurred.
Appendix B
Page 142
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.3.7 Gain Scheduling
In some processes the tuned PID set may be different at low temperatures from that at high temperatures
particularly in control systems where the response to the cooling power is significantly different from that of
the heating power, or when changes in the process have occurred. Gain scheduling allows a number of PID
sets to be stored and provides automatic transfer of control between one set of PID values and another. For
this instrument, the maximum number of sets is three which means that two boundaries are provided to select when the next PID set is used. When a boundary is exceeded the next PID set is selected bumplessly.
Hysteresis is used to stop scheduling oscillation at the boundaries.
Gain scheduling is basically a look up table which can be selected using different strategies or types. Auto
tune tunes to the active scheduled PID set.
The following Gain Scheduled types are offered using the PID menu parameter ‘Sched Type’:
Set
Required set selected by the user. Alternatively soft wiring may be used to control the
PID set selection
Setpoint
Transfer between sets is dependent on the setpoint value
PV
Transfer between sets is dependent on the process value
Error
Transfer between sets is dependent on the Error value
Output
Transfer between sets is dependent on the output demand value
Remote
A remote parameter may be wired into the scheduler. The PID set is then selected according to the value of this input.
PV (e.g.)
2 - 3 boundary
1 - 2 boundary
Time
Set 1
Set 2
Set 3
Figure B2.3.7 gain scheduling
B2.4 TUNING
B2.4.1 Introduction
The balancing of the P, I and D terms varies from process to process. In a plastics extruder, for example, there
are different responses to a die, casting roll, drive loop, thickness control loop or pressure loop. In order to
achieve the best performance from an extrusion line all loop tuning parameters must be set to their optimum
values.
Tuning involves setting the following PID menu parameters:
Proportional Band (PB), Integral Time (Ti), Derivative Time (Td), Cutback High (CBH), Cutback Low (CBL), and
Relative Cool Gain (R2G - applicable to heat/cool systems only).
The recorder/controller is shipped with these parameters set to default values. In many cases the default
values give adequate, stable, straight-line control, but the response of the loop may not be ideal. Because
process characteristics vary it is often necessary to adjust the control parameters to achieve best control. To
determine the optimum values for any particular loop or process it is necessary to carry out a procedure
called loop tuning. If significant changes are later made to the process which affect the way in which it responds it may be necessary to retune the loop.
Users have the choice of tuning the loop automatically or manually. Both procedures require the loop to
oscillate and both are described in the following sections.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 143
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.2 Loop Response
Ignoring loop oscillation, there are three categories of loop performance viz Under damped, Critically
damped and Over damped:
UNDER DAMPED
In this situation the parameters are set to prevent oscillation but lead to an overshoot of the Process Value
(PV) followed by decaying oscillation until the PV finally settles at the Setpoint. This type of response can
give a minimum time to Setpoint but overshoot may cause problems in certain situations and the loop may
be sensitive to sudden changes in PV, resulting in further decaying oscillations before settling once again.
CRITICALLY DAMPED
This represents an ideal situation where noticeable overshoot to small step changes does not occur and the
process responds to changes in a controlled, non oscillatory manner.
OVER DAMPED
In this situation the loop responds in a controlled but sluggish manner which results in a non-ideal and unnecessarily slow loop performance.
B2.4.3 Initial Settings
In addition to the tuning parameters listed above, there are a number of other parameters which can affect
loop response. These parameters must be correctly configured before tuning is initiated. Parameters include, but are not limited to:SETPOINT
Before tuning, the loop conditions should be set as closely as practicable to the actual conditions which will
be met in normal operation. For example, in a furnace or oven application a representative load should be
included, an extruder should be running, etc.
OUTPUT HIGH, OUTPUT LOW
These Output menu heat and cool limits define the overall maximum and minimum power which may be
delivered to the process by the control loop. For a heat only controller the default values are 0 and 100%.
For a heat/cool controller the defaults are -100 and 100%. Although most processes are designed to work
between these limits there may be instances where it is desirable to limit the power delivered to the process.
REM. OUTPUT LOW, REM. OUTPUT HIGH
If these Remote Output Limits parameters (Output menu) are used, they are effective only if they lie within
the Heat/Cool Limits above.
CH2 DEADBAND
Heat/Cool Dead band If a second (cool) channel is configured, a parameter ‘Ch2 Deadband’ is also available
in the Output menu which sets the distance between the heat and cool proportional bands. The default
value is 0% which means that heating will cease to be available at the same time as cooling becomes available. The dead band may be set to ensure that there is no possibility of the heat and cool channels operating
together, particularly when cycling output stages are installed.
MINIMUM ON TIME
If either or both of the output channels is fitted with a relay or logic output, the parameter ‘Min On Time’ appears in the output menu. This is the cycling time for a time proportioning output and should be set correctly
before tuning is started.
FILTER
The ‘Filter’ parameter is found in the Channel ‘Main’ menu (section 4.4). It is used to remove noise from slowly changing signals so that the underlying trend can be seen more clearly.
Appendix B
Page 144
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.3 INITIAL SETTINGS (Cont.)
RATE
Sets the maximum PID rate-of-change. The output rate limit is active during tuning and can affect the tuning
results. Rate is useful in preventing rapid changes in output from damaging the process or heater elements.
The parameter ‘Rate’ is found in the ‘Setpoint’ menu.
CH1 TRAVEL TIME, CH2 TRAVEL TIME
Valve Travel Time. If the output is a motor valve positioner the ‘Ch1 Travel Time’ and Ch2 Travel Time’ Output menu parameters must be set correctly. The valve travel time is the time taken for the valve to travel from
0% (closed) to 100% (open). This may be different from the motor travel time limits because the mechanical
linkage between the motor and the valve, setting of limit switches etc. can modify behaviour. In a valve positioner application, the channel output is wired to the ‘PV’ input of relay 2A2B or 4AC. Configuring this relay
as Type = Valve Raise causes the associated relay (3A3C or 5AC respectively) to be configured automatically
as Type = Valve Lower, and the action of the relay pair is controlled by the single wire. In a heat/cool application, channel one is the heat valve and channel two is the cool valve.
B2.4.4 Other tuning considerations
If a process includes adjacent interactive zones, each zone should be tuned independently with the adjacent
zones at operating temperature.
It is recommended that a tuning process be initiated when the PV and setpoint are far apart. This allows start
up conditions to be measured and cutback values to be calculated more accurately. Cutback is not set for
‘Tune at setpoint’.
In a programmer/controller tuning should only be attempted during dwell periods and not during ramp
stages. If a programmer/controller is tuned automatically the controller should be placed in ‘Hold’ during
each dwell period whilst autotune is active.
Note: Tuning, carried out in dwell periods which are at different extremes of temperature may give
different results owing to non linearity of heating (or cooling). This may provide a convenient way to
establish values for Gain Scheduling.
If an auto tune is initiated there are two further parameters (High Output’ and ‘Low Output’) which need to
be set. These are found in the ‘Tune’ menu.
High Output
Sets a high output limit to be imposed during autotune. Must be Output High, set in
the Output menu.
Low Output
Sets a low output limit to be imposed during autotune. Must be Output Low, set in
the Output menu.
The above values must be set correctly, otherwise sufficient power to achieve SP might not be available during tuning, and the tune will eventually fail.
B2.4.5 Autotune
Autotune automatically sets the following PID menu parameters:
PB
Proportional band.
Ti
Integral time. If previously set to ‘Off’ Ti will remain off after an autotune.
Td
Derivative time. If previously set to ‘Off’ Td will remain off after an autotune.
CBH, CBL
Cutback high and low values. If either is set to ‘Auto’, it will remain so after auto tuning.
In order that Autotune set the cutback values for the user, a value other than ‘Auto’ must
be selected before Autotune is initiated. Autotune never returns cutback values less
than 1.6  PB
R2G
Calculated only if the unit is configured as Heat/Cool. Following an Autotune, R2G lies
between 0.1 and 10. If the calculated value lies outside this range, a ‘Tune Fail’ alarm is
set.
LBT
Loop break time. Following an autotune, LBT is set to 2  Ti (if Ti was not previously set
‘Off’), or to 12  Td (if Ti was previously set to ‘Off’).
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 145
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.5 AUTOTUNE (Cont.)
Autotune can be performed at any time, but normally it is performed only once, during the initial commissioning of the process. However, if the process under control subsequently becomes unsatisfactory (because its characteristics have changed), it may be necessary to tune again for the new conditions.
The auto tune algorithm reacts in different ways depending on the initial conditions of the plant. The explanations given later in this section are for the following example conditions:1. Initial PV is below the setpoint and, therefore, approaches the setpoint from below for a heat/cool control loop
2. As above, but for a heat only control loop
3. Initial PV is at the same value as the setpoint (tune at setpoint). That is, within 0.3% of the range of the
controller if ‘PB Units’ (Setup menu) is set to ‘Percent’, or +1 engineering unit (1 in 1000) if the ‘PB Units’
is set to ‘Eng’. Range is defined as ‘Range High’ – ‘Range Low’ for process inputs or the thermocouple
or RTD range defined in section A3 for temperature inputs. If the PV is just outside the range stated
above the autotune will attempt a tune from above or below SP.
AUTOTUNE AND SENSOR BREAK
When the controller is autotuning and sensor break occurs, the autotune aborts and the controller outputs
the sensor break output power ‘Sbrk OP’ set up in the Output menu. Autotune must be re-started when the
sensor break condition is no longer present.
AUTOTUNE AND INHIBIT
If the controller is in autotune when ‘Inhibit’ is asserted, the tune goes to the Off state (Stage = Reset). On
inhibit being released the controller will re-start autotune.
AUTOTUNE AND GAIN SCHEDULING
When gain scheduling is enabled and an autotune is performed, the calculated PID values are written into
the PID set that is active, on completion of the tune. Therefore, the user may tune within the boundaries of
a set and the values will be written into the appropriate PID set. However, if the boundaries are close (because the range of the loop is not large), then, at the completion of the tune, it cannot be guaranteed that
the PID values will be written to the correct set particularly if the schedule type is PV or OP. In this situation
the scheduler (‘Sched Type’) should be switched to ‘Set’ and the ‘active set’ chosen manually.
INITIAL CONDITIONS
Configure the parameters described in sections B2.4.3 and B2.4.4, above.
Notes:
1. The ‘tighter’ power limit applies. For example, if ‘High Output’ is set to 80% and ‘Output High’ is
set to 70% then the output power will be limited to 70%
2. The PV must oscillate to some degree to allow the tuner to calculate the relevant values. The limits must be set so as to allow oscillation about the setpoint.
INITIATING THE AUTOTUNE
In the Loop Tune menu for the relevant loop, set ‘TuneEn’ to ‘On’.
Appendix B
Page 146
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.5 AUTOTUNE (Cont.)
EXAMPLE 1: AUTOTUNE FROM BELOW SP (HEAT/COOL)
The point at which Automatic tuning is performed (Tune Control Point) lies just below the setpoint at which
the process is normally expected to operate (Target Setpoint). This ensures that the process is not significantly overheated or overcooled. The Tune Control Point is calculated as follows:Tune Control Point = Initial PV + 0.75(Target Setpoint – Initial PV).
The Initial PV is the PV measured after a 1 minute settling period (point ‘B’ in the figure below).
Examples:
If Target Setpoint = 500°C and Initial PV = 20°C, then the Tune Control Point is 380°C.
If Target Setpoint = 500°C and Initial PV = 400°C, then the Tune Control Point is 475°C.
This is because the overshoot is likely to be less as the process temperature approaches the target setpoint.
Figure B2.4.5a shows the auto tune sequence.
It is not guaranteed that
PV will not exceed SP
Target SP
1st
overshoot
Peak to
peak
PV
True control point
Hysteresis
High output
Zero output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure B2.4.5a Autotune heat/cool process
KEY
A
A to B
Start of Autotune
Heating and Cooling off for one minute allows steady state conditions to be established.
First heat/cool cycle to establish first overshoot. Cutback low (CBL) value calculated
from the overshoot magnitude (unless CBL set to ‘Auto’).
Two cycles of oscillation allow peak-to-peak value and oscillation period to be determined. PID terms are calculated.
Heating is switched on.
Heating (and cooling) are switched off allowing the plant to respond naturally. Measurements over the period F to G are used to calculate the Relative Cool Gain (R2G). Cutback High is calculated from the equation (CBH = CBL  R2G).
Autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control at the target setpoint using
the new control terms.
B to D
B to F
F
G
H
Note: Controlling from above SP is identical except that heating and cooling are reversed.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 147
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.5 AUTOTUNE (Cont.)
EXAMPLE 2: AUTOTUNE FROM BELOW SP (HEAT ONLY)
The sequence of operation for a heat only loop is the same as that described above for a heat/cool loop,
except that the sequence ends at ‘F’ since there is no need to calculate ‘R2G’ (R2G is set to 1.0 for heat only
processes). At ‘F’ autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control using the new control terms.
For a tune from below setpoint ‘CBL’ is calculated on the basis of the size of the overshoot (assuming it was
not set to Auto in the initial conditions). CBH is then set to the same value as CBL.
Note: Autotune can also occur when the initial PV is above SP. The sequence is the same as tuning
from below setpoint except that the sequence starts with natural cooling applied at ‘B’ after the first
one minute settling time. In this case CBH is calculated and CBL is then set to the same value as
CBH.
Target SP
1st
overshoot
Peak to
peak
PV
True control point
Hysteresis
High output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure B2.4.5b Autotune heat only process (from below SP)
A
A to B
B to D
D to F
F
Appendix B
Page 148
Start of Autotune
Heating off for one minute to allow steady state conditions to be established.
First heat cycle to establish first overshoot. Cutback low (CBL) value calculated from the
overshoot magnitude (unless CBL set to ‘Auto’).
Calculate PID terms.
Autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control at the target setpoint using
the new control terms.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.5 AUTOTUNE (Cont.)
EXAMPLE 3: AUTOTUNE AT SP (HEAT /COOL)
It is sometimes necessary to tune at the actual setpoint being used as shown below.
For a tune at setpoint, autotune does not calculate cutback since there was no initial start up response to the
application of heating or cooling. Cutback values of less than 1.6  PB will not be returned.
Peak to
peak
Hysteresis
Target SP
PV
High output
Zero output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure B2.4.5c Autotune at setpoint
A
A to B
C to G
G to H
I
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Start of Autotune. A test is done at the start of autotune to establish conditions for a
tune at setpoint. Conditions are that SP must remain within 0.3% of the range of the
controller if ‘PB Units’ (Setup menu) is set to ‘Percent’, or +1 engineering unit (1 in 1000)
if the ‘PB Units’ is set to ‘Eng’. Range is defined as ‘Range High’ – ‘Range Low’ for process inputs or the thermocouple or RTD range defined in section A3 for temperature inputs.
The output is frozen at he current value for one minute, and the conditions are continuously monitored during this period. If the conditions specified above are met, then an
autotune at setpoint is initiated at ‘B’. If PV drifts outside the condition limits at any time
during this period, tuning at SP is abandoned, and tuning resumes as a ‘tune from
above’ or ‘tune from below’, depending on the direction of drift. Since the loop is already at setpoint, a Tune Control setpoint is not calculated; the loop is forced to oscillate about the Target SP.
The process is forced to oscillate by switching the output between the output limits.
The oscillation period and the peak-to-peak response are determined, and the PID
terms calculated.
An extra heating stage is initiated, then all heating and cooling are switched off at H,
allowing the plant to respond naturally. The relative cool gain (R2G) is calculated.
Autotune is switched off and the process is allowed to control at the target setpoint using the newly calculated terms.
Appendix B
Page 149
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.5 AUTOTUNE (Cont.)
AT.R2G
Some load types and process conditions can cause autotune to set an incorrect value for R2G resulting in an
instability in the system after an autotune has completed, In such circumstances, the value of R2G should be
checked, and if it is low (approaching 0.1) a manual entry should be made as follows:
1. In the Tune menu, set the AT.R2G parameter to ‘No’.
2. In the PID menu, enter the new R2G value (calculated as described below)
3. In the Tune menu, enter a value for Low Output, calculated from: Low Output = -High Output x R2G
4. In the Tune menu, set ‘TuneEn’ On.
R2G CALCULATION
1. In the Main menu, set the controller to Manual mode
2. Turn heating on (limited by the value of ‘Output High’ in the Output menu) and measure the heating
rate (‘H’ °C/minute).
3. Allow the process to heat to, say, 10% above the setpoint value then turn the heating off and allow the
temperature to settle.
4. Turn cooling power on (limited by the value of ‘Output Low’ in the Output menu) and measure the
cooling rate (‘C’ °C/minute) whilst allowing the temperature to fall below the setpoint value.
5. Calculate the value of R2G from the equation R2G = (H/C) x (Output Low/output High)
Example:
For a measured heating rate (H) of 10°C per min and a measured cooling rate (C) of 25° per minute and with,
Output High = 80% and Output Low = 40%, then R2G = (10/25) x (40/80) = 0.4 x 0.5 = 0.2.
OP Power
Heating on
ΔHTemp
ΔHtime
SP
ΔCTemp
Output Lo
HTemp
------------------------ = HeatingRate
Htime
Cooling on
ΔCtime
Temperature
CTemp
----------------------- = CoolingRate
Ctime
Output Hi
PV
Time
Figure 2.4.5d R2G calculation
Note: This is not a very accurate method as it does not take natural cooling into account. Its main
advantage is that it is simple to achieve.
Appendix B
Page 150
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.5 AUTOTUNE (Cont.)
FAILURE MODES
The conditions for performing an autotune are monitored by the Tune menu parameter ‘State’. If autotune
is not successful error conditions are read by this parameter as follows:
Timeout
Set if any one stage is not completed within an hour. Possible causes are the loop being
open circuit, or not responding to the controller demands. Some heavily lagged systems may produce a timeout if the cooling rate is very slow.
TI Limit
This is set if Autotune calculates a value for the integral term which is greater than the
maximum allowable (99999 seconds). This indicates that the loop is not responding or
that the tune is taking too long.
R2G Limit
Error occurs if the calculate value of R2G is outside the range 0.1 to 10.0. R2G limit can
occur if the gain difference between heating and cooling is too large, or if the controller
is configured for heat/cool, but the heating and/or cooling device is turned off or not
working correctly.
B2.4.6 Manual tuning
If, for any reason, automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results the controller can be tuned manually. There
are a number of standard methods for manual tuning, the Zeigler-Nichols method being described here:
1. Adjust the setpoint to its normal running conditions (assumed to be above the PV so that ‘heat only’ is
applied.
2. Set the integral and derivative times (Ti and Td) to ‘Off’
3. Set High and Low cutback (CBH and CBL) to ‘Auto’.
4. If the PV is stable (not necessarily at the setpoint), reduce the proportional band (PB) such that the PV
just starts to oscillate, leaving time between adjustments to allow the loop to stabilise. Make a note of
the PB at this point (PB′), and also note the oscillation period (‘T’).
If the PV is already oscillating measure the oscillation period (‘T’) and then gradually increase PB to the
point at which oscillation just ceases. Make a note of the PB (PB′) at this point.
5.
6.
7.
If the controller is fitted with a cooling channel, enable this now.
Observe the oscillation waveform and adjust ‘R2G’ until a symmetrical wave form is observed (Figure
B2.4.6).
Set PB, Ti and Td according to table B2.4.6.
Control type
PB
Ti
Td
Proportional only
P+I
P+I+D
2 PB′
2.2 PB′
1.7 PB′
Off
0.8 T
0.5 T
Off
Off
0.12 T
Table B2.4.6 Calculate parameter values
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 151
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.4.6 MANUAL TUNING (Cont.)
Temperature
Setpoint
R2G correct
R2G too large
R2G too small
Time
Figure 2.4.6a Relative Cool Gain
CUTBACK VALUES
The PID terms calculated from Table 2.4.6, above, should be entered before the cutback values are set.
The above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control. If unacceptable levels of
overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up, or for large step changes in PV, then the cutback parameters
should be set manually, as follows:
1.
Initially set the cutback values to one proportional bandwidth converted into display units. This can be
calculated by taking the value in percent that has been installed into the parameter ‘PB’ and entering it
into the following formula:
PB/100  Span of controller = Cutback High and Cutback Low
For example, if PB = 10% and the span of the controller is 0 to 1200°C, then
Cutback High = Cutback Low = 10/100  1200 = 120
2.
If overshoot is observed following the correct settings of the PID terms increase the value of ‘CBL’ by
the value of the overshoot in display units. If undershoot is observed increase the value of the parameter ‘CBH’ by the value of the undershoot in display units.
Display units
Initial overshoot
PV approaching SP
from above:
adjust CBH
Setpoint
PV approaching SP
from below:
adjust CBL
Initial undershoot
Time
Figure 2.4.6b Manual Cutback setting
Appendix B
Page 152
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.5 SETPOINT
The controller setpoint is the Working Setpoint which can be derived from:1. SP1 or SP2, both of which are manually set by the user and can be switched into use by an external signal or via the user interface.
2. From an external (remote) analogue source
3. The output of a programmer function block.
B2.5.1 Setpoint function block
As well as providing a setpoint, the function block also provides:
1. The ability to limit the rate of change of the setpoint before it is applied to the control algorithm.
2. Upper and lower limits. These are defined as setpoint limits, ‘SP High Limit’ and ‘SP Low Limit’, for the
local setpoints and instrument range high and low for other setpoint sources.
Note: All setpoints are limited by ‘Range High’ and ‘Range Low’ so that if ‘SP High Limit’, for example, is set higher than ‘Range High’, then ‘SP High Limit’ is ignored and the setpoint is limited at the
‘Range High’ value.
User configurable methods for tracking are available, such that the transfers between setpoints and between
operating modes do not cause ‘bumps’ in the setpoint.
Figure B2.5.1, below, shows the function block schematic.
PSP High Limit
Programmer SP*
Prog
PSP Low Limit
Local
SP2
SP High Limit
SP Low Limit
SP1
SP2 Enable
SP High Limit
Enable Rem SP
Local
SP1 Enable
Target SP
SP Low Limit
Remote
Trim High
Range min
Local SP + Remote
trim
Remote type
Trim Low
Remote SP
Range max
Remote only
Local Trim
Remote
+ local trim
Range max
Target SP
Other inputs:
PV
Ramp rate
Servo
Sp changed
Working SP
Ramp
Range min
Ramp Status
Figure 2.5.1 Setpoint Function block
*Note: Programmer not available this release.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 153
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.5.2 Setpoint Limits
The setpoint generator provides limits for each of the setpoint sources as well as an overall set of limits for
the loop. These are summarised in figure 2.5.2, below.
MaxDisp
+Span
Range
High
SP
High Limit
Remote
SP1
SP Trim
High
Target
SP
SP2
SP
Low Limit
Range
Low
Working
SP
LoopAlm
setpoints
SP Trim
SP Trim
Low
-Span
MinDisp
Figure 2.5.2 Setpoint Limits
‘Range High’ and ‘Range Low’ provide the range information for the control loop. They are used in control
calculations to generate proportional bands. Span = Range High – Range Low.
B2.5.3 Setpoint Rate Limit
This symmetrical rate limiter allows the rate of change of setpoint to be controlled, preventing step changes
in the setpoint. The limit is applied to the working setpoint which includes setpoint trim.
Rate limiting is enabled using the ‘Rate’ parameter. If this is set to ‘0’ then any change made to the setpoint
will be effective immediately. If it is set to any other value, then a change in the setpoint will be have rate
limiting applied at the value set, in units per minute. Rate limit applies to SP1, SP2 and Remote SP.
When rate limit is active ‘Rate Done’ displays ‘No’. When the setpoint has been reached the value changes
to ‘Yes’.
When ‘Rate’ is set to a value (other than ‘Off’) an additional parameter ‘SP Rate Disable’ is displayed which
allows the setpoint rate limit to be turned off and on without the need to adjust the ‘Rate’ parameter between
Off and a working value.
If the PV is in sensor break, the rate limit is suspended and the working setpoint takes the value of 0. On
sensor break being released the working setpoint goes from 0 to the selected setpoint value at the rate limit.
Appendix B
Page 154
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.5.4 Setpoint Tracking
The setpoint used by the controller may be derived from a number of sources. For example:1. Local setpoints SP1 and SP2. These may be selected through the front panel using the parameter ‘SP
Select’, through digital communications or by configuring a digital input which selects either SP1 or
SP2. This might be used, for example, to switch between normal running conditions and standby conditions. If Rate Limit is switched off the new setpoint value is adopted immediately when the switch is
changed.
2. A programmer* generating a setpoint which varies over time. When the programmer is running, the
‘Track SP’ and ‘Track PV’ parameters update continuously so that the programmer can perform its own
servo. This is sometimes referred to as ‘Program Tracking’.
3. From a Remote analogue source. The source could be an external analogue input into an analogue
input module wired to the ‘Alt SP’ parameter or a User Value wired to the ‘Alt SP’ parameter. The
remote setpoint is used when the parameter ‘Alt SP Enable’ is set to ‘Yes’.
Setpoint tracking (sometimes referred to as Remote Tracking) ensures that the Local setpoint adopts the Remote setpoint value when switching from Local to Remote to maintain bumpless transfer from Remote to Local. Bumpless transfer does not take place when changing from Local to Remote.
Note: If Rate Limit is applied, the setpoint will change at the set rate, when changing from Local to
Remote.
B2.5.5 Manual Tracking
When the controller is operating in manual mode the currently selected SP (SP1 or SP2) tracks the PV. When
the controller resumes automatic control there will be no step change in the resolved SP. Manual tracking
does not apply to the remote setpoint or programmer setpoint.
*Note: Programmer not available this release.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 155
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.6 OUTPUT
B2.6.1 Introduction
The output function block selects the correct output sources to be used, determines whether to heat or cool
and then applies limits. Power feed forward and non-linear cooling are also applied.
It is this block that manages the output in exception conditions such as start up and sensor break.
The outputs, ‘Ch1 Output’ and ‘Ch2 Output’, are normally wired to a digital I/O where they are converted
into analogue or time proportioned signals for electrical heating, cooling or valve movement.
B2.6.2 Output Limits
Figure B2.6.2 shows where output limits are applied.
PID Menu
Including Gain
Scheduling
output limits
Output High
+100
Output Low
-100
Output High 2
+100
Diag Menu
Sched Out High
Sched Out Low
Output Low 2
-100
Output High 3
+100
Output Menu
Diagnostics
Menu
Writable not wirable
Read only
Writable not
wirable
Output High
Working Out Low
Working Out High
Min
Output Low 3
-100
Output Menu
Rem.Output
High
Rem. Output
Low
Working
output
Output Low
Tune Menu
OPL limiting to +ve
High Output
Low Output
Writable and wirable
Figure B2.6.2 Output Limits
Notes:
1. Individual output limits may be set in the PID list for each set of PID parameters when gain scheduling is in use.
2. Limits may also be applied from an external source. These are ‘Rem.Output High’ and ‘Rem. Output Low’ found in the Output menu. These parameters are wireable; for example they may be
wired to an analogue input module so that a limit may applied through some external strategy. If
these parameters are not wired +100% limit is applied every time the instrument is powered up.
(Continued)
Appendix B
Page 156
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.6.2 OUTPUT LIMITS (Cont.)
Notes (Continued)
3. The tightest limits (between Remote and PID) are connected to the output where an overall limit
is applied using parameters ‘Output High’ and ‘Output Low’.
4. ‘Working Out High’ and ‘Working Out low’ found in the Diagnostics list are read only parameters
showing the overall working output limits.
5. The tune limits are a separate part of the algorithm and are applied to the output during the tuning process. The overall limits ‘Output Hi’ and ‘Output Lo’ always have priority.
B2.6.3 Output Rate Limit
The output rate limiter is a rate-of-change limiter, set in (%/sec) which prevents step changes in output power
being demanded. Rate limiting is performed by determining the direction in which the output is changing,
and then incrementing or decrementing the Working Output (Main menu) until it equals the required output
(Target OP).
The amount to increment or decrement is calculated using the sampling rate of the algorithm (125ms) and
the selected rate limit. If the change in output is less than the rate limit increment the change takes effect
immediately.
The rate limit direction and increment is calculated on every execution of the rate limit. Therefore, if the rate
limit is changed during execution, the new rate of change takes immediate effect. If the output is changed
whilst rate limiting is taking place, the new value takes immediate effect on the direction of the rate limit and
in determining whether the rate limit has completed.
The rate limiter is self-correcting such that if the increment is small it is accumulated until it takes effect.
The output rate limit is active when the loop is in both auto and manual modes, and during autotune.
B2.6.4 Sensor Break Mode
If a Sensor break is detected by the measurement system the loop reacts in one of two ways, according to
the configuration of ‘Sbrk Mode’ (‘Safe’ or ‘Hold’). On exit from sensor break the transfer is bumpless – the
power output starts controlling again from the current operating setpoint and moves, under PID closed-loop
control, from its pre-set value to the control value.
SAFE
If set to ‘Safe’, the output adopts a pre-set level (Sbrk OP). If rate limit is not configured, the output steps to
the Sbrk OP value, otherwise it ramps to this value at the rate limit.
HOLD
If set to ‘Hold’ the output remains at its current value. If Output Rate Limit (Rate) has been configured a small
step may be seen as the working output will limit to the value existing two iterations ago.
B2.6.5 Forced Output
This feature enables the user to specify what the output of the loop should do when moving from automatic
control to manual control. The default is that the output power is maintained but it is then adjustable by the
user.
If Manual Mode is set to ‘Step’, the user can set a manual output power value and on transition to manual the
output will be forced to that value.
If Manual Mode is set to ‘Track’ the output steps to the forced manual output and then subsequent edits to
the output power are tracked back into the manual output value.
If Manual Mode is set to ‘Last Man. Out’ then when moving from automatic to manual mode, the output
adopts the last manual output value.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 157
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.6.6 Power Feed Forward
Power feed forward is used when driving an electrical heating element. It monitors the line voltage and compensates for fluctuations before they affect the process temperature. The use of this will give better steady
state performance when the line voltage is not stable.
It is mainly used for digital type outputs which drive contactors or solid state relays. Because it only has value
in this type of application it can be switched off using the parameter ‘Pff En’. It should also be disabled for
any non-electric heating process. It is not necessary when Eurotherm analogue thyristor control is used since
compensation for power changes is included in the thyristor driver.
Consider a process running at 25% power, with zero error and then the line voltage falls by 20%. The heater
power would drop by 36% because of the square law dependence of power on voltage. A drop in temperature would result. After a time, the thermocouple and controller would sense this fall and increase the ONTIME of the contactor just enough to bring the temperature back to set point. Meanwhile the process would
be running a bit cooler than optimum which may cause some imperfection in the product.
With power feed forward enabled the line voltage is monitored continuously and ON-TIME increased or decreased to compensate immediately. In this way the process need never suffer a temperature disturbance
caused by a line voltage change.
‘Power Feed forward’ should not be confused with ‘Feed forward’ which is described in section B2.6.8.
B2.6.7 Cool Type
Cooling methods vary from application to application. For example, an extruder barrel may be cooled by
forced air (from a fan), or by circulating water or oil around a jacket. The cooling effect will be different depending on the method. ‘Cool Type’ (appears only if the ‘setup’ parameter ‘Ch2 Control’ is set to ‘PID’) is
used to accommodate different types of cooling methods as follows:
LINEAR
The cooling algorithm may be set to linear where the controller output changes linearly with the PID demand
signal.
OIL COOLING
‘Cool Type’ = ‘Oil’. As oil is, to all intents and purposes, non-evaporative, oil cooling is pulsed in a linear
manner.
WATER COOLING
If the area being cooled is running well above 100°C, then the first few pulses of water flash into steam giving
greatly increased cooling due to the latent heat of evaporation. When the area cools, less (or even no) evaporation takes place and the cooling is less effective.
Setting ‘Cool Type’ to ‘Water’ delivers much shortened pulses of water for the first few percent of the cooling
range, when the water is likely to be flashing into steam. This compensates for the transition out of the initial
strong evaporative cooling.
FAN COOLING
‘Cool Type = ‘Fan’. Fan cooling is much gentler than water cooling and not so immediate or decisive (because of the long heat transfer path through the process mechanics). With fan cooling, a cool gain setting
of three upwards is typical. Delivery of pulses to the blower is non linear, this non-linearity being caused by
a combination of forced air movement and fan efficiency as a function of air velocity (e. g. the efficiency of a
fan when producing a low speed (laminar) air flow is different from its efficiency when producing a highspeed, turbulent flow.
Appendix B
Page 158
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.6.8 Feed forward
Feed forward is a method of adding an extra scalable component to the PID output, before any limiting. It
can be used, for example, in the implementation of cascade loops and constant head control or it can be
used to pre-load the control signal with a value close to that which is required to achieve the setpoint, thus
improving system response. Feed forward (FF) is applied such that the PID output is limited by trim limits
and acts as a trim on a FF value. The FF value is derived either from the PV or setpoint by scaling the PV or
SP by the ‘FF Gain’ and ‘FF Offset’. Alternatively, a remote value may be used for the FF value, but this is not
subject to any scaling. The resultant FF value is added to the limited PID OP and becomes the PID output
as far as the output algorithm is concerned. The feedback value then generated must then have the FF contribution removed before being used again by the PID algorithm. The diagram below shows how feed forward is implemented.
FF Gain
FF Offset
SP
Gain
PV
FF Type
Remote
FF Type
Feedback
TrimHi
SP1
FF Trim Lim
PID
Output
algorithm
Output
PV
TrimLo
Figure B2.6.8 Implementation of Feed forward
B2.6.9 Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband
CONTROL ACTION
For temperature control ‘Control Act’ should be set to ‘Rev’. For a PID controller this means that the heater
power decreases as the PV increases. For an on/off controller, output 1 (usually heat) will be on (100%) when
PV is below the setpoint and output 2 (usually cool) will be on when PV is above the setpoint.
HYSTERESIS
Hysteresis applies to on/off control only and is set in the units of the PV. In heating applications the output
will turn off when the PV is at setpoint. It will turn on again when the PV falls below SP by the hysteresis value.
This shown in Figures B2.6.9a and B2.6.9b below for a heat and cool controller.
Hysteresis is intended to prevent the output from repeated switching on and off ‘chattering’ at the control
setpoint. If the hysteresis is set to 0 then even the smallest change in the PV when at setpoint will cause the
output to switch. Hysteresis should be set to a value which provides an acceptable life for the output contacts, but which does not cause unacceptable oscillations in the PV.
If this performance is unacceptable, it is recommended that PID control be used instead.
DEADBAND
Deadband ‘Ch2 Deadband’ can operate on both on/off control or PID control where it has the effect of extending the period when no heating or cooling is applied. In PID control the effect is modified by both the
integral and derivative terms. Deadband might be used in PID control, for example, where actuators take
time to complete their cycle thus ensuring that heating and cooling are not being applied at the same time.
Deadband is likely to be used, therefore, in on/off control only. Figure B2.6.9b, below, adds a deadband of
20 to the first example in figure B2.6.9a.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 159
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.6.9 EFFECT OF CONTROL ACTION, HYSTERESIS AND DEADBAND (Cont.)
HYST.C
Heating and cooling type
both ‘On/Off’.
SP
HYST.H
Setpoint = 300°C
Control action = Rev
Heating hysteresis = 8 °C
OP1
HEATING
HEATING
Cooling hysteresis = 10°C
COOLING
OP2
Heating off at
SP (300°C)
Cooling
Cooling
on at
off at SP
SP+ HYST.C (300°C)
(310°C)
Heating
on at
SP- HYST.H
(292°C)
Heating off
at SP
(300°C)
Figure B2.6.9a Deadband OFF
HYST.C
D.BAND
SP
Heating and cooling type
both ‘On/Off’.
HYST.H
Setpoint = 300°C
Control action = Rev
Heating hysteresis = 8 °C
OP1
HEATING
HEATING
Cooling hysteresis = 10°C
COOLING
OP2
Power deadband
Heating off at
SP (300°C)
Cooling
Cooling
on at
SP+ HYST.C off at
D.BAND
(310°C)
(305°C)
Heating
on at
SP- HYST.H
(292°C)
Heating off
at SP
(300°C)
Figure B2.6.9b Deadband ON set at 50% of Cooling.
Appendix B
Page 160
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.6.10 Valve nudge
For systems configured as Unbounded Valve Positioning (VPU) - set up in Loop Setup configuration Ch1(2)
control), it is possible to move the valve in small increments towards the open position (Nudge Raise) or towards the closed position (Nudge Lower). The trigger for such nudging can be a digital input (e.g. contact
closure) ‘wired’ to the nudge raise or lower parameter, the up or down arrow keys or a command received
over the serial link.
The nudge command causes the valve drive output to drive the valve for either the minimum on time, or for
as long as the command is ‘true’, whichever is the longer (note 2). The default minimum on time is 125ms,
but this can be edited in the configuration for the relevant output relay (section 4.7.2).
Default min on
time
125ms
Default min
on times
Min on time
(User value)
Min on time
(User value)
Min on time
(User value)
Valve drive
Nudge Raise (Lower)
command
Demand < de- Demand > default
fault minimum- minimum- on time
on time
Demand < user entered minimum-on
time. Motor runs for
minimum on time.
Demand > user-entered minimum-on
time. Motor runs until current minimumon time elapses.
Figure B2.6.10 Valve nudge examples
Notes:
1. If Ch1 is set to VPU, Nudge operates the channel 1 valve, no matter what Ch2 is set to. If Ch1 is
not set to VPU, and Ch2 is set to VPU then the nudge operates on channel 2 valve.
2. The minimum on time is continuously retriggered. This means that if a minimum on time of (say)
10 seconds has been configured, then the valve may continue to move for up to 10 seconds
after the command has been removed. That is, it continues until the current minimum on time
period has expired.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix B
Page 161
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
B2.6.11 Time Proportioning
Millieconds
PID controllers somtimes use Time Proportioning to control the average power to the load. This is done by
repeatedly switching the output on for a period (Ton) and then off for a period (Toff). The total period (Ton +
Toff) is called the ‘cycle time’. During each cycle, the average power delivered to the load is:
PAvg = PHeater x Duty cycle,
where ‘PHeater‘ is the actual transferred heater (or cooler) power and Duty cycle = Ton/(Ton + Toff), normally
represented as a percentage value.
The PID controller calculates the Duty Cycle (the PID output control signal from 0 to 100%) and provides a
Minimum on time between 100ms to 150 seconds.
Figure B2.6.11 shows how Ton, Toff and cycle time vary with demand %.
Ton + Toff = Cycle time
Ton
Toff
Tmin
Output demand (%)
Figure B2.6.11 Time proportioning curves (Minimum on time = 625ms)
Note: For this instrument, only ‘Min on time’ is configurable
B2.7 DIAGNOSTICS
See section 4.6.7 for definitions of these parameters
Appendix B
Page 162
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Appendix C: REFERENCE
C1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
The battery can be replaced only after the unit has been withdrawn from the panel. It is therefore normally
necessary to unwire the instrument before changing the battery.
WARNING
Before removing the supply voltage wiring, isolate the supply voltage and secure it against unintended operation.
Note: The new battery must be installed within 10 seconds of the exhausted battery’s removal, or
data will be lost.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Isolate the supply voltage and secure it against accidental operation.
Remove supply voltage wiring from the rear terminals.
Remove all signal wiring
Remove the Ethernet cable and USB device if fitted.
Remove the two securing springs, using a small screwdriver if necessary.
Prise the two chassis-retaining bungs, using a small screwdriver if necessary.
Ease the latching ears outwards, whilst pulling forwards on the bezel, until the chassis is free of the
sleeve.
8. Replace the battery. Recycle the exhausted battery according to local procedures.
9. Reinsert the chassis into the sleeve, and secure it using the chassis-retaining bungs previously
removed.
10. Reinstall the chassis into the panel and secure it using the retaining springs previously removed.
11. Reinstall all wiring, the Ethernet cable and USB device, if any.
12. Reset the date and time as described in section 4.1.1.
Retaining spring
(two places)
Remove retaining
bungs (two places)
Remove
Signal wiring
Remove USB device
and Ethernet cable
Remove retainers (two places)
Isolate supply voltage
Remove
supply voltage wiring
Replace battery
Remove the chassis
from the sleeve
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix C
Page 163
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
C2 SETTING UP AN FTP SERVER USING FILEZILLA
C2.1 DOWNLOADING
‘FileZilla’ is a free download from the internet (search for ‘FileZilla server download’).
1.
Download the latest version, following the instructions on
the screen.
2.
Answer ‘No’ to the question ‘Do you want to view only the
webpage content that was delivered securely’.
3.
If necessary enable file download.
4.
In the ‘Do you want to run or save
this file’ Security Warning windowclick on ‘Run’
5.
In the ‘The Publisher could not be
verified..., Security Warning window, click on ‘Run’
6.
Agree or cancel the License agreement. If ‘Agree’, choose
‘Standard’ as the type of install.
Appendix C
Page 164
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
C2.1 DOWNLOADING (Cont.)
7.
Choose the destination for the file
8.
Select startup settings
9.
Click on Close when Installation is complete.
10.
Click ‘OK’ in the ‘Connect to Server’ window.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix C
Page 165
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
C2.2 SERVER SETUP
1.
Create a new folder (directory) called, for this example, ‘Archive’
in a suitable location such as the C drive, or the desktop.
2.
In the Filezilla server window, click on ‘File’ and select ‘Connect to
Server’.
The ‘Logged on’ message appears
3
In the Edit menu, select ‘Users’ and in the ‘General’
page, click on ‘Add’ and enter a name for the user,
then click ‘OK’. For this example, ‘GeneralUser’ has
been used, but it may be more advantageous to
use ‘Anonymous’ because this is the default name
in the recorder/controller. Click on ‘OK’.
4
In the Edit menu, select ‘Users’ and in the ‘Shared
Folders’ page, click on ‘Add’
A browse window opens allowing the user to
select the new folder (‘Archive’) created in step 1,
above.
When OK has been clicked to confirm the selection, the new folder appears in the centre window
(with an ‘h’ next to it to indicate that this is the
home folder for this ftp user setup.
5.
Click on all the ‘File’ and ‘Directory’ enable tick
boxes, then click OK
Appendix C
Page 166
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
C2.3 PC SETUP
1.
Operate the ‘Start’ button, and select ‘Control Panel’ from the window that
appears. Double click on ‘Windows Firewall’
2.
Click on the ‘Exceptions’ tab in the window that appears, and check
that both ‘FTPControl’ and ‘FTPData’ are enabled (ticked). If not, the
user’s IT department should be contacted for advice.
3.
Click on ‘Add Program...’ and browse to the Filezilla destination
defined in step 7 of the download section (C2.1). Select ‘FileZilla
server.exe’ and click on ‘Open’
‘FileZilla server.exe’ appears in the Exceptions list.
Click on ‘OK’
C2.4 RECORDER/CONTROLLER SET UP
In Network Archiving (section 4.2.2):
1. Enter the IP address of the pc in which the FTP server has been enabled in the ‘Primary Server’ field.
2. Enter the Primary User name, as entered in step three of the Server setup procedure (section C2.2)
above (GeneralUser in this example).
3. Enter the IP address of another suitable pc which has been configured as an ftp server in the ‘Sec.
Server’ field, and enter the relevant ‘Sec. User’ name.
4. Configure the other unattended archive parameters as required (section 4.2.2).
Note: For the example above, ‘Password’ was not enabled in the User Accounts setup page (section
C2.2), so for this example any Primary (Sec.) password entry is ignored. If a password had been
entered in the User Accounts setup, then the Primary (Sec.) Password field would have to contain
this password.
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix C
Page 167
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
C2.5 ARCHIVE ACTIVITY
Once a demand or unattended archive is initiated, the FileZilla Server page shows the activity status as the
archive progresses. Figure C2.5 shows a typical page. The top of the page shows the transaction details
between the server and any clients to which it is connected. The bottom portion shows details of the files
currently being transferred. These files are archived to the ‘Archive’ folder.
Figure C2.5 FileZilla Server archive activity page
Appendix C
Page 168
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
C3 FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS
C3.1 EIGHT INPUT OR BLOCK
An eight input logical OR block whose output is high (1, On) if any one or more inputs is high (1, On). If more
than eight inputs are required, a second block is automatically introduced, as shown in figure C3.1a. The
blocks in the figure are given the names ‘A’ and ‘B’, where ‘A’ and ‘B’ can be any of the 12 available instances.
Figure C3.1a Eight input OR block
OR blocks are used automatically by the ‘user wiring’ when more than one source is wired to the same destination parameter. For example, it may be required that Relay (Digital I/O 2A2B) is to operate if channel 1
alarm 1 and/or channel 2 alarm 1 channels goes active. In such a case, the ‘Active’ parameter for the two
channel alarms would be wired to the same relay’s ‘PV’ parameter.
OR blocks are invisible to the user interface, but the iTools graphical wiring page for this configuration (figure C3.1b), shows that an OR block has been introduced to OR the two alarm outputs together.
Figure C3.1b iTools representation of OR block usage
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Appendix C
Page 169
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
C4 TCP PORT NUMBERS
The following TCP ports are made use of by the instrument.
Port
20
21
502
Usage
File Transfer protocol (FTP) data
FTP control
Modbus TCP communications
C5 ISOLATION DIAGRAM
Single (150V ac)
Ethernet
comms
Double (250V ac)
Relays
Double (250V ac)
PV1
Microprocessor
and system
circuits
Double (250V ac)
PV2
Double (250V ac)
SN1
Line
Neutral
Rectification
Power
Supply
Circuits
Double (250V ac)
PV3
Double (250V ac)
PV4
Safety Earth
(Protective
conductor
terminal)
USB Comms
PSU Logic/
Digital I/O
Figure C5 Isolation diagram
Appendix C
Page 170
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Numerics
Index
Autotune (Cont.)
1 Hour Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
12 Hour Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
24 Hour Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
32-Bit resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Failure modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Initiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Average Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
A
Back to: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Background chart colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Balance Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Battery
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Black wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Execution order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Blue
Arrow
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Left/Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Bootrom upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Boundary 1-2 (2-3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Bounded mode (VPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Bring to Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Bring to Front
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Monitor context menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
About the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Abs Hi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Abs Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Accents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Access levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Account
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Acknowledge alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 48, 71
Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Not acked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Acute accent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Add. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
New wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adding parameters to the Watch list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Alarm
Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Message filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Summary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49
Align Tops/Lefts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
All Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Alt SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Any Alarm/Channel Alarm/Sys Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Application blocks supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Archive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Disabled/Failed/Timeout error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Menu (Demand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 133
To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
AT.R2G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Auto/Man Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Auto/Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
AutoMan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Automatic
Archive rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
and gain scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
and inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
and sensor break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
B
C
Cancel All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cant Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Capture current values into a data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Carb Act CO O2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Carbon Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Carbon Potential Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CBH (CBH2) (CBH3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
CBH, CBL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 145
CBL (CBL2) (CBL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cedilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Ch1 (Ch2)
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
OnOff Hyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 156
Pot Brk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Pot Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Travel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
TravelT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Ch2 Deadband. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Ch2DeadB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chain icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ChanAvg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Change Battery
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Page i
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Change Time (Rate of change alarms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ChanMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ChanMin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Channel
Break Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CJC type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 46
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
External CJ Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Input filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Input high/low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Linearisation type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
No. of decimal places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 54, 55
Prefix (’C’ or ’V’). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Range Low/high/Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Scale High/Low/Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Scrolling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Shunt value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Trend configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 54, 55
Chart colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
CJC Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Clean
Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Max Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Msg Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Rcov Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Click to Select Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cln
Enabl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Clock
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
CO Local/Remote etc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Cold start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Colour
Channel trend selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Function blocks etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Column enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 123
Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Comms Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Timeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Company ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Component Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Create/Flatten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Config Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Configuration
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Loop
Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setpoint menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tune menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Zirconia block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ConfRev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connector locations and pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Context menu
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Control Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 159
Control Loop 1/2
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Cool Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 158
Copy
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Diagram fragment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fragment to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
iTools components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
iTools diagram items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Maths function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Counter configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Create a new empty data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Create a new watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Create Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 119, 120
Critically damped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
CSV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Custom messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Custom note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
High/low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cutoff High/Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55
Page ii
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
D
Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Dashed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Data set creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Database failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Date
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Active/Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DB revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
DC input ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Deadband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
De-bump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Default Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Demand Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Deriv
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Derivative action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Descriptor
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Maths channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DevBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DevHi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DevLo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Server failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
DIA, DIB specificatoin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diacriticals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Diagram context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Digital communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
DigitalHi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DigitalLo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Direct Connection (iTools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Disable
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Mode
Horizontal bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Horizontal trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Vertical bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Vertical trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Down arrow key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Download the selected data set to the device . . . . . . . . 125
DST
Active/Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
E
Edit
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Eight-input OR block details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Electical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
En Rem Gas Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Enable
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Display modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Probe cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Promote List.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
End Time/date etc for DST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Endothermic Gas Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Eng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Engineer Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Envelope icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Error
Derivative type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Loop diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sched type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 143
Ethernet
Comms spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Connector location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Exit History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ext. CJ Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
External CJC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
F
Faceplate cycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 30
FallROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fault Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Feature Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Feedforward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 158, 159
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
FF parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
File format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Find
End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Firmware
FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fixed IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Flash Duration/Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Flash memory full. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Flatten compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Page iii
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Follow Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Force Exec Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Forced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 157
Forward to: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
From Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
FTP
Archiving lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Archiving to slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Primary/Secondary Server Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Server
Automatic archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Demand archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Full page scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Function blocks
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
G
Gain Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Gas Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Gas references parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Ghosted wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Global Ack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Go to View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Go Up/Down a Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Graphical Wiring Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Grave accent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Green
Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Green wiring editor items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Greyed-out wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Grid, show/hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
GrpAvg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
GrpMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
GrpMaxlatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
GrpMin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
GrpMinlatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
H
H.Trend Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
H2 Local/Remote etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Half page scroll
Trace history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Hidden parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
High
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Output
Tune menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
High Cut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Background colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Options menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 157
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Page definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Horizontal bargraph mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Horizontal trend mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
HPage Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Hysteresis
Channel alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
On/off loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
I
In1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 54
In2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Inertia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Inhibit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Initiate upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
InOp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Input
Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Insert item ahead of selected item (Watch/Recipe) . . . . 125
Installation
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Mechanical
Dimensional details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Instr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Integral
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 142
Term. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Internal
CJ temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CJC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Invert
DI/DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
IP Adjust State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IP Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Isolation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
iTools Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
L
Label symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Last Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Last Day/Hour/Month/Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Last Written on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LastMOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 157
Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
LBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
LBT (LBT2) (LBT3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Leading paces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Limit setpoint rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Page iv
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Limits
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Line voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 158
Linearisation type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Logic I/O specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Logic i/o specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 16
Loop
Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 142
Diagnostics display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Display mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Main menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Output menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
PID menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Setpoint menu parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setup menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tune menu parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Loose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Low
Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 145
Low Cut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Lp Break. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
M
MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Magenta wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Magnification factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Major Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Man
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Manual
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 141
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Master communications timouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Master Conn 2 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Maths channel
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Max Rcov Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Max Rcov time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Maximum number of traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Measured Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 4
Media Duration/Free/Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Media system alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Messages
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Min Cal Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Min On Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 162
DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Min Rcov Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
MinCalcT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Input (Maths). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Channel 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Custom Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Loop 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Loop 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
OR block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
User Lin 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
User Lin 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
User Lin 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
User Lin 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Virtual Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Virtual Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Virtual Channel 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Virtual Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Virtual Channel 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Virtual Channel 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Virtual Channel 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Virtual Channel 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Virtual Channel 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Virtual Channel10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Virtual Channel11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Virtual Channel12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Virtual Channel13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Virtual Channel14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Zirconia block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
TCP Port numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Monthly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Motorised valve control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mouse
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Move selected item
Watch/Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
MR (MR2) (MR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Multi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
mVSbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Page v
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
N
P
N.acknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Navigation pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Network
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
None
Archive (demand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Automatic archiving Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
FF Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Non-volatile memory failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Non-volatile parameters in EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Normal compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Nudge raise (lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Num Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Number resolution (IEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Numeric display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Nvol writes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Page key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Pan tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Parameter
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 123
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Parameters
Blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
PID menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Serial comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tune menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Password
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Feature upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
FTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fragment From File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Paused symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
PB (PB2) (PB3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 54
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Pff En . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
PID
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Loop setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Point1 to Point6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PotBrk Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Power feed forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Power In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PrefMaster Conn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PrefMaster IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Preset
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Val. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55
Pri
mary Server/User/Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Probe
Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Input/offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Process factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Promote List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Prop OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
O
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
On Media Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
On/Off control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
OP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
OP1, OP2 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Open an existing watch/recipe file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Operation
Maths function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
OperationCounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Operator
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pages - See ’Display modes’
Pass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Options menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
OR block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Output
DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
hi, lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
High
Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
PID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Limits (Output menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Low
Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
PID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
PID Gain scheduling type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Rate Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Over damped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Overflow
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Overwrite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Page vi
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Proportional band (PB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Proportional plus integral (PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Push pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Push to Back
iTools monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
iTools wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
PV
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Derivative type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
FF Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Frozen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Maths channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
PID Gain scheduling type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Sched Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
R
R symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
R2G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 145
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
R2G (R2G2) (R2G3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Raise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Range
High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Rate
Automatic archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Working setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
RateDone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Recorder
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Panel installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Recording
Channels included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Failure alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Red wiring editor items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Redo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Relative cool gain (R2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Relay
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Rem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
PID Gain scheduling type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Rem Gas Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Rem. Output Low (High) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Remote
CJC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Computer setup (archiving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
FF Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Input (PID menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Output Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Remove recipe parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rename Wiring Editor diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Re-Route
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Reset
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Virtual channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Resistance input ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Resolution
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Maths channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Zirconia probe option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Response Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Rest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Restore factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RiseROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
RTD types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
S
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 157
Not Acked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
OP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Save
After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Current watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Saver Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
SBrk
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
OP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Scale
Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
all device addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sched
Loop diagnostic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Screen brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Scroll key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Sec
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Page vii
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Selecting components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Sensor Break. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Val . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SensorB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sepoint
Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Serial
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ServoToPV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 143
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 153
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
PID Gain scheduling type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 143
Rate Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Setting time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Settling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Show Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Show/Hide grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Shunt value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Soot alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sooting alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
High (Low) Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Int Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Rate Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Trim High(Low) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
SP1 (SP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Space Evenly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Stage
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Time
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Standby action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Start Day/Month/Time/Week. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Start On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Startup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Status
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Demand archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Maths channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 157
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Stopping the tuning process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Strict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Supervisory Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Supply voltage wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Suspend
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Suspended
Demand archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Symbols used on labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
System
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Message
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
T
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Target
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
TCP Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Td . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Td (Td2) (Td3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Temp
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Terminal torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Termination details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Test signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Thermocouple data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Three term control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Ti. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Ti (Ti2) (Ti3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
TI Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Tilde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Time
Format (Modbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Remaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Time Proportioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Timout
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
To
Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Top level menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Totaliser configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Trace
Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Page viii
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 157
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
OP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Val . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Transfer between sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Transferring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Trend
Background colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Archive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Tune
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Type
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Channel Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
of control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Virtual channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53, 55
U
UHH Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Umlaut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Unbounded mode (VPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Undelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Under Damped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Unit ID Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Units
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Maths channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Unlink
Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Unpacking the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Up arrow key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Update rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
USB
Archive destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overcurrent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Port location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Port specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Use Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
User linearisation tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
User wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
V
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Valve Raise/Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Vertical bargraph mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Vertical trend mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Virtual channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
VPB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 140
VPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 140
W
Watch/Recipe editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adding parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Capture current values into a data set . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Clear the selected data set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Create a new empty data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Create a new watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Data set creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Download the selected data set to the device . . . . 125
Insert item ahead of selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Move selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Open an existing watch/recipe file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Open OPC Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Remove recipe parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Save the current watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Weekly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Wire sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Wiring
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Zirconia Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Failure (system error). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Software
Colours (iTools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
iTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Remove wire (user interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Working
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Out High (Low) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 153
Z
Zirconia block option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Page ix
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
This page is deliberately left blank
HA030554
Issue 1 Jly 10
Page x
Eurotherm: International sales and service
AUSTRALIA Sydney
Eurotherm Pty. Ltd.
Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099
Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288
E-mail [email protected]
FINLAND Abo
Eurotherm Finland
Telephone (+358) 2250 6030
Fax (+358) 2250 3201
E-mail [email protected]
NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn
Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+31 172) 417260
E-mail [email protected]
NORWAY Oslo
AUSTRIA Vienna
Eurotherm GmbH
Telephone (+43 1) 798 7601
Fax (+43 1) 798 7605
E-mail [email protected]
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Moha
Eurotherm S.A/N.V.
Telephone (+32) 85 274080
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081
E-mail [email protected]
BRAZIL Campinas-SP
Eurotherm Ltda.
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345
E-mail [email protected]
CHINA
Eurotherm China
Shanghai Office
Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188
Fax (+86 21) 6145 2602
E-mail [email protected]
Beijing Office
Telephone (+86 10) 5909 5700
Fax (+86 10) 5909 5709 or
Fax (+86 10) 5909 5710
E-mail [email protected]
FRANCE Lyon
Eurotherm Automation SA
Telephone (+33 478) 664500
Fax (+33 478) 352490
E-mail [email protected]
GERMANY Limburg
Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH
Telephone (+49 6431) 2980
Fax (+49 6431) 298119
E-mail [email protected]
INDIA Chennai
Eurotherm India Limited
Telephone (+91 44) 2496 1129
Fax (+91 44) 2496 1831
E-mail [email protected]
IRELAND Dublin
Eurotherm Ireland Limited
Telephone (+353 1) 469 1800
Fax (+353 1) 469 1300
E-mail [email protected]
ITALY Como
Eurotherm S.r.l
Telephone (+39 031) 975111
Fax (+39 031) 977512
E-mail [email protected]
Eurotherm A/S
Telephone (+47 67) 592170
Fax (+47 67) 118301
E-mail [email protected]
POLAND Katowice
Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o
Telephone (+48 32) 218 5100
Fax (+48 32) 218 5108
E-mail [email protected]
SPAIN Madrid
Eurotherm España SA
Telephone (+34 91) 661 6001
Fax (+34 91) 661 9093
E-mail [email protected]
SWEDEN Malmo
Eurotherm AB
Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Fax (+46 40) 384545
E-mail [email protected]
SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040
Fax (+41 44) 787 1044
E-mail [email protected]
UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
Invensys Eurotherm Limited
Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Fax (+44 1903) 265982
E-mail [email protected]
U.S.A Ashburn VA
DENMARK Copenhagen
Eurotherm Danmark AS
Telephone (+45 70) 234670
Fax (+45 70) 234660
E-mail [email protected]
KOREA Seoul
Eurotherm Korea Limited
Telephone (+82 31) 2738507
Fax (+82 31) 2738508
E-mail [email protected]
Eurotherm Inc.
Telephone (+1 703) 724 7300
Fax (+1 703) 724 7301
E-mail [email protected]
ED60
©Copyright Invensys Eurotherm Limited 2010
Invensys, Eurotherm, the Invensys Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, EPower, nanodac, Eycon, Eyris and Wonderware are trademarks of
Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form by any means, neither may it be stored in
a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission of Invensys Eurotherm Linited.
Invensys Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document may therefore be
changed without notice. The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Invensys Eurotherm Limited will accept
no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document.
Represented by:
HA030554/1 (CN26259)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement